Contents
RULES FOR THE SURVEY AND CONST RUCT ION OF STEEL SHIPS .............................................. 3
Part M
WELDING ......................................................................................................................... 3
Chapter 1
GEN ERAL .................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
General ................................................................................................................................ 3
1.2
Tests before Welding Works ................................................................................................. 3
1.3
Welding Works .................................................................................................................... 3
1.4
Inspection and Quality for Weld........................................................................................... 4
Chapter 2
WELDIN G WORKS ...................................................................................................... 5
2.1
General ................................................................................................................................ 5
2.2
Work Scheme ....................................................................................................................... 5
2.3
Welding Preparation ............................................................................................................ 6
2.4
Welding Process................................................................................................................... 6
2.5
Inspection and Quality for Welding ...................................................................................... 9
Chapter 3
TEST SPECIMENS AN D MECHANICAL TESTIN G PROCEDURES ..........................10
3.1
General ...............................................................................................................................10
3.2
Test Specimens ...................................................................................................................10
3.3
Mechanical Testing Procedures ...........................................................................................10
Chapter 4
WELDIN G PROCEDURE AN D RELAT ED SP ECIFICAT IONS ...................................18
4.1
General ...............................................................................................................................18
4.2
Tests for Butt Welded Joints ...............................................................................................23
4.3
Tests for Fillet Weld Joints .................................................................................................38
4.4
Tests for T-joints with Full Penetration ..............................................................................40
4.5
Tests for T-joints with Partial Penetration ..........................................................................44
4.6
Tests for branch connection.................................................................................................48
Chapter 5
WELDERS AND WELDERS QUAL IFICATION TEST S ..............................................50
5.1
General ...............................................................................................................................50
5.2
Qualifications .....................................................................................................................52
5.3
Qualification Tests ..............................................................................................................59
Chapter 6
6.1
WELDIN G CON SUMABL ES .......................................................................................73
General ...............................................................................................................................73
6.2
Electrodes for Manual Arc Welding for Mild and High Tensile Steels and Steels for Low
Temperature Service .....................................................................................................................74
6.3
Automatic Welding Consumables for Mild Steels, High Tensile Steels and Steels for Low
Temperature Service .....................................................................................................................83
6.4
Semi-automatic Welding Consumables for Mild Steels, High Tensile Steels and Steels for
Low Temperature Service..............................................................................................................95
6.5
Electro-slag and Electro-gas Welding Consumables .......................................................... 101
6.6
One Side Automatic Welding Consumables for Mild Steels, High Tensile Steels and Steels
for Low Temperature Service ...................................................................................................... 106
6.7
Welding Consumables for Stainless Steel .......................................................................... 111
1
6.8
Welding Consumables for Aluminium Alloys ..................................................................... 123
6.9
Welding Consumables for High Strength Rolled Steels for Offshore Structures ................. 128
Chapter 7
Non-Destructive Testing Service Suppliers ................................................................ 137
7.1
General ............................................................................................................................. 137
7.2
Requirements for Documents ............................................................................................ 138
7.3
Quality Requirements ....................................................................................................... 138
7.4
Equipment ........................................................................................................................ 139
7.5
Work instructions and procedures etc. .............................................................................. 140
7.6
Reporting .......................................................................................................................... 140
Chapter 8
NON-DESTRUCTIVE INSPECTION FOR THE WELDED JOINTS OF HULL
CONST RUCT IONS ........................................................................................................................ 141
8.1
General ............................................................................................................................. 141
8.2
Qualification of Non-destructive Testing Personnel ........................................................... 142
8.3
Surface Condition ............................................................................................................. 143
8.4
General Plan of Non-destructive Inspection ...................................................................... 143
8.5
Non-destructive Testing Procedure ................................................................................... 145
8.6
Non-destructive Testing Criteria....................................................................................... 146
8.7
Test Records ..................................................................................................................... 149
8.8
Inspection Records ............................................................................................................ 149
8.9
Repair of Faulty Welds, etc. .............................................................................................. 151
Chapter 9
Advanced Non-Destructive Testing ............................................................................ 152
9.1
General ............................................................................................................................. 152
9.2
Application ....................................................................................................................... 153
9.3
Testing Method ................................................................................................................. 153
9.4
ANDT Personnel Qualifications ........................................................................................ 154
9.5
ANDT Specification Verification ....................................................................................... 155
9.6
Surface Condition ............................................................................................................. 156
9.7
ANDT Selection ................................................................................................................ 156
9.8
ANDT Requirements......................................................................................................... 156
9.9
Acceptance Level............................................................................................................... 162
9.10
Test Records ..................................................................................................................... 163
9.11
Unacceptable Indications and Repairs .............................................................................. 165
2
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 1)
RULES FOR THE SURVEY AND CONSTRUCTION OF STEEL SHIPS
1.1
WELDING
Chapter 1
GENERAL
General
1.1.1
1
Part M
Application
Welding works, etc., hereinafter referred to as “weldings”, to be used in hull construction, equipment, machinery, etc. are to be
in accordance with the requirements of this Part unless specified in other Part.
2
The requirements of this Part are applied to the weldings where the manufacturer is to adhere to the requirements specified
below.
(1) To ensure the quality of the weldings under the appropriate facilities and control system, by achieving the process control
throughout the welding works.
(2) Where deviation from the controls occurs and/or inferior quality of products is identified, the manufacturer is to investigate the
substantial cause, to report the result of investigation to the Surveyor and to take corrective measures.
3
Welding not specified in this Part may be used when it is specially approved with respect to the design and the works by the
Society.
1.2
1.2.1
1
Tests before Welding Works
Execution of Tests
The welding procedure, the welder’s qualifications and the welding consumables specified in this Part are to be subjected
to the required tests in the presence of the Surveyor and to be approved by the Society before welding works. To implement the
tests, in lieu of traditional ordinary surveys where the Surveyor is in attendance, the Society may approve other survey methods which
it considers to be appropriate.
2
The tests of welding not specified in this Part are to be carried out in accordance with the test specification or the test s tandard
which is approved by the Society.
3
The chemical composition is to be analyzed at an adequately equipped and completely staffed laboratory. The testing machines
used for the mechanical testing of welded joints and welding consumables are to be those which have the effective certificates issued
by the Society or other organization recognized by the Society in accordance with the “Rules for Testing Machines” or other standards
deemed appropriate by the Society.
4
Where appropriate certifications for the welding procedure, the welder’s qualifications, the welding consumables, etc. are
accepted by the Society, the tests thereof may be dispensed with by the Society’s discretion.
1.3
1.3.1
Welding Works
Execution of Welding Control
The manufacturer is to comply with the requirements specified in Chapter 2 of this Part regarding the control of the welding
works of hull construction, etc. mainly.
1.3.2
1
Confirmation of Welding Work Condition
For the effectiveness of the control of the welding works to be carried out by the manufacturer, the Society is to confirm the
3
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 1)
condition during welding works at an appropriate interval accepted by the Surveyor, when deemed necessary. In this case, the
manufacturer is to give the convenience to the Surveyor and to permit the Surveyor to enter all relevant areas of the yard.
2
If it is deemed to be necessary in preceding -1, the Surveyor may require the manufacturer to take corrective measures for the
control of practice.
1.4
Inspection and Quality for Weld
1.4.1
1
Implementation of Inspection*
Inspection of weld is to be carried out in the presence of the Surveyor during or after welding works specified in 2.1.4, Part B
of the Rules.
2
Where the quality and the control system of weld are deemed appropriate by the Society, the presence of the Surveyor may be
reduced.
1.4.2
1
Quality and Repair*
The quality of weld is to be assured in accordance with the requirements provided below.
(1) Inspection during welding works
Inspection items during welding works, which are designated by the Surveyor taking account of the result of confirmation of
welding work conditions specified in 1.3.2, are to be observed in good order.
(2) Visual inspection of weld
Visual inspection of weld is to be carried out. The weld is to be free from weld cracks, excess weld metal or excessive convexity
and surface harmful imperfections, such as undercuts, overlaps, etc., and excessive misalignment and deformation. The size
of fillet welds is to comply with the requirements specified in 12.2, Part 1, 12.1.1, Part 2-6 and 12.1.2, Part 2-7, Part C.
(3) Non-destructive inspection of weld
Non-destructive inspection of weld is to be carried out in accordance with Chapter 8. The weld is to be free from weld cracks
and internal harmful imperfections such as lack of fusion and penetration, etc.
2
The welding defects found in the inspection specified in preceding -1 are to be restored, or repaired in accordance with repairing
procedures deemed appropriate by the Society under the Surveyor’s direction.
3
For the quality confirmation independently during or after welding works, including non-destructive inspection, restorations or
repairs of the welding defects admitted by the manufacturer is to be complied with the requirement specified in -2. These records are
to be submitted under the request of the surveyor.
1.4.3
Standard of Quality
When the Surveyor judges that the quality of weld remarkably falls short of the standard, the Society may require the
manufacturer to improve the quality of weld based upon the result of inspection.
4
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ship s (Part M Chapter 2)
Chapter 2
2.1
2.1.1
1
WELDING WORKS
General
Application*
The requirements of this Chapter are mainly applied to the welding works of hull construction, etc. where the manufacturer is
to adhere to the requirements provided below.
(1) To arrange the material having proper certification in advance, in accordance with approved plan of hull construction, etc. by
the Society.
(2) To ensure the process and accuracy in accordance with appropriate quality.
(3) To engage the welders having proper qualification, and to carry out control of their qualification, maintaining their skills and
training to them.
2
In addition to the mentioned above in preceding -1, the manufacturer is to control the practice of weld in accordance with the
requirements specified in this chapter.
3
The requirements specified in this chapter are to be applied to welding works of rolled steels for hull, rolled steels for low
temperature service and high strength rolled steels for offshore structures as base metal. Welding works for the other materials are to
be deemed appropriate by the Society.
2.2
2.2.1
Work Scheme
Welding Application Plan*
The manufacturer is to submit the welding application plan, including the following items, to the Society every ship for approval
prior to welding works. Midship section plan (showing grades of materials, thickness, dimension, etc.) may be used as the plan.
(1) Kinds of main structural members for hull within 0.6L amidship, which are intended for on-site welding
(2) Kinds of welding procedure which is applied to the welding in preceding (1) and its welding position, including the number
and the date of approval of the welding procedure
(3) Others items considered necessary by the Society
2.2.2
1
Welding Procedure and Related Specification*
Welding procedure and related specification are to be approved by the Society in accordance with the requirements specified in
Chapter 4 of this Part.
2
At least the following welding conditions are to be included in the welding procedure specification specified in preceding -1.
(1) Welding procedure
(2) Base metal (grade of steel and maximum thickness)
(3) Welding consumables (brand, grade, shielded gas, backing, etc.)
(4) Kind of welding (butt or fillet)
(5) Welding position
(6) Details of edge preparations according to the thickness of base metal (including standard tolerances for edge preparation
condition, i.e. groove angle, root gap, and misalignment), number of electrodes and arrangement, leg length or throat thickness,
layer or pass sequence and welding parameter (amperage, voltage, welding speed, heat input, current).
(7) Preheating and interpass temperature
(8) Post weld heat treatment
(9) Applicable member (only in cases where brittle fracture tests and technical documents related to such brittle fracture tests are
omitted in 4.2.7-7)
(10) Other conditions necessary for the welding procedure
3
The welding procedure and related specification, in addition to the requirements in preceding -2, are to be including repair
procedure of the welding defects which comprise the following provisions.
5
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ship s (Part M Chapter 2)
(1) Kind of the welding defects
(2) The way of chipping, grinding, etc. for the welding defects
(3) Edge preparations after the removal of the welding defects
(4) Quality verification scheme for the portion of the welding defects removed, including non-destructive inspection
(5) Procedures of the welding, including the welding procedure, the welding consumables, the welder’s qualifications, preheating,
post weld heat treatment, etc.
(6) Quality verification scheme of the repair part, including non-destructive inspection
2.3
Welding Preparation
2.3.1
Material Control
In welding works, the manufacturer is to adhere to the requirements provided below.
(1) To establish the means which can clearly identify the kinds of steels and welding consumables in order to prevent from misuse.
(2) To remove harmful imperfections from the surface of steel and the processed portion such as gas cut.
(3) Heat processing such as the line heating, etc. of steels is to comply with the standard which is accepted to be appropriate by the
Society, unless specifically approved.
(4) Welding consumables are to be stored and controlled appropriately, and to be dried adequately where considered necessary.
(5) The manufacturer is to properly instruct welders about the use of welding consumables.
2.3.2
1
Edge Preparation, etc.
The grooves are to be processed correctly and uniformly, and cracks or flaws in the grooves are to be removed. Moisture, grease,
rust, etc. are to be removed from groove and its adjacent. Painting of welding portion is not to give harmful affect to the quality of
weld.
2
The special attention is to be paid to the edge preparation of intersection of weld lines, grooves made by on-site cutting, etc.
2.3.3
1
Fitting Process, etc.
The shape, size and root gap of the grooves are to comply with the standard specified in welding procedure specification of
2.2.2 corresponding to welding procedure to be applied. No excessive gap is accepted between the base plates in T joints and lap joints.
2
The ends of important welded joints are to be fitted with the end tabs or to have proper oversized edge, which are to be cut off
after welding.
3
Jigs used for welding joints are to be so fitted as not to give excessive restraint. After welding, the jigs are to be removed in
general, and any defect of the base metal caused by removing the jigs is to be repaired properly by welding, grinding, etc.
4
The welding joints are to be free from excessive gaps, misalignments, deformations, etc. Where the fitting is done improperly,
it is to be restored properly.
5
2.4
2.4.1
1
Excessive loads are not to be used for the rectifying of poor fitting part such as large deformation.
Welding Process
Selection of Welding Consumables*
The welding consumables used for rolled steels for hulls, rolled steels for low temperature service and high strength rolled
steels for offshore structures are to be selected in accordance with the requirements provided below.
(1) The selection of welding consumables is to be in accordance with the requirements provided in Table M2.1. The selection for
steels not specified in Table M2.1 is to be as deemed appropriate by the Society.
(2) For the requirement specified in preceding (1), welded joints of different grades of steel may be used as the followings.
(a) Welding consumables for lower grade of steel may be used for welded joints of different grades of steel of the same
specified strength.
(b) Welding consumables required for the steel of lower specified strength may be used for welded joints of different specified
strength, provided that the adequate measures to prevent cracks are taken.
(c) Low hydrogen electrodes are to be used for the welding of the high tensile steels or for the welding of the high tensile steel
and mild steel. Where the high tensile steels with thermo-mechanical control process are used as base metal, non-low
6
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ship s (Part M Chapter 2)
hydrogen electrodes may be used as the welding consumables provided that it is deemed to be appropriate by the Society.
(3) For the welding consumables used for high strength rolled steels for offshore structures, welding consumables different from
those given in Table M2.1 may be selected where deemed appropriate by the Society.
2
With respect to materials approved by the Society for use in welding consumables, materials other than approved materials may
be used for backing. However, for the backing in welding consumables specified in 6.5, other approved welding consumables are to be
used.
7
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ship s (Part M Chapter 2)
Table M2.1
Kind and grade of steel to be welded
KA
KB,KD
KE
KA32, KA36
KD32, KD36
Rolled Steel for Hull
KE32, KE36
KF32, KF36
KA40, KD40
KE40
KF40
KE47
KL24A
Rolled Steel for Low
KL24B, KL27, KL33
Temperature Service
KL37
KL9N53, KL9N60
KA420
KD420
KE420
KF420
KA460
KD460
KE460
KF460
KA500
KD500
KE500
KF500
KA550
KD550
High strength
KE550
rolled steels for
KF550
offshore structures
KA620
KD620
KE620
KF620
KA690
KD690
KE690
KF690
KA890
KD890
KE890
KA960
KD960
KE960
Selection of Welding Consumables (Rolled Steel Plate)
Grade of applicable welding consumables (1) (4)
1, 2, 3, 51, 52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, L1, L2, L3
2, 3, 52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, L1, L2, L3
3, 53, 54, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, L1, L2, L3
51, 52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, L2(2), L3, 2Y42, 3Y42, 4Y42, 5Y42
52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, L2(2) , L3, 2Y42, 3Y42, 4Y42, 5Y42
53, 54, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, L2(2) , L3, 2Y42, 3Y42, 4Y42, 5Y42
54, 54Y40, 55Y40, L2(2) , L3, 4Y42, 5Y42
52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, 3Y42, 4Y42, 5Y42, 2Y46, 3Y46, 4Y46, 5Y46, 63Y47
53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, 3Y42, 4Y42, 5Y42, 3Y46, 4Y46, 5Y46, 63Y47
54Y40, 55Y40, 4Y42, 5Y42, 4Y46, 5Y46
63Y47
L1, L2, L3, 54, 54Y40, 55Y40,
L2, L3, 55Y40, 5Y42(3)
L3, 55Y40, 5Y42
L91, L92
2Y42, 3Y42, 4Y42, 5Y42, 2Y46, 3Y46, 4Y46, 5Y46, 2Y50, 3Y50, 4Y50, 5Y50
3Y42,4Y42, 5Y42, 3Y46, 4Y46, 5Y46, 3Y50, 4Y50, 5Y50
4Y42, 5Y42, 4Y46, 5Y46, 4Y50, 5Y50
5Y42, 5Y46, 5Y50
2Y46, 3Y46, 4Y46, 5Y46, 2Y50, 3Y50, 4Y50, 5Y50
3Y46, 4Y46, 5Y46, 3Y50, 4Y50, 5Y50
4Y46, 5Y46, 4Y50, 5Y50
5Y46, 5Y50
2Y50, 3Y50, 4Y50, 5Y50, 2Y55, 3Y55, 4Y55, 5Y55
3Y50, 4Y50, 5Y50, 3Y55, 4Y55, 5Y55
4Y50, 5Y50, 4Y55, 5Y55
5Y50, 5Y55
2Y55, 3Y55, 4Y55, 5Y55, 2Y62, 3Y62, 4Y62, 5Y62
3Y55, 4Y55, 5Y55, 3Y62, 4Y62, 5Y62
4Y55, 5Y55, 4Y62, 5Y62
5Y55, 5Y62
2Y62, 3Y62, 4Y62, 5Y62, 2Y69, 3Y69, 4Y69, 5Y69
3Y62, 4Y62, 5Y62, 3Y69, 4Y69, 5Y69
4Y62, 5Y62, 4Y69, 5Y69
5Y62, 5Y69
2Y69, 3Y69, 4Y69, 5Y69
3Y69, 4Y69, 5Y69
4Y69, 5Y69
5Y69
2Y89, 3Y89, 4Y89, 2Y96, 3Y96, 4Y96
3Y89, 4Y89, 3Y96, 4Y96
4Y89, 4Y96
2Y96, 3Y96, 4Y96
3Y96, 4Y96
4Y96
Notes:
(1) The symbols of welding consumables listed above show the materials which are specified in Table M6.1, Table M6.12,
Table M6.21, Table M6.29 and Table M6.58, and have same mark at the end. (For example, “3” shows KMW3, KAW3,
KSW3 and KEW3, “L3” shows KMWL3, KAWL3 and KSWL3, “3Y42” shows KMW3Y42, KAW3Y42 and KSW3Y42.)
(2) Welding consumables of “L2” is applicable to steel grade of KA32, KD32, KE32 or KF32 only.
(3) Welding consumables of “5Y42” is applicable to steel grade of KL33 only.
(4) For welding consumables used for the corrosion resistant steel for cargo oil tanks specified in 3.13, Part K, only welding
consumables whose brands are listed in the “Particulars of Approval Conditions” for the corrosion resistant steel for
cargo oil tanks are to be used. In cases where welding consumables not listed are used, measures deemed appropriate
8
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ship s (Part M Chapter 2)
by the Society are to be taken.
2.4.2
Consideration for Welding Environment
1
The welding is to be carried out under the conditions of protection against moisture, wind and snow.
2
The welding is to be carried out under the environment which is well considered so that the works may be carried out without
any difficulty.
2.4.3
1
Preheating, etc.*
Application of preheating, short bead, etc. are to be carried out in accordance with the standard which is deemed to be
appropriate by the Society, unless specifically approved.
2
Arc strikes on high tensile steels and mild steels except KA, KB and KD are to be avoided. Where arc strikes are made by
mistake, those are to be removed by grinding or to be repaired by welding with short bead having an appropriate length.
3
The tack welding is to be carried out taking account of especially preheating, selection of welding consumables, weld length,
etc.
4
In case of welding under excessive restraint or for extremely thick steel plate, cast steel or forged steel, special precautions are
to be taken, such as preheating of the material, use of low hydrogen electrodes, etc. For cast steel or forged steel, the material is to be
of the one which has the suffix W at the end of its grade symbol specified in Part K.
2.4.4
1
Welding Sequence
Welding sequence and direction of welding are to be so determined as to prevent harmful imperfection such as cracks in welded
joints and excessive deformations.
2
The joints which may cause greater contraction by welding are to be welded prior to the joints which may cause smaller
contraction in principle.
2.4.5
1
Execution of Welding
The welding is to be carried out in accordance with the welding procedure specifications specified in 2.2.2. Special precaution
is to be paid to the both ends of the weld, the intersections, etc.
2
The welding is to be carried out by the welder having the appropriate qualification according to the application of the welding.
3
Butt welded joints are to be back chipped to remove the defects in root of welds before applying the back side welding, except
in case of one side welding or other processes approved by the Society.
4
In the intersections of butt welded joints, the edge preparation is to be done to preceding welding.
5
The end portion of fillet welding under high stress concentration area is to be continuous round. The crater filling may be
acceptable to the other end portion.
2.5
2.5.1
Inspection and Quality for Welding
Inspection and Quality
Inspection and quality for welding are to be in accordance with the requirements specified in 1.4.
9
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 3)
Chapter 3
3.1
General
3.1.1
1
TEST SPECIMENS AND MECHANICAL TESTING PROCEDURES
Application
Test specimens and mechanical testing procedures for various tests in this Part are to comply with the requirements in this
Chapter, unless expressly provided in and after the next Chapter.
2
Where specimens or mechanical testing procedures differing from those prescribed in this Part are used, they are to be approved
by the Society.
3
3.2
3.2.1
1
The test specimens are to be selected according to respective requirements in this Chapter.
Test Specimens
Selection of Test Specimens
Except where otherwise specified or agreed with the Surveyor, test specimens are not to be detached from the test assembly
until having been stamped by the Surveyor.
2
If test specimens are cut from test assemblies by flame cutting or shearing, a reasonable margin is required to enable sufficient
material to be removed from the cut edges during final machining.
3
The preparation of test specimens is to be done in such a manner that test specimens are not subjected to any significant cold
straining or heating.
4
If any test specimen shows defective machining or defects having no relation to the substantial nature, it may be discarded and
substituted by another test specimen.
3.2.2
1
Tensile Test Specimens
Tensile test specimens are to be of size and dimensions given Table M3.1, and the both ends of the test specimen may be
machined to such a shape as to fit the holder of the testing machine.
2
The upper and lower surfaces of weld are to be filed, ground or machined flush with the surface of plate.
3
Reinforcements and back straps are to be machined flush with base metal.
3.2.3
Bend Test Specimens
1
Bend test specimens are to be of size and dimensions given in Table M3.2 and Table M3.3 according to the kind of test assembly.
2
Where the thickness of test assemblies is greater than the thickness of the bend test specimen prescribed in Table M3.2, the
face bend or root bend specimen may be machined on its compression side to the specified thickness.
3
3.2.4
Reinforcements and back straps are to be machined flush with base metal.
Impact Test Specimens
1
Three impact test specimens are considered to be one set.
2
Impact test specimens are to be U4 specimens specified in 2.2.4, Part K and to be of size and dimensions given in Fig. K2.1,
Tables K2.5 and K2.6.
3.2.5
Confirmation for Test Specimens
The size and dimensions of test specimens are to be carefully inspected and verified by suitable means before testing.
3.3
Mechanical Testing Procedures
3.3.1
Tensile Test and Impact Test
Tensile tests and impact tests are to be carried out in accordance with the procedures prescribed in 2.3, Part K.
3.3.2
Bend Test
1
Unless otherwise specified, bend tests may be either a guided bend test or a roller bend test.
2
Guided bend test jigs are to be as shown in Figs. M3.1 and M3.2.
10
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 3)
3
Roller bend test jigs are to be as shown in Fig. M3.3.
4
Method of bending testing using a roller is to be as shown in Fig. M3.4.
Table M3.1
U1A
1B
1C
Dimensions (1)
Size of specimens
Deposited metal tensile test specimen
Kind
Size and Dimension of Tensile Test Specimens (mm)
Intended for
As a rule
Deposited metal tensile
d = 10
test
Lo = 50
tensile test)
(Longitudinal
Lc = 60
R ≥ 10
d = 6.0
Deposited metal test:
Lo = 24
t = 12
Lc = 32
(Welding consumables
R≥6
for stainless steel)
d = 12.5
Deposited metal test:
Lo = 50
19 ≤ t ≤ 25
Lc = 60
(Welding consumables
R ≥ 15
for stainless steel)
a = t (2)
Butt weld tensile test
for plate
W = 30
U2A
Lc = B + 12
R ≥ 50
a = t (2)
W = 12 (t ≤ 2)
U2B
W = 25 (t > 2)
Lc = B + 60
2C(3)
Butt weld tensile test specimen
R ≥ 25
a=t
Butt weld test for pipe:
W = 6 (D < 50)
t<9
W = 20 (D ≥ 50)
Lc = B + 12
R ≥ 50
The sectional area of A
is to be considered to
be W × a
a = t’ (2)
W = 6 (D < 50)
W = 20 (D ≥ 50)
Lc = B + 12
R ≥ 50
The sectional area of A
2D(3)
is to be finished to be
rectangular. However,
the
machining
allowance
is
minimum.
11
to be
Butt weld test for pipe:
t≥9
2E(4)
Butt weld tensile test specimen
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 3)
D < 50
Lt ≥ 10 × D
Butt weld test for pipe:
D < 50
Notes:
(1) The following designations are used.
d : diameter, a : thickness, W : width, Lo : gauge length, Lc : parallel part length, Lt : length of test assembly,
R : transition radius, B : breadth of weld, t : thickness of test assembly, t’ : thickness of hobbed test assembly,
D : outside diameter of the pipe.
(2) When the thickness of the test piece is so large that it exceeds the capacity of the testing machine, the test piece
may be divided to be tested.
(3) In the case of D < 50, test specimen 2E may be used instead of test specimens 2C and 2D.
(4) The method of attaching the test assembly is to be in accordance with the provisions of JIS Z 3121 for test
specimen 2.
12
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 3)
Table M3.2
Size of specimen
Dimensions
Face ro bend specimen
Kind Used for
Size and Dimension of Bend Test Specimens (1)
UB-1
Intended for
a=t
Test assemblies for
W = 30
butt weld test for
L ≥ 200
plate:
R ≥ 1~2
a = 10
W=t
Side bend specimen
UB-2
Welding procedure qualification tests
butt weld test for
L ≥ 200
plate:
R ≥ 1~2
t ≥ 12
a = 10
Test assemblies for
W=t
B-3
Test assemblies for
(2)
(2)
butt weld test for
L ≒ 200
pipe:
R ≤ 1.5
t ≥ 12
a=t
W = 19
L ≒ 200
R ≤ 1.5
For the tube whose D is
34.0 to 60.6, W is to be
10. For the tube having D
of 34.0 and under, the
Face and bend specimen
B-4
width
obtained
by
dividing
the
tube
longitudinally into four
equal parts is to be the
Test assemblies for
butt weld test for
pipe:
t < 10
width of the test piece. In
case of D ≤ 34.0, the
flattening of the inner and
outer surfaces of the tube
may
be
simply
omitted
by
removing
excessive convexity.
a = 10
W = 40
L ≒ 200
B-5
R ≤ 1.5
For the tube having an D
of 114.3 and under, W is
to be 19.
13
Test assemblies for
butt weld test for
pipe:
t ≥10
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 3)
a=t
W = 30
Face and root bend specimen
R = 1~2
Where the thickness of
test assemblies exceeds
25mm, the thickness of
Butt weld test
test specimen may be
reduced to 25mm with its
surface machined on one
side only (compression
Face and root bend
specimen
side).
UB-8
a = 10
Butt
W = 40
(welding
L ≥ 200
consumables
R ≤ 1.5
9% Ni steel)
Butt
weld
weld
test
for
test
(welding
Side bend specimen
Approval tests and annual inspection for welding consumable
UB-6
B-7
L ≥ 200
a = 10
consumables
W=t
electro-slag
and
L ≥ 200
electro
and
R = 1~2
two-run technique
gas
for
MIG welding for
aluminum alloy)
Notes:
(1) The following designations are used:
a : thickness, W : width, R : edge radius, D : external tube diameter
t : thickness of test assembly, B : breadth of weld, L : length
(2) Where the thickness of the side bend specimen exceeds 40 mm, the test specimen may be divided to be tested.
14
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 3)
Table M3.3
Kind
Size and Dimension of Bend Test Specimens (welder qualification test) (mm)(1) (2)
Size of specimen
Dimensions
a=t
Intended for
Test assemblies
In cases where t exceeds 25 mm, a
for butt weld tests
may be reduced to 25 mm with its
for plates.
surface machined on one side only
B-9
Face and root bend specimen
(compression side).
W = 30
L ≥ 200
R = 1 to 2
a=t
B-10
Test assemblies
In cases where t exceeds 10 mm, a
for butt weld tests
may be reduced to 10 mm with its
for plates.
surface machined on one side only
(For nickel steel)
(compression side).
W ≥ Ls + 30
L ≥ 200
R ≤ 0.2 t (3 max.)
Side bend
specimen
a = 10
B-11
W=t
(3)
L ≥ 200
Test assemblies
for butt weld tests
for plates.
R =1 to 2
B-12(4)
Face and root bend specimen
a=t
Test assemblies
In cases where t exceeds 10 mm, a
for butt weld tests
may be reduced to 10 mm with its
for tubes.
surface machined on one side only
(compression side).
(Face bend specimen)
W is to be determined using the
following equation, and W is to be 8 or
above.
For D ≤ 50, W = t + 0.1D
For D > 50, W = t + 0.05D (40 max.)
L ≥ 250
(Root bend specimen)
R ≤ 0.2 t (3 max.)
B-13
(4)
Side bend
specimen
a = 10
W=t
(3)
L ≥ 250
Test assemblies
for butt weld tests
for tubes.
R ≤ 0.2 t (3 max.)
Notes:
(1) The following symbols are used:
a: thickness of test specimen, W: width of test specimen, L: length of test specimen, Ls: maximum width of the weld after
machining
R: edge radius of test specimen, t: thickness of test assembly, D: external diameter of tube
(2) The edges of the test specimen on the tension side may be rounded by mechanical means.
(3)
In cases where the thickness of the test assembly exceeds 40 mm, side bend test specimens may be divided into test
specimens, each being at least 20 mm wide.
15
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 3)
(4) Where D exceeds 25 t，the B-9 or B-11 test specimen may be used.
Fig. M3.1
Guided Bend Test Jig (Unit: mm) (For Bend Test Specimen of 9 mm in Thickness)
Fig. M3.2
Guided Bend Test Jig (Unit: mm) (For bend test specimen of 3.2 mm in thickness)
16
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 3)
Fig. M3.3
Jigs for Roller Bend Test (Unit: mm)
Note:
𝑡
𝑅
:thickness of test specimen
:radius of plunger
𝑅
′
𝑆
:radius of supporting roller (not specified)
:span between supports {2 (𝑅 + 𝑅′ + 𝑡 + 2)}
Fig. M3.4
Method of bending testing using a roller (Units: mm)
Notes:
1: Inner roller，2: Outer roller
L f: Initial distance between contact of the roller and the centerline of the weld
0.7 d < Lf < 0.9 d
D: Diameter of the inner roller
17
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Chapter 4
4.1
General
4.1.1
1
WELDING PROCEDURE AND RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
Application*
The requirements in this Chapter are to be applied to the approval of welding procedure and related specifications mainly for
hull construction as well as pipes and piping systems, etc., unless specified in another chapter.
2
The requirements of this chapter correspondingly apply to the welding procedure and related specifications for the approval of
steel castings and steel forgings which is to be weldable quality used for hull structures. However, the impact test may be omitted, upon
the approval by the Society.
3
The welding procedure and related specifications approved by the Society are valid for welding works in all shops and sites
belonging to the yard under the same facility and control system.
4
The welding procedures differing from the requirements specified in this Chapter are to be in accordance with the requirement s
specified in 1.1.1-3.
4.1.2
1
Approval of Welding Procedure and Related Specifications
The manufacturer is to obtain the approval of the welding procedures in the following cases specified in (1) through (4).
(1) Where the welding procedures are first adopted for welding works specified in Chapter 2.
(2) Where the welding procedures are first adopted for pipes belonging to Group I and II, piping systems for ships carrying
dangerous chemicals in bulk, and cargo and process piping systems for ships carrying liquefied gases in bulk.
(3) Where the items described in the approved welding procedure specifications are altered.
(4) Where considered necessary by the Surveyor.
2
The specifications which correspond to the welding procedure provided in preceding -1 are to be collected as the welding
procedure specification and to be approved by the Society. The specifications are to include the items specified in 2.2.2-2 and -3.
4.1.3
1
Execution of Tests*
For the approval of welding procedure and related specifications, the tests specified in 4.2 to 4.6 are to be carried out based on
the representing conditions, such as the edge preparation, welding parameter, etc., described in the welding procedure specification,
with satisfactory results. However, for high strength rolled steels for offshore structures, the tests are to be carried out for every kind
of heat treatment.
2
Part of or all requirements for the tests provided in preceding -1 may be dispensed in the case which deemed appropriate by the
Society, subject to the approval of the welding procedure specifications.
3
The addition of tests or test conditions other than those specified in this Chapter for the welding procedure qualification (e.g.
design of strength, thickness and temperature, and welding heat input) may be required, where deemed necessary by the Society.
4
The changes of backing material for one-side welding are to be deemed appropriate by the Society.
5
For qualification tests for stainless clad steels, the requirements specified in 4.2 to 4.5 are to be complied with. However the
impact test may be dispensed with where other welding procedure qualification on the stainless clad steel base metal has been approved
under the same welding condition.
6
Welding procedure used by dissimilar process (combination welding) may be carried out with separate welding procedure tests
for each weld process.
4.1.4
1
Range of Approval*
The scope of approval of the welding procedure and related specifications of rolled steels for hull and high strength rolled steels
for offshore structures are in accordance with the following (1) through (6), on the condition that other welding conditions are same.
However, the range of approval differing from the requirements specified in this Chapter may be accepted that it is deemed appropriate
by the Society.
(1) Kind of weld joints
Kind of weld joints is in accordance with in Table M4.1.
(2) Thickness
18
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
The range of the thickness is in accordance with in Table M4.2.
(3) Leg length of fillet welding
The range of the leg length of fillet welding is in accordance with in Table M4.3.
(4) Kinds of base metal
(a) Rolled steels for hull
i)
Within the same strength level, the welding procedures are considered applicable to lower toughness grade (material
with higher specified impact test temperature).
ii)
In addition to the requirement in i), within the same and below toughness grades, the welding procedures are
considered applicable to the one and two lower strength levels (material with the one and two lower specified yield
strength).
(b) High strength rolled steels for offshore structures
i)
Within the same strength level, the welding procedures are considered applicable to lower toughness grade.
ii)
In addition to the requirement in i), within the same and below toughness grades, the welding procedures are
considered applicable to the one lower strength levels.
(c) Notwithstanding the requirement given in (a) and (b), for the large heat input welding specified in Note (5) of Table M4.2,
the welding procedures are considered applicable to that toughness grade tested and one strength level below.
(d) Notwithstanding the requirements given in (a) to (c), welding procedures for KE47 within the same and below toughness
grades are considered applicable to one lower strength level. However, for the large heat input welding specified in Note
(5) of Table M4.2, the welding procedures are considered applicable to that toughness grade tested and the same strength
level.
(5) Kinds of welding consumables
The welding consumables are to be not brand but grade (including all suffixes), except the large heat input specified Note (5)
of Table M4.2.
(6) Welding position
(a) Welding position is in accordance with in Table M5.10. The welding position of T-joints with partial penetration and Tjoints with full penetration are to be the same welding position as fillet weld joints.
(b) Approval tests are to be performed each welding position. However, to qualify a range of positions, test assemblies are to
be welded for highest heat input position and lowest heat input position and all applicable tests are to be made on those
assemblies. The above excludes welding in the vertical position with travel in the downward direction which will always
require separate tests and only are acceptable for that position.
2
The scope of approval of the welding procedure and related specifications of steel pipes are to be in accordance with the
following (1) through (8) on the condition that the other welding conditions are the same.
(1) Kind of weld joint
The kind of weld joint is to be in accordance with in Table M4.1. Set-on, Set-in and Set-through may be accepted regardless of
the kind of pipe assembly used in the test except in the case of butt-welded joints.
(2) Thickness
The range of the thickness is to be in accordance with in Table M4.2.
(3) Outside diameter
(a) The range of the outside diameter is to be in accordance with in Table M4.4.
(b) In cases where plates are used as the test assembly in accordance with 4.2.3-4, the lowest limit of the range is to be not
less than 300 mm, notwithstanding (a).
(4) Angles of pipe (or tube) fittings
The angles of pipe (or tube) fittings are not to be less than the angle of test assemblies or 60 degrees, whichever smaller, but is
to be not more than 90 degrees. “Angles of pipe (or tubes) fittings” means the angle in “α” degrees between the centrelines of
pipes (or tubes), or between pipes (or tubes) and plates on transverse sections as shown in Fig. M4.13.
(5) Leg length of fillet welding
The range of the leg length of fillet welding is to be in accordance with in Table M4.3.
(6) Kind of base metal
19
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
(a) The kinds of steel tubes for boilers and heat exchangers, steel pipes for pressure piping, headers and steel pipes for low
temperature service are to be as specified in Table M4.5.
(b) Other than for the pipes specified in (a), the welding procedures are considered applicable only for grades which are the
same as the grade of the test assembly.
(7) Kind of welding consumable
The welding consumable is to be selected according to grade (including all suffixes) not brand, except for the large heat inputs
specified in Note (5) of Table M4.2.
(8) Welding position
(a) The welding position is to be in accordance with Table M5.11. The welding position of T-joints with partial penetration
and full penetration is to be the same as the welding position for fillet weld joints.
(b) Approval tests are to be performed each welding position. However, to qualify a range of positions, test assemblies are to
be welded for highest heat input position and lowest heat input position and all applicable tests are to be made on those
assemblies. The above excludes welding in the tube position for welding downwards which will always require separate
tests and only are acceptable for that position. With respect to the welding positions for rotating and fixed pipes (tubes),
when the tests required for fixed pipes (tubes) are performed, the tests required for rotating pipes (tubes) may be also be
considered to have been performed as shown in Table M5.11.
3
The restriction of welding procedure condition (e.g. heat input welding and preheating) in actual work is to be deemed
appropriate by the Society.
4
Where deemed necessary by the Society for welding procedure, restrictions on the heat treatment of base metals, carbon
equivalent or cold cracking susceptibility and the locations of application of the welding procedure may be imposed.
5
The range of approval of materials other than rolled steels for hull, high strength rolled steels for offshore structures and steel
pipes is to be as deemed appropriate by the Society.
Table M4.1
Range of Approval for Type of Weld Joint
Type of weld joint for test assembly
With backing
One
Without backing
side
Butt Welded
Gas backing (1)
joints
Both
With gouging
side
Without gouging
With backing
One
Without
backing
T-joints with
side
full
Gas backing (1)
penetration
With gouging
Both
side
Without gouging
T-joints with partial penetration
Fillet weld joints
Note:
(1)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
A
○
○
○
B
C
○
○
○
D
○
○
○
○
○
Range of approval
E F
G H
○
○ ○ ○ ○
○
○
○
○
○
○
C and H apply to welding procedures and related specifications for pipes.
20
○
○
○
I
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
J
○
○
○
○
K
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
L
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Approved Range of Thickness (1), (9)
Table M4.2
Approved range of thickness (mm) (10)
Butt welding(4)
Thickness of test
assemblies
t (mm)
Multi-run technique
Fillet welding
Single-run
Large heat
technique
input welding
or Two-run
process (6)
(2), (3), (4) , (5)
(11)
technique
t 100
0.5t to 2t
(7), (8)
0.7t to 1.1t (7), (8)
(100 max)
(100 max)
0.7t to t
0.5t to 2t (7), (8)
(100 max)
Notes:
(1) Welding procedure used by dissimilar process (combination welding) is to be correspondingly applied to Table M4.2.
In this case, thickness or throat thickness of each welding method is to be t.
(2) For unequal plate thickness or pipe wall thickness of butt welds the lesser thickness is ruling dimension.
(3) For fillet welds, the range of approval shall be applied to the web thickness and flange thickness of test piece.
(4) For T-joints with full penetration and T-joints with partial penetration, t is the thickness of test assembly on the open
edge side and the requirements to be correspondingly applied are the requirements for butt welding.
(5) For branch connections, t is the thickness of main pipes and branch pipes respectively, and the requirements to be
correspondingly applied are the requirements for butt welding.
(6) Large heat input welding means the welding with a welding heat input of not less than 50 kJ/cm.
(7) For the vertical-down welding and tube positions for welding downwards, the test piece thickness t is always taken
as the upper limit of the range of application.
(8) For test assembly thickness not more than 12 mm, the specified minimum content is not applicable.
(9) For the kinds of test assemblies specified in Table M4.12, even though the test specimen has passed the hardness test
specified in 4.2.9, 4.3.6 and 4.4.6, the upper limit of the thickness range of approval is to be restricted to the thickness
of the test assembly when three or more of the hardness values in the heat affected zone are less than 25HV lower
than the values specified in Table M4.12.
(10) For steel pipes for low temperature service, the upper limit is to be a maximum of 25 mm unless another value is
considered appropriate by the Society.
(11) Two-run technique refers to a welding process involving a single pass on both sides.
Table M4.3
Applicable Leg Length of Fillet Welding
Approved range of leg length (mm)
Single-run technique
Multi-run technique
0.75f to 1.5f (1)(2)
0.5f to 2f (1)(2)
Notes:
(1) f: leg length of test piece
(2) Where welding in vertical downward position or tube
position for welding downwards is applied, the approved
range of thickness is to be f.
Table M4.4
Range of Approval Related to Outside Diameter of Pipe
Outside diameter D of test
assembly (mm)
Range of approval related to
(1)
outside diameter (mm)(2)
D ≦ 25
0.5 D to 2 D
D ＞ 25
0.5 D or more(3)
Notes:
(1) For non-circular sections, D is the dimension of the smaller side.
(2) For branch connections, the requirements are applied to main pipes and branch pipes.
(3) Lower limit of “0.5 D” is not to be less than 25 mm.
21
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Table M4.5
Range of Approval Related to Kind of Steel
Kind and grade of test assembly
Steel tubes for boilers and
KSTB33
heat exchangers
KSTB35
Steel pipes for pressure
piping
Headers
Steel pipes for low
temperature service(1)
Approval range of grade
KSTB33
KSTB33，KSTB35
KSTB42
KSTB33(2) ，KSTB35(2)，KSTB42
KSTB12
KSTB12
KSTB22
KSTB22
KSTB23
KSTB23
KSTB24
KSTB24
KSTPG38
KSTS38
KSTPT38
KSTPG42
KSTS42
KSTPT42
KSTPG38，KSTS38，KSTPT38
KSTPG38，KSTS38，KSTPT38
KSTPG42，KSTS42，KSTPT42
KSTS49
KSTPT49
KSTPG38(2)，KSTS38(2) ，KSTPT38(2)
KSTPG42，KSTS42，KSTPT42
KSTS49，KSTPT49
KSTPA12
KSTPA12
KSTPA22
KSTPA22
KSTPA23
KSTPA23
KSTPA24
KSTPA24
KBH-1
KBH-1
KBH-2
KBH-1，KBH-2
KBH-3
KBH-3
KBH-4
KBH-4
KBH-5
KBH-5
KBH-6
KBH-6
KLPA
KLPA
KLPB
KLPA(2) ，KLPB
KLPC
KLPA(2) ，KLPB(2) ，KLPC
KLP2
KLP2
KLP3
KLP3
KLP9
KLP9
Notes:
(1)
Only when the same kind of heat treatment is used.
(2)
For the large heat inputs specified in Note (5) of Table M4.2, the welding
procedures are not considered applicable to these grades.
22
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
4.2
Tests for Butt Welded Joints
4.2.1
Application
The requirements in 4.2 apply to the butt welded joints of materials prescribed shown in Table M4.6 or equivalent materials by
a manual, semi-automatic welding or automatic welding method, etc.
4.2.2
Kinds of Test*
The kinds of butt welded joint test and number of specimens are to be in accordance with the requirements specified given in
Table M4.6.
4.2.3
Test Assemblies and Welding
1
Test assemblies are to be prepared with the same or equivalent material as used in the actual work.
2
The dimensions and types of test assembly are to be as indicated in (A), (B), (C), (D), (E) and (F) of Fig. M4.1
3
Test assemblies are to be welded in the general conditions specified in welding procedure specifications.
4
Test assemblies for pipes over 300 mm in diameter at the actual work may be those for the plates.
5
For butt welded joints of rolled steel plates for low temperature service and high strength rolled steels for offshore structures,
test assemblies are to be generally so prepared that the rolling direction is parallel to the direction of welding.
6
In general, the thickness of test assemblies for welding procedure qualification test is to be equal to the thickness of the thickest
material to be adopted in the actual work.
7
The tack welds of test piece are to be the same procedure as actual work.
Table M4.6 Kinds of Butt Welded Joint Test and Number of Specimens
Kinds of test and number of specimens (1)
Kind and grade of test assembly
Visual
Tensile
Bend
inspection
test
test
MacroImpact test (sets)
(2)
Structure
inspection
Hardness
test
Nondestructive
inspection(3)
KA，KB，KD，KE
3～8<a,b,c,d,e >(7)
KA32，KD32，KE32，KF32，KA36，KD36，KE36，KF36，
ull
KA40，KD40，KE40，KF40
KE47
lower
ce
2
4
4(4)
2(6)
KL5N43
KLPA，KLPB，KLPC，KLP2，KLP3，KLP9
KA420，KD420，KE420，KF420，KA460，KD460，KE460，
KF460，KA500，KD500，KE500，KF500，KA550，KD550，
KE550，KF550，KA620，KD620，KE620，KF620，KA690，
1(14)
Whole
length of
length of
1
welding
joints
welding
3～8<a,b,c,d,e >(7)
1
―
―
KD690，KE690，KF690，KA890，KD890，KE890，KA960，
2
KD960，KE960
boiler
KSTB33, KSTB35, KSTB42, KSTB12, KSTB22, KSTB23,
ers
KSTB24
KSTPG38, KSTPG42, KSTS38，
KSTS42, KSTS49, KSTPT38,
KSTPT42, KSTPKT49, KSTPA12, KSTPA22, KSTPA23,
KSTPA24
KBH-1, KBH-2, KBH-3, KBH-4, KBH-5, KBH-6
essure
5 <A,B,C,D,E>(8)
4
Whole
ce
for
4～8<a,b,c,d,e >(7)
KL24A，KL24B，KL27，KL33，KL37，KL2N30，KL3N32，
KL9N53，KL9N60
w
1(10)
(5)
4(5)
23
joints
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Visual
Tensile
Bend
inspection
test
test
MacroImpact test (sets)(2)
Structure
inspection
Hardness
test
Nondestructive
inspection(3)
Measurement
of ferrite
content at weld
surface (point)
KSUS304 ， KSUS304L ， KSUS304N1 ， KSUS304N2 ，
KSUS304LN ， KSUS309S ， KSUS310S ， KSUS316 ，
teels
―
KSUS316L ， KSUS316N ， KSUS316LN ， KSUS317 ，
(5)
4
KSUS317L，KSUS317LN，KSUS321，KSUS347
KSUS329J1, KSUS329J3L, KSUS329J4L,
pes
s
Kinds of test and number of specimens (1)
Kind and grade of test assembly
KSUS323L,
(9)
Whole
KSUS821L1
length of
K304TP，K304LTP，K309STP，K310STP，K316T P ，
welding
K316LTP，K317TP，K317LTP，K321TP，K347TP
joints
2
Whole
1
4
―
length of
welding
joints
K329J1TP, K329J3LTP, K329J4LTP
5000 Series
6000 Series
5754P，5086P，5086S
(12)
5383P，5383S
(13),
6005AS
―
6 min.
(12)
(11)
6 min.
(12)
，5083P，5083S
，5059P，5059S(12) ，5456P
，6061P，6061S
(13)
4(5)
―
―
(13)
，6082S
Notes:
(1)
Where found necessary by the Society, deposited metal tensile test, microscopic test and tests other than those may be required.
(2)
In this Table, the mark in < > specifies position of notch given in Fig. M4.2 through Fig. M4.4.
(3)
Internal inspections by radiographic examination or ultrasonic examination and surface inspections by magnetic particle examination or liquid penetrant examination are to be carried out.
(4)
Two specimens are to be taken longitudinally and transversely respectively. (See Fig. M4.1(D))
(5)
Two specimens are to be taken from root bend and face bend respectively. (See Fig. M4.1(A), (E) and (F))
(6)
The specimens are to be taken longitudinally. (See Fig. M4.1(D)).
(7)
The specimens are to be taken in accordance with Fig. M4.2 and M4.3.
(8)
The position of notch for the specimen is to be shown in Fig. M4.4.
(9)
Where found necessary by the Society, impact tests up to steels specially used for may be required.
(10) For KA36, KD36, KE36, KF36, KA40, KD40, KE40, KF40 and KE47 the tests are to be carried out.
(11) All temper conditions indicated with grades are to be included (See Table K8.3).
(12) Rolled products which have the same grade and temper condition may be used.
(13) Other rolled aluminium alloys of 6000 series with tensile strength 260 N/mm 2 and above may be used.
(14) The test is to be applied to KL37, KL5N43, KL9N53, KL9N60 and KLP9.
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Fig. M4.1
Welding Procedure Qualification Test Assemblies (Unit: mm)
Min. 50
Discard
Tensile
Face (or side)
bend
Root (or side)
bend
Macro &
Hardness
Impact
Spare
Face (or side)
bend
Root (or side)
bend
Tensile
Discard
Min. 50
(A) Test Assembly for Plates (materials indicated in (D), (E) and (F) are excluded)
(B) Test Assembly for pipes (or tubes)
(C) Test Assembly for pipes (or tubes)
(except for the welding position shown in (C))
(downward welding of fixed pipe (or tube) position)
Notes:
(1) In Fig. (A), width (W) and length (L) of test specimens are as follows.
Manual welding and semi-automatic welding: W≥300 mm, L≥350 mm
Automatic welding: W≥400 mm, L≥1000 mm
(2) The two root and two face bend test specimens may be substituted by four side bend specimens for t≥12 mm.
(3) Measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface (including weld metal and heat affected zone) is to be carried out in
accordance with kind and grade of test assembly specified in Table M4.6.
(4) The part measured for ferrite content in Fig. (B) and Fig. (C) may be an arbitrary selected part of the weld.
(5) The start and end points of the weld in Fig. (B) may be an arbitrary selected except in the case of the upward welding
horizontally fixed pipe (or tube) position.
25
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Fig. M4.1
Welding Procedure Qualification Test Assemblies (Unit: mm) (Continued)
(D) Test Assembly for KL9N53 or KL9N60
Min. 50
Discard
Tensile
Face (or side)
bend
Root (or side)
bend
Macro
Face (or side)
bend
Root (or side)
bend
Tensile
Discard
Min. 50
(E) Test Assemblies for Aluminium Alloy Plates
26
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Fig. M4.1
Welding Procedure Qualification Test Assemblies (Unit: mm) (Continued)
(F) Test Assemblies for Rolled Stainless Steel Plates
Notes:
(1) In Fig. (E) and (F), width (W) and length (L) of test assembly are as follows.
Manual welding and semi-automatic welding: W≥300 mm，L≥350 mm
Automatic welding: W≥400 mm，L≥1000 mm
(2) The root and face bends may be substituted by 4 side bends for t≥12 mm.
(3) For butt joint of dissimilar alloy material, longitudinal bend tests may be required by the Society.
(4) Measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface (including weld metal and heat affected zone) is to be carried out in
accordance with kind and grade of test assembly specified in Table M4.6.
(5) The part measured for ferrite content may be an arbitrary selected part of the weld, excluding any discards.
27
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Fig. M4.2
Position of Notch for Impact Test Specimens for Rolled Steels for Hull and High Strength Rolled Steels for Offshore
Structures (Where Welding Heat Input is not Greater than 50 kJ/cm, Unit: mm)
a
1-2mm
b c
1-2mm
a b c
2nd side
1st side
(a) For One side (t 50 mm)
a
1-2mm
b c
(b) For Both side (t 50 mm)
1-2mm
2nd side
a
b c
a
a
b
1st side
(c) For One side (t > 50 mm)
(d) For Both side (t > 50 mm)
Notch location:
a: Center of weld “WM”
b: On fusion line “FL”
c: In HAZ, 2 mm from fusion line
Note:
For one side single run welding over 20 mm notch location “a” shall be added on root side.
28
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Fig. M4.3
Position of Notch for Impact Test Specimens for Rolled Steels for Hull and High Strength Rolled Steels for Offshore
Structures (Where Welding Heat Input is Greater than 50 kJ/cm, Unit: mm)
a
1-2mm
b c d
e
1-2mm
2nd side
a b c d
e
1st side
(a) For One side (t 20 mm)
a
1-2mm
b c d
(b) For Both side (t 50 mm)
1-2mm
2nd side
a
a
b c d
a
e
c
1st side
bc
(c) For One side (t > 20 mm)
(d) For Both side (t > 50 mm)
Notch location:
a: Center of weld “WM”
b: On fusion line “FL”
c: In HAZ, 2 mm from fusion line
d: In HAZ, 5 mm from fusion line
e: In HAZ, 10 mm from fusion line in case of heat input > 200 kJ/cm
29
e
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Fig. M4.4
Positions of Notch for Impact Test Specimens for Rolled Steel for Low Temperature Service and Steel Pipes for Low
Temperature Service (Unit: mm)
Notch location:
A: Center of weld “WM”
B: On fusion line “FL”
C: In HAZ, 1 mm from fusion line
D: In HAZ, 3 mm from fusion line
E: In HAZ, 5 mm from fusion line
a)
For One side
b)
For Both side
30
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
4.2.4
Finished Inspection
Welded surface is to be regular and uniform and is to be free from injurious defects, such as cracks, undercuts, overlaps, etc.
4.2.5
1
Tensile Tests*
Tensile tests are to be carried out with the U2A, U2B, 2C, 2D or 2E test specimens shown in Table M3.1. However, where other
test specimens are used, they are to be approved by the Society. The ultimate tensile strength is not to be less than the minimum ultimate
tensile strength specified for the base metal except for those specified in Table M4.7
2
The number of tensile test specimens taken from each test assembly is to be as shown in Table M4.6.
3
As for the requirements for tensile tests of welded joints of steels of different specified strength, those for joints of steels of
lower specified strength are to be applied.
4
Notwithstanding -1 above, the ultimate tensile strength of the welded joints of steels where welding consumables different from
those given in Table M2.1 are selected in accordance with 2.4.1-1(3) is not to be less than the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the
selected welding consumable.
Table M4.7
Kind of test assembly
Rolled steels for low
Tensile Test Requirements for Butt Welded Joint
Grade of test assembly
Tensile test
KL9N53, KL9N60
temperature service
Steel pipes for low
temperature service
Tensile strength (N/mm 2)
0.2% proof stress(N/mm 2)
590 min. (1)
315 min.
630 min.
KLP9
5086P-H112 (4)
5086P-H116
5083P-H116
5083P-H321
(2)
630 min.
―
240 min.
―
275 min.
―
5383P-H116
―
5383P-H321
290 min.
5456P-H116 (6)
Aluminium alloys
(3)
―
―
5456P-H321 (6)
5059P-H116
330 min.
―
5086S-H111
240 min.
―
5383S-H112
290 min.
―
170 min.
―
5059P-H321
6061P-T6
6005AS-T5 (5) ，6005AS-T6 (5)
6061S-T6 (5)
6082S-T5 (5) ，6082S-T6 (5)
Notes:
(1) For test specimens in longitudinal direction
(2) For test specimen in transverse direction
(3) Grades of aluminium alloys have indication grade showing the temper condition.
(4) For test assembly thickness not more than 12.5 mm
(5) See Notes (13) of Table M4.6.
(6) When the thickness is 40 mm or less.
31
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
4.2.6
1
Bend Tests
Bend tests are to be carried out with the face bend and root bend or side bend test specimen shown in UB-1, UB-2, B-3, B-
4, or B-5 of Table M3.2, and the test specimens are to be bent by the jig shown in Table M4.8. There is to be no crack nor any other
defect greater than 3 mm in length in any direction on the surface of bent specimen.
2
The number of bend test specimens taken from each test assembly is to be as shown in Table M4.6.
Table M4.8
Kind of test assembly
Steel pipes for low
temperature service
Bend Test Requirements for Butt Welded Joint
Maximum radius of
Grade of test assembly
plunger (mm)(1)
Bending angle (degree)
10
𝑎
3
KLP9
KA420, KD420,
KE420, KF420,
KA460, KD460,
5
𝑎
2
KE460, KF460,
KA500,KD500,
KE500, KF500
High strength rolled
steels for offshore
structures
KA550, KD550,
KE550, KF550,
KA620, KD620,
3a
KE620, KF620,
KA690, KD690,
180
KE690, KF690
KA890, KD890, KE890,
(5)
KA960, KD960, KE960
5754P
5086P, 5086S (3)
5083P, 5083S (3)
5383P, 5383S (3)
Aluminium alloys (2)
5059P, 5059S (3)
(
100 × 𝑎
− 𝑎) × 0.5
𝐴
5456P
6005AS (4)
6061P, 6061S (4)
6082S (4)
Other materials
2a
Notes:
(1) a: thickness of the test specimen specified in Table M3.2 (mm)
A: minimum elongation specified in Table K8.3 (%) and in the case of a combination of different alloys, the lowest
individual value is to be used.
(2) See Notes (11) of Table M4.6.
(3) See Notes (12) of Table M4.6.
(4) See Notes (13) of Table M4.6.
(5) Standards deemed appropriate by Society
4.2.7
1
Impact Tests*
Impact test specimens are to be U4 specimens shown in Table K2.5 and to be taken from the position shown in Fig. M4.2 to
Fig. M4.4. Where U4 impact test specimens cannot be taken because of the convenience of material, the requirements in sub-paragraphs
2.2.4-4 and 2.3.2-2 in Part K of the Rules is to be applied.
32
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
2
The number of specimens taken from each test assembly and the position of notch for the specimen are to be as shown in Table
M4.6 and Fig. M4.2 to Fig. M4.4. The longitudinal direction of the notch of the test specimen is to be in the direction of the thickness
of test material.
3
The testing temperature and the minimum mean absorbed energy of three specimens are to be as specified in Table M4.9 to
Table M4.11 and the percent brittle fracture of the specimens is to be measured.
4
The test specimens are to be taken from the automatically welded part, for the combined joint welded by automatic welding
and manual or semi-automatic welding. It may be required to take another set of test specimens from the manually or semi-automatically
welded part, where deemed necessary by the Society.
5
For the butt joints where higher grade of steel is welded to lower grade of steel, the impact test is to be carried out in accordance
with the requirements for the impact tests of butt joints of the lower grade of steel.
6
As for the requirements for impact tests of welded joints of steels of different specified strength, those for joints of steels of
lower specified strength are to be applied.
7
In cases where maximum thickness to be approved is more than 50 mm but not exceeding 70 mm, CTOD tests or deep notch
tests (hereinafter referred to as “brittle fracture tests”), or technical documents related to such brittle fracture tests may be required in
addition to impact tests; in cases where such maximum thickness to be approved exceeds 70 mm, brittle fracture tests are to be carried
out in addition to impact tests or technical documents related to such brittle fracture tests are to be submitted to the Society. Also, brittle
fracture tests described above are to be carried out at the maximum thickness to be approved. However, both brittle fracture tests and
the technical documents related to such brittle fracture tests may be omitted where deemed appropriate by the Society.
Table M4.9
Impact Test Requirements for Butt Weld Joint
(Rolled Steel for Hull, where thickness of test assemblies is not greater than 50 mm)(1)
Grade of steel
Value of minimum average absorbed energy (J) (2)
Testing temperature
(℃)
For manually or semi-automatically weld joints
Downhand,
Horizontal,
Overhead
KA(3)
20
(3)
KB , KD
0
KE
-20
KA32, KA36
20
KD32, KD36
0
KE32, KE36
-20
KF32, KF36
-40
KA40
20
KD40
0
KE40
-20
KF40
-40
Vertical upward,
For automatically
Vertical downward
welded joints
34
34
39
39
47
Notes:
(1) In cases where the thickness of test assemblies exceeds 50 mm or KE47 is used, impact test requirements deemed
appropriate by the Society are to be applied.
(2) A set of test specimens is considered to have failed if the value of absorbed energy of more than two test specimens is
less than the specified value of minimum mean absorbed energy or if the value of anyone of the test specimens is less
than 70% of the specified value of minimum mean absorbed energy.
(3) Steels average absorbed energy on fusion line and in heat affected zone is to be minimum 27 J.
33
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Table M4.10 Impact Test Requirements for Butt Welded Joint (Rolled Steels for Lower Temperature Service and Steel Pipes
for Low Temperature Service)
Grade of steel
B, C, D, E(1)
Value of minimum mean
Value of minimum mean absorbed energy(3) (J)
Testing temperature (℃)
A(1)
absorbed energy(3) (J)
KL24A
-40
KL24B
-50
KL27
-60
KL33
-60
KL37
-60
KL2N30
-70
KL3N32
-95
KL5N43
-110
KL9N53
-196
KL9N60
-196
KLPA
-40
KLPB
-50
KLPC
-60
KLP2
-70
KLP3
-95
KLP9
-196
L(2)
T(2)
41
27
27
27
34
41
Notes:
(1) Position of notch as shown in Fig.M4.4.
(2) L (or T) indicates that the direction of welding is transverse (or parallel) to the rolling direction of test materials.
(3) A set of test specimens is considered to have failed if the value of absorbed energy of more than two test specimens is
less than the specified value of minimum mean absorbed energy or if the value of any one of the test specimens is less
than 70% of the specified value of minimum mean absorbed energy.
34
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Table M4.11 Impact Test Requirements for Butt Weld Joints
(High Strength Rolled Steels for Offshore Structures)
Grade of steel
Minimum mean absorbed energy (J)(1)
Testing temperature
(℃)
KA420
0
KD420
-20
KE420
-40
KF420
-60
KA460
0
KD460
-20
KE460
-40
KF460
-60
KA500
0
KD500
-20
KE500
-40
KF500
-60
KA550
0
KD550
-20
KE550
-40
KF550
-60
KA620
0
KD620
-20
KE620
-40
KF620
-60
KA690
0
KD690
-20
KE690
-40
KF690
-60
KA890
0
KD890
-20
KE890
-40
KA960
0
KD960
-20
KE960
-40
a(2)
B, c, d, e(2)
L (3)
T(3)
42
28
46
31
50
50
33
55
55
37
62
62
41
69
69
46
69
69
46
69
69
46
47
Notes:
(1) A set of test specimens is considered to have failed if the value of absorbed energy of more than two test specimens is
less than the specified value of minimum mean absorbed energy or if the value of any one of the test specimens is less
than 70% of the specified value of minimum mean absorbed energy.
(2) Position of notch as shown in Fig M4.2 and Fig M4.3.
(3) L (or T) indicates that the direction of welding is transverse (or parallel) to the rolling.
4.2.8
1
Macro-structure Inspection
The transverse section of test specimens taken from the welded joint is to be etched and examined, and is to show that there are
no crack, poor penetration, lack of fusion and other injurious defects.
2
Macro examination shall include about 10 mm unaffected base metal.
35
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
4.2.9
1
Hardness Test
Vickers hardness is to be measured at the position shown in Fig. M4.5. The kinds of specimens for Vickers hardness are to be
in accordance with the requirements specified given in Table M4.12.
2
The number of specimens for hardness test is to be in accordance with the requirements specified given in Table M4.6.
Fig. M4.5
Hardness Test (Unit: mm)
2 max
Line of measurement
2 max
(a) For One side
2 max
2 max
Line of
measurement
Line of
measurement
2 max
2 max
(b) For Both side
Notes:
(1) For each row of indentations there shall be a minimum of 3 individual indentations in the weld metal, the heat affected
zones (both side) and the base metal (both sides).
(2) Measuring intervals are to be 1 mm on the basis of the bond.
(3) Test force is to be 98.07 N.
(4) For KE47, measurement at mid thickness line of is to be added.
Table M4.12 Requirements of Hardness Test
Kinds of test assembly
Vickers hardness (HV10)
Rolled steels for
KA36，KD36，KE36，KF36
350 max
hull
KA40，KD40，KE40，KF40
High strength
rolled steels for
offshore structures
Rolled steels for
low temperature
service
Steel pipes for low
temperature
service
KE47
KA420，KD420，KE420，KF420
KA460，KD460，KE460，KF460
KA500，KD500，KE500，KF500
KA550，KD550，KE550，KF550
KA620，KD620，KE620，KF620
KA690，KD690，KE690，KF690
KA890，KD890，KE890，
KA960，KD960，KE960
KL37
350 max(1)
KL5N43，KL9N53，KL9N60
420 max
KLP9
420 max
350 max
420 max
450 max
350 max
Note:
(1) Steels considered to have brittle crack arrest properties specified in 3.12, Part K are to be 380 max.
36
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
4.2.10
1
Non-destructive Inspection
Internal inspections by radiographic examination or ultrasonic examination, and surface inspections by magnetic particle
examination or liquid penetrant examination are to be carried for whole length of the welding. The result of non-destructive inspection
is to show that there are no crack, poor penetration, lack of fusion and other injurious defects.
2
In case any post-weld heat treatment is required or specified, non-destructive inspection test is to be performed after heat
treatment.
3
High strength rolled steels for offshore structures are to be delayed for minimum of 48 hours, unless heat treatment has been
carried out.
4.2.11
1
Measurement of ferrite content at weld surface
Measurement of ferrite content at weld surface (including weld metal and heat affected zone) is to be carried out in accordance
with kind and grade of test assembly specified in Table M4.6.
2
The ferrite content at the weld surface is to be measured for the part specified in Fig. M4.1 prior to each test.
3
The ferrite content at the weld surface is to be measured by a method using magnetic device as specified in JIS Z 3119 or an
equivalent method. The ferrite content of at least 6 points at different positions along the weld longitudinal direction is to be measured.
Measurements are made at least 5 times at each point, and the highest value among the readings is to be used as the measured value.
The measurement points are to include a minimum of 3 points in the weld metal and 3 points in the heat affected zone. However, where
the width of the heat affected zone is narrow and difficult to carry out measurement, 6 points in the weld metal are to be measured.
4
The value of ferrite content at each measurement point is to be in the range of 30% to 70%.
5
Notwithstanding the requirements given in -2 to -4, for welded joints of different grade of steels or when duplex stainless steel
welding consumables are not used, the appropriate measurement points and the value of ferrite content are to be as deemed appropriate
by the Society.
4.2.12
1
Retests
Where visual inspection, macro-structure inspection or non-destructive inspection fails to meet the requirements, the new test
specimens welded under the same welding conditions, are to be subject to retest and all of these test specimens are to pass the test.
2
Where the tensile test or the bend test fails to meet the requirements, twice as many test specimens as the number of failed test
specimens are to be selected from either the first test material or test materials welded under the same welding conditions, and all of
these test specimens are to pass the test.
3
Where results of the impact test fail to satisfy the requirements and in cases other than those given in the following (1) and (2),
retests may be carried out on a set of test specimens selected from the same test material as the one from which the failed test specimens
were selected. In this case, the test specimens are considered to have passed the tests if the average value of absorbed energy of a total
of six test specimens, including the values of the failed specimens, is not less than the value of the specified minimum mean absorbed
energy and, furthermore, if the number of test specimens among the said six test specimens which are of lower energy than the specified
value of minimum mean absorbed energy, and the number of test specimens which are of 70% lower energy than the specified value
of minimum mean absorbed energy are not more than two and one respectively.
(1) Where all test specimens fail to reach the specified value of minimum mean absorbed energy
(2) Where two of the test specimens fail to reach 70% of the specified value of minimum mean absorbed energy
4
If there is a single hardness value above the maximum values allowed, additional hardness tests shall be carried out (on the
reverse of the specimen or after sufficient grinding of the test surface).
5
Where the measurement of the ferrite content at the weld surface fails to meet the requirements, an additional 2 parts on the
same test assembly may be retested. In such cases, measurement is to be carried out in accordance with the requirements in 4.2.11-1
and -2 and all measurement point values are to be within the required range.
6
Where the test specimens fail to meet the requirements specified in either of preceding -1 through -5, new test specimens are to
be welded by changing the welding condition, and to be retest and pass all test items as specified.
37
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
4.3
Tests for Fillet Weld Joints
4.3.1
1
Application*
The requirements in 4.3 apply to the fillet weld joints of materials prescribed in shown in Table M4.6 or equivalent materials
welded by a manual, semi-automatic or automatic welding method, etc.
2
The requirements for branch connections in 4.6 are applicable in cases where the angles of the pipe (or tube) fittings of test
assemblies are less than 90 degrees.
4.3.2
Kinds of Test*
Fillet weld joints are to be subjected to finished inspection, macro-structure inspection, hardness test, fracture, non-destructive
inspection test and measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface. Additional tests may be required if found necessary by the
Society.
4.3.3
Test Assemblies and Welding*
1
Test assembly is to be prepared with the same or equivalent material used in the actual work.
2
The dimensions and type of test assembly are to be as indicated in Fig. M4.6.
3
Test assemblies are to be welded in the general conditions specified in welding procedure specifications.
4
The assembly is to be welded on one side only, except in case deemed necessary by the Surveyor.
5
In case wheres the test assembly is a plate, for manual and semi-automatic welding, a stop/restart should be included in middle
of the test assemblies in longitudinal direction.
6
The tack welds of test piece are to be the same procedure as actual work.
4.3.4
Finished Inspection
Welded surface is to be regular and uniform and is to be free from injurious defects, such as cracks, undercuts, overlaps, etc.
4.3.5
1
Macro-structure Inspection
In macro etched specimens showing the transverse section of fillet weld joint, weld joints are to be free from excessive
difference between upper and lower fillet lengths, cracks and other injurious defects.
2
Macro examination shall include about 10 mm unaffected base metal.
4.3.6
1
Hardness Test
Vickers hardness is to be measured at the position shown in Fig. M4.7. The kinds of specimens for Vickers hardness are to be
in accordance with the requirements specified given in Table M4.12.
2
The number of specimens for hardness test are to be in accordance with the requirements specified given in Table M4.6.
4.3.7
1
Fracture Tests
In cases where the test assembly is a plate, two (2) test specimens are to be taken from the remainder of the test assembly after
the macro-structure specimen has been removed.
2
In cases where the test assembly is a pipe (or tube), an appropriate number of test specimens is to be taken from the remainder
of the test assembly after the macro-structure specimen has been removed.
3
The test assemblies are to be broken by pressing as shown in Fig. M4.6, without cracks, poor penetrations, blow holes and
injurious defects in the fractured surface. Where, however, the sum of lengths having blow holes (include poor penetrations), except at
both ends of the specimen (only for plate test assemblies), is not greater than 10% of the total welded length, the test may be regarded
as satisfactory.
4.3.8
1
Non-destructive Inspection
Surface inspections by magnetic particle examination or liquid penetrant examination are to be carried for whole length of the
welding. The result of non-destructive inspection is to show that there are no crack and other injurious defects.
2
In case any post-weld heat treatment is required or specified, non-destructive inspection test is to be performed after heat
treatment.
3
High strength rolled steels for offshore structures are to be delayed for minimum of 48 hours, unless heat treatment has been
carried out.
4.3.9
1
Measurement of ferrite content at weld surface
Measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface (including weld metal and heat affected zone) is to be carried out in
accordance with kind and grade of test assembly specified in Table M4.6.
38
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
2
The ferrite content at the weld surface is to be measured for the part specified in Fig. M4.6 in accordance with the requirement
in 4.2.11-3 to -5 prior to each test.
4.3.10
1
Retests
Where visual inspection, macro-structure inspection, fracture test or non-destructive inspection test fails, the new test specimens
welded under the same welding conditions, are to be subject to retest, and all of these test specimens are to pass the test items specified.
2
Where the hardness test fails, the retest may be correspondingly applied to the requirement in 4.2.12-4.
3
Where the measurement of the ferrite content at the weld surface fails to meet the requirements, a retest may be carried out by
correspondingly applying the requirement in 4.2.12-5.
Fig. M4.6
Test Assembly for Fillet Weld Joints (Unit: mm)
(a) Plate(1)(2)(3)(4)(7)
(b) Pipe (or Tube)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)
Notes:
(1) The length of test specimen, L is not less than 350 mm for manual welding and semi-automatic welding (including
gravity welding) and not less than 1,000 mm for automatic welding.
(2) Measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface (including weld metal and heat affected zone) is to be carried out in
accordance with kind and grade of test assembly specified in Table M4.6.
(3) The part measured for ferrite content may be an arbitrarily selected part of the weld, excluding any discards.
(4) The thickness of a plate (or pipe) and the thickness of a flange may be different.
(5) The dimensions of flange material are arbitrary. However, the distance between the outer circle of a pipe (or tube) and
the end of a flange is not to be less than 50 mm at the surface of the flange.
(6) For the upward welding and downward welding horizontally fixed pipe (or tube) positions, macro-structure specimens
39
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
are to be taken from the bottoms and sides of test assemblies.
(7) Hardness tests may be carried out using one of the macro-structure specimens. In the case of the upward welding
horizontally fixed pipe (or tube) position, macro-structure specimens are to taken from the bottoms of test assemblies ;
however, in the case of the downward welding horizontally fixed pipe (or tube) position, macro-structure specimens are
to be taken from the sides of test assemblies.
Fig. M4.7
Hardness Test (Unit: mm)
2 max
2 max
2 max
Notes:
(1) For each row of indentations there shall be a minimum of 3 individual indentations in the weld metal, the heat affected
zones (both side) and the base metal (both sides).
(2) Measuring intervals are to be 1 mm on the basis of the bond.
(3) Test force is to be 98.07 N.
4.4
4.4.1
1
Tests for T-joints with Full Penetration
Application
The requirements in 4.4 apply to the T-joints with full penetration of materials prescribed in Table M4.6 or equivalent
materials welded by a manual, semi-automatic or automatic welding method, etc.
2
The requirements for branch connections in 4.6 are applicable in cases where the angles of the pipe (of tube) fittings of test
assemblies are less than 90 degrees.
4.4.2
Kinds of Test
T-joints with full penetration are to be subjected to finished inspection, macro-structure inspection, hardness test, non-
destructive inspection test and the measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface.
4.4.3
Test Assemblies and Welding
1
Test assembly is to be prepared with the same or equivalent material used in the actual work.
2
The dimensions and type of test assembly are to be as indicated in Fig. M4.8.
3
Test assemblies are to be welded in the general conditions specified in welding procedure specifications.
4
The tack welds of test piece are to be the same procedure as actual work.
4.4.4
Finished Inspection
Welded surface is to be regular and uniform and is to be free from injurious defects, such as cracks, undercuts, overlaps, etc.
4.4.5
1
Macro-structure Inspection
The transverse section of test specimens taken from the welded joint is to be etched and examined, and is to show that there are
no crack, poor penetration, lack of fusion and other injurious defects.
2
Macro examination shall include about 10 mm unaffected base metal.
40
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
4.4.6
1
Hardness Test
Vickers hardness is to be measured at the position shown in Fig. M4.9. The kinds of specimens for Vickers hardness are to be
in accordance with the requirements specified given in Table M4.12.
2
The number of specimens for hardness tests is to be in accordance with the requirements specified in Table M4.6.
4.4.7
1
Non-destructive Inspection
Internal inspections by radiographic examination or ultrasonic examination, and surface inspections by magnetic particle
examination or liquid penetrant examination are to be carried for whole length of the welding. The result of non-destructive inspection
is to show that there are no crack, poor penetration, lack of fusion and other injurious defects.
2
In case any post-weld heat treatment is required or specified, non-destructive inspection test is to be performed after heat
treatment.
3
High strength rolled steels for offshore structures are to be delayed for minimum of 48 hours, unless heat treatment has been
carried out.
4.4.8
1
Measurement of ferrite content at weld surface
Measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface (including weld metal and heat affected zone) is to be carried out in
accordance with kind and grade of test assembly specified in Table M4.6.
2
The ferrite content at the weld surface is to be measured for the part specified in Fig. M4.8 in accordance with the requirement
in 4.2.11-3 to -5 prior to each test.
4.4.9
1
Retests
Where visual inspection, macro-structure inspection or non-destructive inspection test fails, the new test specimens welded
under the same welding conditions, are to be subject to retest, and all of these test specimens are to pass the test items specified.
2
Where the hardness test fails, the retest may be correspondingly applied to the requirement in 4.2.12-4.
3
Where the measurement of the ferrite content at the weld surface fails to meet the requirements, a retest may be carried out by
correspondingly applying the requirement in 4.2.12-5.
41
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Fig. M4.8
Test Assembly for T-joints with Full Penetration
(a) Plate(1)(2)(3)(4)(7)
(b) Pipe (or Tube)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)
Notes:
(1) The length of test specimen, L is not less than 350 mm for manual welding and semi-automatic welding and not less
than 1,000 mm for automatic welding.
(2) Measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface (including weld metal and heat affected zone) is to be carried out in
accordance with kind and grade of test assembly specified in Table M4.6.
(3) The part measured for ferrite content may be an arbitrary selected part of the weld, excluding any discards.
(4) The thickness of a plate (or pipe) and the thicknesses of a flange may be different.
(5) The dimensions of flange material are arbitrary. However, the distance between the outer circle of a pipe (or tube) and
the end of flange is not to be less than 50 mm at the surface of the flange.
(6) For the upper welding and downward welding horizontally fixed pipe (or tube) positions, macro-structure specimens
are to be taken from the bottoms and sides of test assemblies.
(7) Hardness tests may be carried out using one of the macro-structure specimens. In the case of the upward welding
horizontally fixed pipe (or tube) position, macro-structure specimens are to be taken from the bottoms of test assemblies ;
however, in the case of the downward welding horizontally fixed pipe (or tube) position, macro-structure specimens are
to be taken from sides of the test assemblies.
42
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Fig. M4.9
Hardness Test (Unit: mm)
max
22mm
2 max
2 mm
22max
mm
2 max
2 mm
Notes:
(1) For each row of indentations there is to be a minimum of 3 individual indentations in the weld metal, the heat affected
zones (both side) and the base metal (both sides).
(2) Measuring intervals are to be 1 mm on the basis of the bond.
(3) Test force is to be 98.07 N.
43
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
4.5
Tests for T-joints with Partial Penetration
4.5.1
1
Application
The requirements in 4.5 apply to the T-joints with partial penetration of materials prescribed in Table M4.6 or equivalent
materials welded by a manual, semi-automatic or automatic welding method, etc.
2
The requirements for branch connections in 4.6 are applicable in cases where the angles of the pipe (or tube) fittings of test
assemblies are less than 90 degrees.
4.5.2
Kinds of Test
T-joints with partial penetration are to be subjected to finished inspection, macro-structure inspection, fracture test, hardness
test, non-destructive inspection and measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface. Additional tests may be required if found
necessary by the Society.
4.5.3
Test Assemblies and Welding
1
Test assemblies are to be prepared with the same or equivalent material used in the actual work.
2
The dimensions and type of test assemblies are to be as indicated in Fig. M4.10.
3
Test assemblies are to be welded in the general conditions specified in welding procedure specifications.
4
The tack welds of test assemblies are to be the same procedure as the actual work.
4.5.4
Finished Inspection
Welded surface is to be regular and uniform and is to be free from injurious defects, such as cracks, undercuts, overlaps, etc.
4.5.5
Macro-structure Inspection
1
Macro specimens are to be taken from the position indicated in Fig. M4.10.
2
In macro etched specimens showing the transverse section of welding, weld joints are to be free from excessive difference
between upper and lower fillet lengths, cracks and other injurious defects.
3
Macro examination is to include about 10 mm unaffected base metal.
4.5.6
1
Hardness Test
Vickers hardness is to be measured at the position shown in Fig. M4.11. The kinds of specimens for Vickers hardness are to be
in accordance with the requirements specified given in Table M4.12.
2
The number of specimens for hardness test is to be in accordance with the requirements specified given in Table M4.6.
4.5.7
1
Fracture Tests
In cases where the test assembly is a plate, two test specimens are to be taken from the remaining test assembly after the macro-
structure specimens have been taken.
2
In cases where the test assembly is a pipe (or tube), an appropriate number of test specimens is to be taken from the remainder
of the test assembly after the macro-structure specimen has been removed.
3
Test specimens are to be broken by pressing as shown in Fig. M4.12, and be without cracks, poor penetrations, blow holes and
injurious defects in the fractured surface. However, in cases where , the sum of lengths having blow holes (include poor penetrations),
except at both ends of the specimen (only for plate test assemblies), is not greater than 10% of the total welded length, the test may be
regarded as satisfactory.
4.5.8
1
Non-destructive Inspection
Surface inspections by magnetic particle examination or liquid penetrant examination are to be carried for whole length of the
welding. The result of non-destructive inspection is to show that there are no crack and other injurious defects.
2
In case any post-weld heat treatment is required or specified, non-destructive inspection is to be performed after heat treatment.
3
High strength rolled steels for offshore structures is to be delayed for minimum of 48 hours, unless heat treatment has been
carried out.
4.5.9
1
Measurement of ferrite content at weld surface
Measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface (including weld metal and heat affected zone) is to be carried out in
accordance with kind and grade of test assembly specified in Table M4.6.
2
The ferrite content at the weld surface is to be measured for the part specified in Fig. M4.10 in accordance with the requirement
in 4.2.11-3 to -5 prior to each test.
44
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
4.5.10
1
Retests
Where finished inspection, macro-structure inspection, fracture test or non-destructive inspection fails, the new test specimens
welded under the same welding conditions, are to be subject to retest, and all of these test specimens are to pass the test items specified.
2
Where the hardness test fails, the retest may be correspondingly applied to the requirement in 4.2.12-4.
3
Where the measurement of the ferrite content at the weld surface fails to meet the requirements, a retest may be carried out by
correspondingly applying the requirement in 4.2.12-5.
Fig. M4.10
Test Assemblies for T-joints with Partial Penetration (Unit: mm)
(a) Plate(1)(3)(4)(5)(6)
(b) Pipe (or Tube)(2)(3)(5)(6)(7)(8)
Notes:
(1) The length of test assemblies, L is not less than 350 mm for manual welding and semi-automatic welding (including
gravity welding) and not less than 1,000 mm for automatic welding.
(2) For the upward welding and downward welding horizontally fixed pipe (or tube) positions, macro-structure specimens
are to be taken from the bottoms and sides of test assemblies.
(3) Hardness tests may be carried out using one of the macro-structure specimens. In the case of the upward welding
horizontally fixed pipe (or tube) position, macro-structure specimens are to be taken from the bottoms of test assemblies ;
however, in the case of the downward welding horizontally fixed pipe (or tube) position, macro-structure specimens are
to be taken from the sides of test assemblies.
(4) Fracture test specimens are, as far as possible, to be taken in equal lengths in the direction of welding direction.
(5) Measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface (including weld metal and heat affected zone) is to be carried out in
accordance with kind and grade of test assembly specified in Table M4.6 .
45
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
(6)
(7)
(8)
The part measured for ferrite content may be an arbitrarily selected part of the weld, excluding any discards.
The thickness of a plate (or pipe) and the thickness of a flange may be different.
The dimensions of flange material are arbitrary. However, the distance between the outer circle of a pipe (or tube) and
the end of a flange is not to be less than 50 mm at the surface of the flange.
Fig. M4.11
Hardness Test (Unit: mm)
Notes:
(1) For each row of indentations there is to be a minimum of 3 individual indentations in the weld metal, the heat affected
zones (both side) and the base metal (both sides).
(2) Measuring intervals are to be 1 mm on the basis of the bond.
(3) Test force is to be 98.07 N.
46
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
Fig. M4.12
Fracture Test (Unit: mm)
(a) Plate(1)
(b) Pipe (or Tube)
Note:
(1) Welding is to be removed from the side where force is applied.
47
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
4.6
4.6.1
Tests for branch connection
Application
The requirements in 4.6 apply to the branch connections of the materials prescribed in Table M4.6 or equivalent materials
welded by a manual, semi-automatic or automatic welding method, etc. in cases where the angles of pipe (or tube) fittings are less than
90 degrees, as prescribed in 4.3.1-2, 4.4.1-2 and 4.5.1-2.
4.6.2
Kinds of Test
Branch connections are to be subjected to finished inspections, macro-structure inspections, fracture tests, hardness tests, non-
destructive inspections and measurements of ferrite content at the weld surface.
4.6.3
Test Assemblies and Welding
1
Test assemblies are to be prepared with the same or equivalent material used in the actual work.
2
The dimensions and types of test assemblies are to be as indicated in Fig. M4.13.
3
The joints of test assemblies are to be welded by as T-joints with partial penetration, T-joints with full penetration or fillet weld
joints, whichever is used in the actual work.
4
The kinds of joint assemblies of test assemblies are to be Set-on, Set-in or Set-through, whichever is used in the actual work.
5
Test assemblies are to be welded in accordance with the general conditions specified in the welding procedure specifications.
6
The tack welds of test assemblies are to be of the same procedure as the actual work.
Fig. M4.13
Branch connection
Notes:
(1) The angle of a pipe (or tube) fitting in “α” degrees is the minimum value in the actual work.
(2) Measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface (including the weld metal and heat affected zone) is to be carried out
in accordance with kind and grade of test assembly specified in Table M4.6 .
(3) The part measured for ferrite content may be an arbitrary selected part of the weld.
(4) D1 and D2 may be different.
(5) t1 and t2 may be different.
(6) The distance between the outer circle of a pipe (or tube) and the end of another pipe (or tube) is not to be less than 150
mm.
(7) Macro-structure specimens are to be taken from parts A and B.
(8) Hardness tests may be carried out using macro-structure specimens taken from part A.
48
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 4)
4.6.4
Finished Inspection
Welded surfaces are to be regular and uniform, and are to be free from injurious defects, such as cracks, undercuts, overlaps ,
etc.
4.6.5
1
Macro-structure Inspection
The transverse section of test specimens taken from the welded joint is to be etched and examined, and is to show that there are
no crack, poor penetration, lack of fusion and other injurious defects.
2
Macro examinations are to include about 10 mm of unaffected base metal.
4.6.6
1
Hardness Test
Vickers hardness is to be measured at the positions shown in Fig. M4.7, Fig. M4.9 or Fig. M4.11. The kinds of specimens for
Vickers hardness are to be in accordance with the requirements specified in Table M4.12.
2
The number of specimens for hardness tests is to be in accordance with the requirements specified in Table M4.6.
4.6.7
1
Non-destructive Inspection
Internal inspections by radiographic examination or ultrasonic examination, and surface inspections by magnetic particle
examination or liquid penetrant examination are to be carried for the whole length of the welding. The results of non-destructive
inspections are to show that there are no cracks, poor penetration, lack of fusion and other injurious defects. For T-joints with partial
penetration and fillet weld joints, fracture tests may be accepted instead of radiographic examination or ultrasonic examination. In such
cases, the fracture test may be carried out by correspondingly applying the requirements in 4.3.7 or 4.5.7.
2
In cases where post-weld heat treatment is required or specified, non-destructive inspections are to be performed after the heat
treatment.
4.6.8
1
Measurement of Ferrite Content at Weld Surface
Measurement of ferrite content at the weld surface (including the weld metal and heat affected zone) is to be carried out in
accordance with kind and grade of test assembly specified in Table M4.6.
2
The ferrite content at the weld surface is to be measured prior to each test for the parts specified in Fig. M4.13 in accordance
with the requirements in 4.2.11-3 to -5.
4.6.9
1
Retests
Where finished inspections, macro-structure inspections, non-destructive inspections (or fracture tests) fail, new test specimens
welded under the same welding conditions are to be subject to retests, and all of these test specimens are to pass the test items specified.
2
Where hardness tests fail, retests may be carried out by correspondingly applying the requirements in 4.2.12-4.
3
Where the measurement of the ferrite content at the weld surface fails to meet the requirements, retests may be carried out by
correspondingly applying the requirements in 4.2.12-5.
49
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Chapter 5
5.1
WELDERS AND WELDERS QUALIFICATION TESTS
General
5.1.1
1
Welders
Each welder and welding operator (hereinafter referred to as “welder”) to be engaged in the welding work specified in this part
is to pass the qualification tests (including initial and renewal tests, except in cases where otherwise specified) with respect to each
welder qualification (hereinafter referred to as “qualification”) required depending on the applicable welding process and materials to
be welded, and to obtain the qualification certificate issued by the Society.
2
This chapter specifies the qualification test requirements for manual, semi-automatic, TIG (tungsten inert gas), gas, automatic
(hereinafter including welding with auto-carriage) and tack welding process. The term “semi-automatic welding” means that the
welding is carried out manually by a welder holding a gun through which only the wire is fed automatically.
3
Each welder responsible for setting up and/or adjusting the automatic welding equipment is to obtain the qualification certificate
for automatic welding process or one which includes automatic welding in the range of qualification issued by the Society regardless
of whether the welder operates the equipment or not. A welding operator who solely operates the equipment and is not responsible for
any setting up and/or adjusting, however, does not need said qualification provided that the operator is experienced in the specific
welding work concerned.
4
Each welder engaged in tack welding is to obtain the qualification certificate for the tack welding process or one which includes
tack welding in the range of qualification issued by the Society.
5
This chapter specifies the qualification test requirements for the welding work of carbon steels, stainless steels aluminium alloy
and nickel steel.
6
The qualification test requirements for each welder to be engaged in special welding work or the welding of special materials
not specified in this chapter are to be as deemed appropriate by the Society.
7
Notwithstanding the requirements in this chapter, welders qualified in accordance with national or international welder
qualification standards may also engage in the welding work at the discretion of the Society provided that the qualification testing,
range of qualification and revalidation requirements, etc. are considered equivalent to this chapter. Alternative national or
international welder qualification standards, however, are to be applied in full and the cross-mixing of requirements from standards is
not permitted.
5.1.2
Qualification Test Applications*
In the case of applications for qualification tests, the shipyard or manufacturer (hereinafter referred to as “applicant”) to which
the welder taking the qualification tests belongs is to submit an application form (Form-WE(E)) along with a photograph of the welder
to the Society (relevant branch office or service site).
5.1.3
1
Welder Qualification Certificates*
Qualification certificates are to be issued to the applicant by the Society for welders who have passed qualification tests.
Qualification certificates are to include the following items:
(1) Essential variables (welding process, product, type of welded joint, base metal, welding consumable, base metal thickness,
outside diameter, welding positions and detail of welded joint.)
(2) Range of qualification for (1) above.
(3) Period of validity for the qualification certificate.
(4) Name, date of birth and photograph of the welder.
(5) Name of the applicant.
(6) Welder’s ID.
(7) Renewal methods of qualification in accordance with 5.1.6.
2
The qualification certificate is to be shown to the Surveyor at any time if required.
3
The applicant is to request without delay that the Society reissue or rewrite any qualification certificates which are lost, soiled,
or in which there has been a change in the items specified on them.
50
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
4
The reissuance or rewriting of qualification certificates is to be done in accordance with -3 above, and the applicant is to submit
an application for the reissuance or rewriting of the qualification certificate (any format acceptable, but the application is to include the
welder’s ID as well as the welder’s name and date of birth) and a photograph of welder to the Society (relevant branch office or service
site).
5.1.4
Period of Validity for Qualification Certificates*
A qualification certificate is to be valid from the date on which the welder passed the qualification test to a date not exceeding
the period corresponding to the renewal methods selected in accordance with 5.1.6.
5.1.5
1
Verification of the Validity of Qualification Certificates*
The person responsible for production weld quality is to verify the following items for each welder who has a qualification
certificate at least once every six months. The results of this verification are to be recorded on the relevant qualification certificate
or in any relevant documents, and then submitted for verification by a Society surveyor.
(1) The welder has engaged with reasonable continuity in the concerned welding work.
(2) The welder’s work has been carried out within the qualified range specified in certificates.
(3) There is no specific reason to question the welder’s skill and knowledge.
2
In cases where the results of verification do not fulfill any of the items in -1 above, the person responsible for production weld
quality is to apply for the cancelation of the welder’s qualification certificates, except in cases related to -1(1) and -1(2) above where
deemed appropriately by the Society.
5.1.6
1
Continuation of Qualification
The period of validity for a qualification certificate is to be renewed in accordance with one of the following (1) to (3) methods .
(1) The method in cases where the welder welds a test assembly covered in the qualification test (renewal) in accordance with 5.3
(however, excluding the requirements for ultrasonic testing in 5.3.5-7, 5.3.6-5 and 5.3.7-2) within six months before the expiry
date of the existing certificate, and satisfies either requirement (a) or (b) as well as (c) below, the period of validity for the
renewed qualification certificate is to be until three years from the day after the expiry date of the existing certificate.
(a) The welder passes the qualification test (renewal) or retest before the expiry date of the existing certificate.
(b) The welder passes the retest for qualification test (renewal) after the expiry date of the existing certificate.
(c) In cases where the verification of the validity of qualification certificate specified in 5.1.5 is carried out, and the results of
said verification are deemed satisfactory by the Surveyor.
(2) The method in cases where the welder welds a test assembly covered in the qualification test (renewal) in accordance with 5.3
within six months before the expiry date of the existing certificate, and satisfies either requirement (b) or (c) as well as (a) and
(d) below, the period of validity for the renewed qualification certificate is to be until two years from the day after the expiry
date of the existing certificate.
(a) Two welds made to reproduce the initial test conditions except for the thickness are to be tested by one of the radiographic
tests, ultrasonic tests, bend tests, fracture tests, notch tensile tests or macro-structure inspections and the results of said
verification are deemed satisfactory by the Surveyor. In such a cases, the test results are to be recorded.
(b) The welder passes the qualification test (renewal) or retest before the expiry date of the existing certificate.
(c) The welder passes the retest for qualification test (renewal) after the expiry date of the existing certificate.
(d) In cases where the verification of the validity of qualification certificate specified in 5.1.5 is carried out, and the results of
said verification are deemed satisfactory by the Surveyor.
(3) The method in cases where the results of the requirements (a) to (d) are verified and are deemed satisfactory by the Surveyor,
the period of validity for the renewed qualification certificate is to be until the date of the next verification from the day after
the completion of verification. The frequency of verification is to be no longer than three years and is to be agreed upon by the
Society in advance.
(a) The welder is working for the same shipyard or manufacturer that is responsible for production weld quality as indicated
on his or her qualification certificate.
(b) The welder quality management system of the shipyard or manufacturer including the following items at a minimum is
verified by the Society in advance.
i)
A designated person responsible for the coordination of the welder quality management system.
ii)
List of welders and welding supervisors in shipyard or manufacturer.
51
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
iii) List of subcontracted welders (if applicable).
iv) Qualification certificates of welders and a description of the associated management system.
v)
Training requirements for the welder qualification programme.
vi) Identification system for welders and welding procedure and related specifications used on welds.
vii) The criteria permitting the maintenance of welder qualification without retesting (e.g. repair rate).
viii) Procedure describing the system in place to monitor each welder performance based on results of welds examination
records.
(c) The shipyard or manufacturer is to document at least once a year that the welder has produced acceptable welds in
accordance with construction quality standards and the welder qualification certificate by the system. Which documents
are required and how to document the evidences are to be verified by the Society in advance.
(d) The validity of qualification certificate is verified in accordance with 5.1.5.
2
Notwithstanding -1(1) above, in cases where the welder welds a test assembly covered on the qualification test (renewal) prior
to six months before the expiry date of the existing certificate, passes the qualification test (renewal), and fulfills the requirement 1(1)(c) above, the new qualification certificate is to be valid from the date on which the welder passed the qualification test to a date
not exceeding three years from the said date.
3
In the case of continuation of a qualification, the applicant to which the welder taking the qualification tests belongs to is to
submit a completed welder qualification tests application (Form WE(E)) along with a photograph of the welder and the existing
qualification certificate (copy) to the Society (relevant branch office or service site).
4
A qualification test (renewal) is, in principle, to be carried out under test conditions in accordance with the essential variables
of the qualification test (initial) by each the qualification applying for continuation.
5
In cases where the Society approves the application of alternative national or international welder qualification standards in
accordance with 5.1.1-7, the renewal of qualification is to be in accordance with this paragraph.
5.1.7
1
Revocation of Qualification Certificates
The Society will cancel a qualification certificates and notify the applicant of such in the following cases:
(1) The verification of the validity of qualification certificates specified in 5.1.5-1 is incomplete.
(2) An application for the cancelation of a qualification certificate according to the requirement specified in 5.1.5-2 is received.
(3) There is specific reason to question a welder’s ability.
2
In cases where a welder whose qualification certificate has been cancelled applies to take the qualification tests once again,
they are to apply to take the qualification tests (initial).
5.2
Qualifications
5.2.1
1
Kind of Qualification*
The kind of qualification is to be classified according to the welding process as follows:
(1) The qualification for manual, semi-automatic and TIG, gas welding process is to consist of the essential variables specified in
following (a) through (i):
(a) The variables of the welding process are to be classified as given in Table M5.1 according to the welding process applied
for the test assembly.
(b) The variables of the product are to be classified as given in Table M5.3 according to the product used for test assembly.
(c) The variables of the type of welded joint are to be classified as given in Table M5.4 according to the type of welded joint
applied in test assembly. In addition, T-joints with partial or full penetration welds are to be included in the variables for
butt welding.
(d) The variables of the base metal are to be classified as given in Table M5.5 according to the kind of base metal used for the
test assembly.
(e) The kind of welding consumable is to comply with requirements specified in 5.3.2 according to the kind of base metal
used for the test assembly.
(f)
The range of qualification for base metal thickness is to be classified as given in Table M5.6 according to the base metal
thickness of the test assembly.
52
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
(g) The range of qualification for outside diameter is to be classified as given in Table M5.7 according to the outside diameter
of the test assembly.
(h) The variables of the welding positions are to be classified as given in Table M5.8 and Table M5.9 according to the welding
positions applied for the test assembly. The symbols used in the table are to be as indicated in Table M5.10 and Table
M5.11
(i)
The variables of the detail of welded joint are to be classified as given in Table M5.12 according to details of the welded
joints applied in the test assembly.
(2) The qualification for automatic welding process is to consist of the essential variables specified in the following (a) through (c)
notwithstanding the variables for product, type of joint, base metal thickness, outside diameter, welding position and detail of
welded joint:
(a) The variables of the welding process are to be classified as given in Table M5.2 according to the welding process applied
for the test assembly. However, variables other than those specified in the table may be used in cases where deemed
necessary by the Society.
(b) The variables of the base metal are to be classified as given in Table M5.5 according to the kind of base metal used for the
test assembly.
(c) The kind of welding consumable is to comply with requirements specified in 5.3.2 according to the kind of base metal
used for the test assembly.
(3) The qualification for tack welding process is to consist of the essential variables specified in following (a) through (f)
notwithstanding the variables for base metal thickness, outside diameter and detail of welded joint:
(a) The variables of the welding process are to be classified as given in Table M5.1 according to the welding process applied
for the test assembly.
(b) The variables of the product are to be classified as given in Table M5.3 according to the product used for test assembly.
(c) The variables of the type of welded joint are to be classified as given in Table M5.4 according to the type of welded joint
applied in the test assembly. In addition, T-joints with partial or full penetration welds are to be included in the variables
for butt welding.
(d) The variables of the base metal are to be classified as given in Table M5.5 according to the base metal used in the test
assembly.
(e) The kind of welding consumable is to comply with the requirement specified in 5.3.2 according to the kind of base metal
used in the test assembly.
(f)
The variables of the welding positions are to be classified as given in Table M5.8 and Table M5.9 according to the
welding positions applied for the test assembly. The symbols in the table are to be as indicated in Table M5.10 and Table
M5.11
2
The necessary qualification for actual welding work using different processes (combination welding) is to be as deemed
appropriate by the Society.
53
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Table M5.1
Essential Variables of Welding Process
Welding process applied for
Symbol
test assembly
Welding process applicable to
actual welding work
Manual welding
MW
MW
Semi-automatic welding
SW
SW
TIG welding
TW
TW
Gas welding
GW
GW
Table M5.2
Essential Variables of Automatic Welding Process
Welding process applicable to
Welding process applied for test assembly
Symbol
Submerged arc welding
SAW
SAW
Automatic gas-shielded metal arc welding
AGMAW
AGMAW
Automatic TIG welding
AGTAW
AGTAW
Automatic self-shielded arc welding
ASSAW
ASSAW
Electrogas welding
EGW
EGW
Electroslag welding
ESW
ESW
Gravity welding
GRW
GRW
(1)
ETC(1)
Other automatic welding
ETC
actual welding work
Note:
(1) In cases where classified as ETC, qualification tests are to be carried out for each welding process for which
qualification is desired.
Table M5.3
Product used for
test assembly
Essential Variables of Product
Product applicable to actual
Symbol
welding work
Plate
P
P
Tube
T
T
Table M5.4
Essential Variables of Type of Welded Joint
Type of welded joint
applied for test
Type of welded joint applicable to
Symbol
actual welding work
assembly
Butt welding
B
B, F
Fillet welding
F
F
54
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Table M5.5
Essential Variables of Base Metal
Classification of base metal
Base metal
used for test
assembly
Carbon steel
Symbol
CS
Stainless steel
SU
Aluminium
alloy
AL
Nickel steel
NI
Other metal
ET
Plate
Tube
・Rolled steels for hulls
・Rolled steel plates for boilers
・Rolled steel plates for pressure
vessels
・Rolled steels for low temperature
service (except
KL2N30,KL3N32,KL5N43,KL9
N53 and KL9N60)
・Rolled steel bars for machine
structures
・High strength rolled steels for
offshore structures
・Steel castings
・Steel castings for low temperature
service (except KLC2 and KLC3)
・Steel forgings
・Steel forgings for low temperature
service (except KLF3 and KLF9)
・Rolled stainless steels
・Stainless steel castings
・Stainless steel forgings
・Stainless steel propeller castings
・Aluminium alloy plates and
extruded shapes
・Rolled steels for low temperature
service (KL2N30, KL3N32,
KL5N43, KL9N53 and KL9N60)
・Steel castings for low temperature
service (KLC2 and KLC3)
・Steel forgings for low temperature
service (KLF3 and KLF9)
・Plates and tubes not listed above
・Steel tubes for boilers and heat
exchangers
・Steel pipes for pressure piping
・Headers
・Steel pipes for low temperature
service (except KLP2, KLP3 and
KLP9)
Table M5.6
CS
・Stainless steel pipes
SU
・Aluminium alloy pipes and tubes
NI
ET
Range of Qualification for Base Metal Thickness
Base metal thickness t
Range of base metal thickness T
applicable to actual welding work (mm)
t<3
t ≦ T ≦ 2t
3 ≦ t < 12
3 ≦ T ≦ 2t
12 ≦ t
3≦ T
Range of Qualification for Outside Diameter (Tubes only)
Outside diameter D (1)
Range of outside diameter d
of test assembly (mm）
applicable toin actual welding work (mm)
D ≦ 25
D ≦ d ≦ 2D
25 < D
0.5D(2) ≦ d
Notes:
(1) For non-circular sections, D is the dimension of the smaller side.
(2) Lower limit of “0.5 D” is not to be less than 25 mm.
55
AL
・Steel pipes for low temperature
service（KLP2，KLP3 and KLP9）
of test assembly (mm)
Table M5.7
Base
metal
applicable
to actual
welding
work
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Table M5.8
Fillet welding
Plate
Butt welding
Welding position
applied for test
assembly
PA
PC
PE
PF
PG
PA
PB
PC
PD
PE
PF
PG
Essential Variables of Welding Positions for Plates
Welding position applicable to actual welding work
Butt welding
PA
PA，PC
PA，PC，PE
PA，
PF
PG
-
Table M5.9
Fillet welding
Tube
Butt
welding
Welding position
applied for test
assembly
PA
PC
PH
PJ
PA
PB
PD
PH
PJ
Fillet welding
PA，PB
PA，PB，PC
PA，PB，PC，PD，PE
PA，PB，
PF
PG
PA
PA，PB
PA，PB，PC
PA，PB，PC，PD，PE
PA，PB，PC，PD，PE
PA，PB，
PF
PG
Variables of Welding Positions for Tubes
Welding position applicable to actual welding work
Butt welding
PA
PA，PC
PA，
PH
PA，
PJ
-
Fillet welding
PA，PB
PA，PB
PA，PB，PD ，PH
PA，PB，PD ，
PJ
PA
PA，PB
PA，PB，PD
PA，PB，PD，PH
PA，PB，PD，
PJ
56
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Welding
position
Table M5.10 Symbols for Welding Positions for Plates
Plate
Symbol
Butt welding
Fillet welding
Flat
PA
Horizontal
vertical
PB
Horizontal
PC
Horizontal
overhead
PD
Overhead
PE
Vertical up
PF
Vertical down
PG
―
―
Note:
(1) The symbol “a” in this table indicates the following:
PA, PB, PC, PD, PE: welding position
PF, PG: weld progression or direction
57
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Welding
position
Flat
Table M5.11 Symbols for Welding Positions for Tubes
Tube
Symbol
Butt welding
Fillet welding
PA
(tube rotating)
Horizontal
vertical
PB
(tube rotating)
―
(tube rotating or
(tube rotating)
fixed)
Horizontal
PC
―
(tube rotating or fixed)
Horizontal
overhead
PD
―
(tube rotating or fixed)
Tube position
for welding
upwards
Tube position
for welding
downwards
PH
(tube fixed)
(tube fixed)
(tube fixed)
(tube fixed)
PJ
Note:
(1) The symbol “a” in this table indicates the following:
PA, PB, PC, PD, PE: welding position
PF, PG: weld progression or direction
58
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Fillet welding
Butt welding
Table M5.12 Variables of Detail of Welded Joint
Detail of welded joint applied for test
assembles
With backing
Single side
Without backing
Gas backing
With gouging
Both side
Without gouging
Symbol
ss mb
ss nb
ss gb
bs mb
bs nb
Detail of welded joint applicable to actual
welding work
ss mb,
bs mb,
sl, ml
ss mb, ss nb, ss gb, bs mb, bs nb, sl, ml
ss mb,
ss gb, bs mb,
sl, ml
ss mb,
bs mb,
sl, ml
ss mb,
bs mb, bs nb, sl, ml
Single layer
sl
sl
Multi-layer
ml
sl, ml
Notes:
(1) Backing materials other than backing strips may be used.
(2) The symbol “ss gb” is to be used for qualifications including welding positions for tubes.
5.2.2
1
Range of Qualification*
The range of qualification included in the qualification is to be the applicable range for the actual welding work specified in
Table M5.1 through Table M5.9, Table M5.12 and is to be the one in accordance with the essential variables included in the
qualifications which a welder acquires.
2
The range of qualification for a welding position, in cases where multiple welding positions are used in welding the test assembly,
is to be all applicable welding positions.
3
Welders who have passed qualification tests for manual welding processes may be similarly regard as the welder responsible
for setting up and/or adjusting of the gravity welding process within the range of qualification they qualified.
4
Welders who have passed qualification tests for semi-automatic welding, TIG welding or gas welding may be similarly regard
as the welder responsible for setting up and/or adjusting of the welding process using an auto-carriage in the range of qualification for
the qualification they qualified.
5
Welders who have passed qualification tests for manual welding, semi-automatic welding, TIG welding or gas welding, may be
engaged in the actual welding work using the tack welding process within the range of qualification for the welding process, kind of
joint, base metal and welding position they qualified.
6
Welders who have passed qualification tests for manual welding, semi-automatic welding, TIG welding or gas welding may
be engaged in welding work for both plates and tubes to the extent deemed appropriate by to the Society.
7
Welders who have passed qualification tests for tack welding may be engaged in welding work for tubes within the range of
qualification they qualified.
5.3
5.3.1
1
Qualification Tests
Kinds and Procedures of Qualification Tests*
Test assemblies are to be welded according to welding procedure specifications, etc. which include essential variables
corresponding to the qualification for which the welder will be tested. In cases where the acceptance criteria specified in requirement
in 5.3.9 is fulfilled as a result of the qualification test, the qualification is to be considered acquired.
2
Qualification tests and the welding of test assemblies are to be carried out in the presence of a surveyor.
3
Qualification tests for automatic welding processes are to be as deemed appropriate by the Society.
4
Test items for each qualification test are to be as indicated in Table M5.13.
5
The welding of test assemblies is to comply with the requirements specified in Table M5.1 through Table M5.9, corresponding
to the essential variables for the qualification for which the welder will be tested.
59
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Table M5.13 Test Items for Qualification Tests
Test assembly
Test item
Visual inspection
Butt welding
Bend test (1) (2) (3) (4)
Visual inspection
Fillet welding
Fracture test (5)
Visual inspection
Tack welding
Fracture test
Notes:
(1) Radiographic tests or fracture tests may be carried out instead of bend tests except in the case of gas-shielded
welding processes using solid wires or metal core wires.
(2) For nickel steel in plates, longitudinal bend test specimens may be used.
(3) For nickel steel in tubes, radiographic tests or fracture tests may be carried out instead of bend tests not
withstanding (1) above.
(4) For the test assemblies for tubes whose outside diameter D is not more than 25 mm, notch tensile tests may
be carried out.
(5) Macro-structure inspections may be carried out instead of fracture tests.
5.3.2
1
Testing Materials and Welding Consumables*
Base metals and welding consumables for test assemblies are to conform to one of the following requirements or to be of
equivalent quality approved by the Society:
(1) Test assemblies for plates
Plates listed in Table M5.5 and comply with the requirements specified in Part K
(2) Test assemblies for tubes
Tubes listed in Table M5.5 and comply with the requirements specified in Part K
Tube fabricated with the plates specified in (1)
(3) Welding consumables
Welding consumables approved by the Society
2
Gas welding rods are to be those for mild steel complying with a recognized standard or those considered appropriate by the
Society.
5.3.3
Test Assemblies
1
The dimensions of butt welding test assemblies for plates are to be as specified in Fig. M5.1 through M5.3.
2
The dimensions of fillet welding test assemblies for plates are to be as specified in Fig. M5.4.
3
The dimensions of butt welding test assemblies for tubes are to be as specified in Fig. M5.5 and Fig. M5.6.
4
The dimensions of test assemblies for tubes are to be as specified in Fig. M5.7.
5
The dimensions of tack welding test assemblies for butt joint of plates are to be as specified in Fig. M5.8.
6
The dimensions of tack welding test assemblies for fillet joint of plates are to be as specified in Fig. M5.9.
7
The dimensions of grooves for test assemblies are to comply with the welding procedure specifications, etc. referred to during
the welding of test assemblies, unless otherwise specified.
8
One welding position is to be used per test assembly.
9
The welding of tube test assemblies applied with tube positions for welding upwards or that for welding downwards during
qualification tests is to be as specified in Fig. M5.10. For qualification tests for tubes, arcs AB and AC indicated in Fig M5.11 may be
welded in welding position PH or PJ respectively, and arc BC may be welded in welding position PC notwithstanding the requirement
in -8 above.
10
Test assemblies for qualification tests for gas welding are to be of without backing.
11
One root run and one capping run included in the surface welding of the test assembly is to have a least one stop and restart
respectively, except in cases where automatic welding procedures are applied.
12
Welders are allowed to remove minor imperfections by grinding only in the stop location and only before the restart of welding.
60
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
13
Test assemblies are not to change their up-and-down or right-to-left positions throughout the welding operation.
14
In principle, test assemblies for plates are to be so restrained or prestrained that any warping due to the welding does not exceed
an angular distortion of 5 degrees.
15
Test assemblies are not to be subjected to peening or heat treatment throughout the period before, during and after the welding.
5.3.4
1
Test Specimens
The test specimens are to be finished to the sizes and dimensions shown in Table M3.3.
(1) Face bend and root bend test specimens from plate test assemblies are to be of the type B-9, and side bend test specimens from
plate test assemblies are to be of the type B-11.
(2) Longitudinal bend test specimens are to be of type B-10.
(3) Face bend and root bend test specimens from tube test assemblies are to be of the type B-12, and side bend tests specimens
from pipe test assemblies are to be of the type B-13.
2
In cases where a test specimen does not comply with dimensional specifications due to poor machining, a replaced test
assembly is to be welded and tested.
5.3.5
1
Test Procedures
Visual inspections
Welds are to be visually examined prior to the cutting of test specimens for bend tests, radiographic tests, fracture tests and macrostructure inspections.
2
Bend tests
(1) The number of bend test specimens is to comply with the requirement specified in Table M5.14.
(2) Selection of test specimens is to comply with the requirements specified in Fig. M5.1, Fig. M5.2, and Fig. M5.6. At least one
bend test specimen is to include one stop and restart in the bending parts for root runs or for cap runs.
(3) Selection of longitudinal bend test specimens is to comply with the requirements specified in M5.2.
(4) The test is to be a bend test either using the guided bend test jig specified in Fig M3.1, Fig M3.2 or the equivalent or the roller
bend test jig specified in Fig M3.3. The test specimens are to be bent through 180 degrees under the test conditions specified in
Table M5.15. In the case of aluminium alloys, the method of bend testing using a roller specified in Fig M3.4 may be carried
out.
(5) With respect to qualification tests for gas welding, the radii of the plunger of the jig and support roller are to be 10 mm, and the
roller span is to be 53 mm for roller bend tests.
(6) The test specimen, including stop and restart, is to be bended that the stop and restart are the tensile side.
3
Fracture tests
(1) For butt welding
(a) In the case of plate test assemblies, test specimens are to be the whole of test assembly, excluding the edges, in length and
are to be tested in accordance with ISO 9017:2017.
(b) In the case of tube test assemblies, test specimens are to be the whole of test assembly specified in Table M5.5 and are to
be selected in accordance with the requirements specified in Fig. M5.6. The test method is to be in accordance with ISO
9017:2017.
(c) The widths of fracture test specimens for plates and tubes are to comply with Table M5.16.
(2) For fillet welding
(a) In the case of plate test assemblies, test specimens are to comply with the requirements specified in Fig. M5.4 and be tested
in accordance with ISO 9017:2017.
(b) In the case of tube test assemblies, test specimens are to be the full test specimen specified in Fig M 5.5 and are to be
divided into at least four specimens. The test method is to be in accordance with ISO 9017:2017.
(c) The widths of fracture test specimens for plates and tubes are to comply with Table M5.16.
4
Notch tensile tests
Test specimens are to comply with the requirements in Fig. M5.16.
5
Macro-structure inspections
(1) Two test specimens are to be prepared from different positions, and at least one macro-examination specimen is to be cut at the
one stop and restart for either root runs or cap runs.
61
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
(2) Test specimens are to be etched on one side to clearly reveal the weld metal, fusion line, root penetration and the heat affected
zone.
(3) Macro-sections are to include at least 10 mm of unaffected base metal.
6
Radiographic tests
Test specimens are to be whole of test assemblies. In the case of plate test assemblies, test specimens are to exclude the edges of test
assemblies. The test is to be carried out in accordance with internal or international standers deemed appropriate by the Society.
Table M5.14 Number of Bend Test Specimens
Number of bend test specimens
Kind of bend test
(1)
Qualification test
Qualification test
(Initial)
(Renewal)(2)
Face bend test
2
1
Root bend test
2
1
Longitudinal bend test
4
2
Notes:
(1) In cases where the base metal thickness of the test assembly is not less than 12 mm, a side bend
specimen with a thickness of 10 mm may be used.
(2) Selection of test specimens for tube test assemblies applied tube positions for welding upwards or
that for welding downwards is to comply with the requirements given in Fig M5.6.
(3) In accordance with requirements in 5.3.3-9, the number of bend test specimens for qualification tests
(renewal) is to be the same as the number for qualification tests (initial) for test assembly welding
in two welding position at a time.
62
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Table M5.15 Conditions for Bend Tests
Kind of base metal used for test
assembly
Radius of plunger
(t: thickness of test specimen)
5
𝑡
2
KE47
KA420，KD420，
KE420，KF420，
KA460，KD460，
KE460，KF460，
KA500，KD500，
KE500，KF500
KA550，KD550，
KE550，KF550，
KA620，KD620，
KE620，KF620，
KA690，KD690，
KE690，KF690
Other than the
above(1)
Carbon steel
5
𝑡
2
3.0t
2.0t
(1)
Stainless steel
2.0t
Aluminium alloy
Nickel steel
(
100 × 𝑡
− 𝑡) × 0.5
𝐴
9% Ni steel
10
𝑡
3
Except above(1)
2.0t
Note:
(1) The radius of the plunger is to be calculated from the following formula, where the elongation A of
the base metal is less than 20%
100 × 𝑡
(
− 𝑡) × 0.5
𝐴
A: Minimum elongation (%) specified in Part K.
Table M5.16 Widths of Fracture Test Specimens (1)
Width of fracture test specimen (mm)
Plate
150 min.
Outside diameter D of test
assembly (mm)
Tube
Width of fracture test specimen (mm)
25 < D <50
10 min.
50 ≤ D < 100
20 min.
100 ≤ D
35 min.
Note:
(1)
The width of a fracture test specimen indicates the length in the direction parallel to
the welding direction.
63
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Fig. M5.1
Dimensions of Plate Test Assemblies for Butt Welding
64
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Fig. M5.2
Dimensions of Plate Test Assemblies for Butt Welding
(in cases where side bend specimens are taken)
65
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Fig. M5.3
Dimensions of Plate Test Assemblies for Butt Welding
(in cases where longitudinal bend specimens are taken for nickel steel)
66
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Fig. M5.6
Fig. M5.4
Dimensions of Plate Test Assemblies for Filet Welding
Fig. M5.5
Dimensions of Tube Test Assemblies for Butt Welding
Selection of Test Specimen for Tube Test Assemblies Applied with Tube Positions for Welding Upwards or That for
Welding downwards in Qualification Tests (Renewal)
67
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Fig. M5.7
Dimensions of Tube Test Assemblies for Fillet Welding
68
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Fig. M5.8
Dimensions of Plate Test Assemblies for Butt Welding Using Tack Welding
69
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Fig. M5.9
Fig. M5.10
Dimensions of Plate Test Assemblies for Fillet Welding Using Tack Welding
Welding for Tube Test Assemblies Applied with Tube Positions for Welding Upwards or That for Welding Downwards
Fig. M5.11
Welding for Tube Test Assemblies Applied with Multiple Welding Positions
70
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
Fig. M5.12
Notch Tensile Tests for Tube Test Assemblies
d: Diameter of the hole in weld (mm)
T: Base metal thickness (mm)
For T ≥ 1.8 mm, d＝4.5
For T < 1.8 mm, d＝3.5
Note:
(1)
7
Holes are not allowed in the stop and restart
Ultrasonic testing
The test is to be carried out on the entire weld of the test assemblies. In the case of plate test assemblies, however, the edges of test
assemblies is excluded. Tests are to be carried out in accordance with ISO 17460:2018. However, this requirement only applied where
the renewal method in 5.1.6-1(2) is selected.
5.3.6
1
Acceptance Criteria
Visual inspections
Imperfections detected are to be assessed in accordance with quality level B of ISO 5817:2014, except in cases where level C
applies such as for excess weld metal, excess penetration, excessive convexity and excessive throat thickness.
2
Bend tests
(1) The specimens are to show neither cracks nor other serious defects greater than 3 mm in length in any direction on the outside
surface due to the bending.
(2) Continuous blow holes and cracks found on the surface of welds are to be regarded as the length of the crack including the blow
hole.
(3) The total length of the visible cracks each having a length less than 3 mm is not to exceed 10 mm.
(4) The total combined number of visible blow holes and visible small cracks are not to exceed 10.
(5) Any cracks on the side surface of test specimens are to be outside the scope of the qualification judgment. In cases where a
crack extends continuously from the face to side surfaces, the length of the crack is not to include that of the crack on the side
surface.
(6) In cases where a crack occurs in the base metal, it is to be outside the scope of the qualification judgment, and the test assembly
is to be welded again.
3
Fracture tests, notch tensile tests and radiographic tests
Imperfections which detected are to be assessed in accordance with quality level B of ISO 5817:2014.
4
Macro-structure inspections
Test specimens are to show no cracks, poor penetration, lack of fusion and other serious defects.
5
Ultrasonic testing
Imperfections which detected are to be assessed in accordance with quality level B of ISO 11666:2018. However, this requirement
only applies in cases where the renewal method in 5.1.6-1(2) is selected.
5.3.7
1
Retests
Welders who fail to meet the requirements for certain parts of bend tests, fracture tests or macro-structure inspections, may take
retests for the failed part using duplicate test specimens taken from test assemblies welded within one month from the date of failure.
2
Welders who fail to meet the requirements for all parts of visual inspections, bend tests, fracture tests, macro-structure
inspections, radiographic tests, ultrasonic testing (only in cases where the renewal method in 5.1.6-1(2) is applied) or notch tensile tests
71
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 5)
or in the retest prescribed in -1 above are not allowed to retest within one month from the date of failure.
3
In cases where a welder takes tests according to the requirement specified in -2 above, the welder is to submit (relevant branch
office or service site) a new welder qualification test application form (Form WE(E)) to the Society. In such cases, a photograph of
the welder does not need to be submitted.
72
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Chapter 6
6.1
WELDING CONSUMABLES
General
6.1.1
Application
The requirements in this Chapter apply to welding consumables corresponding to various materials used for hull construction,
machinery, equipment, etc.
6.1.2
Grades
The grades of welding consumables are to be as specified in 6.2 through 6.9 according to test codes on the grade, strength and
toughness of base materials.
6.1.3
Approval*
1
Welding consumables are to have approval at each manufacturing plant and for each brand.
2
For approval to be granted, approval tests corresponding to the different grades of welding consumables are to be carried out
as specified in 6.2 through 6.9, and the requirements in these tests are to be met satisfactorily.
3
The approval tests for welding consumables which are not covered by the codes specified in this Chapter are to be carried out
in accordance with test codes approved by the Society.
4
Where welding consumables which have been approved are intended to manufacture at manufacturing plants other than those
of the manufacturers who manufacture the said welding materials the content of approval tests may be partially reduced subject to
approval by the Society.
5
Where welding consumables which have been approved are intended to manufacture according to technical licensing
agreements with those parties who manufacture the said welding consumables the content of approval tests may be partially reduced
subject to approval by the Society.
6
Tests specified in 6.2 through 6.6 and 6.9 may be carried out on consumables which have been approved and the grades of
strength and toughness may be changed accordingly. However, as a rule, the time for changes is to be limited to the time for annual
inspection.
7
Where deemed necessary by the Society, tests other than those specified in this Chapter may be required.
8
In case of welding consumables for both butt welding and fillet welding, the welding positions approved through butt welding
tests are to include the fillet welding position corresponding to butt welding.
6.1.4
1
Manufacturing Process, etc.
Welding consumables are to be manufactured at manufacturing plants which approved by the Society with respect to
manufacturing equipment, manufacturing process and quality control.
2
Welding consumables are to be manufactured with uniform quality under the responsibility of the manufacturer.
6.1.5
1
Annual Inspections
Welding consumables which have been approved according to the preceding 6.1.3 are to undergo annual inspection specified
in 6.2 through 6.9 and are to satisfactorily pass the inspection. Furthermore, annual inspections of welding consumables which have
been approved in accordance with codes different from those specified in this Chapter are to be undertaken in accordance with test
codes approved by the Society.
2
Annual inspection is as a rule to be carried out within a period not exceeding twelve months.
6.1.6
1
Tests and Inspections
Tests and inspections for the approval tests and annual inspection are to be carried out in the presence of the surveyor from the
Society.
2
Welding conditions for the test materials (current, voltage, welding speed, etc.) are to be determined by the manufacturer.
Furthermore, where both alternating current and direct current are available for the welding current, alternating current is to be used.
73
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
6.1.7
1
Retests
Where the tensile tests and bend tests fail to meet the requirements, twice as many test specimens as the number of failed test
specimens are to be selected from the first test material or from a test material welded under the same welding conditions, and if all of
test specimens pass the tests, then the tests are considered to be successful.
2
Where results of the impact test fail to meet the requirements and in cases other than those given in the follow ing (1) and (2),
retests may be carried out on a set of test specimens selected from the same test material as the one from which the failed test specimens
were taken. In this case, the test specimens are considered to have passed the tests if the mean value of absorbed energy of a total of
six test specimens, including the values of the failed specimens, is greater than the value of the specified minimum mean abs orbed
energy and, furthermore, if the number of test specimens among the said six test specimens which are of lower energy than the specified
value of minimum mean absorbed energy, and the number of test specimens which are of 70% lower energy than the specified value
of minimum mean absorbed energy is less than two and one respectively.
(1) Where all test specimens fail to reach the specified value of minimum mean absorbed energy.
(2) Where two of the test specimens fail to reach 70% of the specified value of minimum mean absorbed energy.
3
Where the test specimens failed to meet the requirements in the preceding -1 and -2, new test specimens are to be selected
under different welding conditions, and these new test specimens are to pass all specified items of the tests.
6.1.8
Packing and Marking
1
The approved welding consumables are to be packed thoroughly to maintain quality during transportation and storage.
2
All boxes or packages of approved welding consumables are to be clearly marked with descriptions which are deemed necessary
by the Society.
6.2
6.2.1
Electrodes for Manual Arc Welding for Mild and High Tensile Steels and Steels for Low Temperature Service
Application*
Electrodes for manual arc welding for mild and high tensile steels and steels for low temperature service, which given in
following (1) and (2) (hereinafter referred to as “electrode” in 6.2) are to be subjected to the approval test and annual inspections in
accordance with the requirements in 6.2.
(1) Electrodes for manual welding
(a) For butt welds (including one side welding)
(b) For fillet welds
(c) For both butt welds and fillet welds
(2) Electrodes used in gravity welding or similar set-ups
(a) For fillet welds
(b) For both butt welds and fillet welds
6.2.2
Grades and Marks of Electrode
1
Electrodes are classified as given in Table M6.1.
2
Where one back-bead welding is performed and electrodes pass the test, the suffix U is to be added to the end of their grade
marks.
3
Low hydrogen electrodes which have passed the hydrogen test specified in 6.2.11 the suffixes given in Table M6.9 are to be
added the grade marks (after the U in the case of the preceding -2) of the said electrodes (Example : KMW53UH10).
74
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.1
For mild steel
KMW1
KMW2
KMW3
6.2.3
KMW52
KMW53
KMW54
Grades and Marks
For high tensile steel
KMW52Y40
KMW63Y47
KMW53Y40
KMW54Y40
KMW55Y40
For steel for low temperature service
KMWL1
KMWL91
KMWL2
KMWL92
KMWL3
Approval Test
For the approval of electrodes, the tests specified in 6.2.4-1 to 6.2.4-4 are to be conducted for each brand of electrodes.
6.2.4
1
General Provisions for Tests*
Kind of test, number, thickness and dimensions of test assemblies, diameters of electrodes used for welding and welding
positions, together with kinds and number of test specimens taken from each test assembly for electrodes given in 6.2.1(1)(a) and (c)
are to be as given in Table M6.2. However, where deemed necessary by the Society, hot cracking tests deemed appropriate by the
Society are to be conducted besides tests specified in this Table.
2
Kind of test, number, thickness and dimensions of test assemblies, diameter of electrodes used in the welding and welding
positions, together with kinds and number of test specimens to be taken from each test assembly for electrodes given in 6.2.1(1)(b), are
to be as given in Table M6.3.
3
The test for electrodes given in 6.2.1(2) is to be in accordance with the requirements in the following (1) and (2):
(1) For electrodes given in 6.2.1(2)(a), tests given in Table M6.3 specified in the preceding -2 are to be conducted.
(2) For electrodes given in 6.2.1(2)(b), tests of the preceding (1) and butt weld test given in Table M6.2 specified in the preceding
-1 are to be conducted.
4
Where both electrodes given in 6.2.1(1) and (2) are requested approval tests specified for each electrode are to be conducted.
However, deposited metal tests may be omitted for electrodes given in 6.2.1(2).
5
Steel materials to be used in preparation of test assemblies are to be as given in Table M6.4.
Kind of test
Welding
position
Deposited
metal test
Flat
Flat
Butt weld
test
Horizontal
(4)
Vertical
upward
Vertical
downward
Overhead
Table M6.2 Kinds of Test for Electrode
Test assembly
Diameter of electrode
No. of test Dimensions Thickness (9)
(mm)
assemblies of test
(mm)
assembly
4
1(1)
Fig. M6.1
20
max. diameter
1(1)
First run : 4,
1
Subsequent runs : 5 or over,
Last two runs : max. dia.
First run : 4,
1(2)
Second run : 5 or 6,
Subsequent runs :max. dia.
First run : 4 or 5,
1
Fig. M6.2
15～20
Subsequent runs : 5
First run : 3.2,
1
Subsequent runs : 4 or 5
(3)
1
Fillet weld
test (5)
Horizontal
vertical
First run : 3.2,
Subsequent runs : 4 or 5
The First side : max. dia. ,
The Second side : min. dia.
Hydrogen
test(6)
Flat
4
Kind and no. of test
specimens taken from test
assembly
Tensile test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
Tensile test specimen : 1
Face bend specimen : 1
Root bend specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
1
1
Fig. M6.3
20
4
(8)
Macro test specimen(7):
3Hardness test specimen(7):
3
Fracture test specimen : 2
12
Hydrogen test specimen : 1
Notes:
(1) Where the diameters of the manufactured electrodes are of one type, there is to be one test assembly.
(2) Where the tests are conducted solely in the flat position, this test assembly has been added.
(3) Electrodes with diameters specified by the manufacturers are to be used.
75
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
(4) For electrodes which have passed butt weld tests in the flat and vertical upward positions, tests in the horizontal position
may be omitted subject to approval by the Society.
(5) This test is added solely for electrodes used in both butt welds and fillet welds to which the preceding note (4) is
applied.
(6) To conduct solely for low hydrogen electrodes.
(7) Test specimens used in macro test and hardness tests are considered to be the same.
(8) Dimensions of test assembly are to be as specified in 6.2.5-3.
(9) Thicknesses of KE47 steel used as test specimens may be reduced to the thicknesses in the table by machining before
welding.
Kind of test
Welding
position
Deposited
metal test
Flat
Flat
Horizontal
vertical
Vertical
upward
Vertical
downward
Overhead
Flat
Fillet weld
test
Hydrogen
test(2)
Table M6.3 Kinds of Test for Electrode
Test assembly
Diameter of electrode
No. of test
Dimensions Thickness (4)
(mm)
assemblies
of test
(mm)
assembly
4
1
Fig. M6.1
20
max. diameter
1
1
1
Kind and no. of test
specimens taken from test
assembly
Tensile test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
The first side : max. dia.
1
Hardness test specimen(1) : 3
The Second side : min. dia.
1
4
1
4
Fig. M6.3
20
Macro test specimen(1): 3
Fracture test specimen : 2
(3)
12
Hydrogen test specimen : 1
Notes:
(1) Test specimens used in macro tests and hardness tests are considered to be the same.
(2) To conduct solely for low hydrogen electrodes.
(3) Dimensions of test assembly are to be as specified in 6.2.5-3.
(4) Thicknesses of KE47 steel used as test specimens may be reduced to the thicknesses in the table by machining before
welding.
Table M6.4
Grades of Steel Used for Test Assembly
Grade of steel used for test assembly(1) (2)
Grade of electrode
KMW1
KA
KMW2
KA, KB or KD
KMW3
KMW52
KA, KB, KD or KE
KA32, KA36, KD32 or KD36
KMW53
KMW54
KA32, KA36, KD32, KD36, KE32 or KE36
KA32, KA36, KD32, KD36, KE32, KE36, KF32 or KF36
KMW52Y40
KA40 or KD40
KMW53Y40
KA40, KD40 or KE40
KMW54Y40, KMW55Y40
KMW63Y47
KA40, KD40, KE40 or KF40
KE47
KMWL1
KMWL2
KE or KL24A
KE, KL24A, KL24B, KL27 or KL33
KMWL3
KL27, KL33 or KL37
KMWL91
KL9N53 or KL9N60
KMWL92
KL9N53 or KL9N60
Notes:
(1) Notwithstanding the requirements in this Table, mild or high tensile steels may be used for deposited metal test assembly.
In this case, appropriate buttering is to be carried out for KMWL91 and KMWL92.
76
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
(2) The tensile strength of high tensile steels KA32, KD32, KE32 and KF32 used in the butt weld test assemblies are to be
greater than 490 N/mm 2.
6.2.5
1
Welding Procedure of Test Assemblies*
Deposited Metal Test Assemblies (Fig. M6.1)
(1) Test assemblies are to be welded by single or multi-run layer welding according to the normal practice, and the direction of
each run is to alternate from each end of the plate, each run of weld metal being not less than 2 mm but not more than 4 mm
thickness.
(2) After each run, the assembly is to be left in still air until it has cooled to less than 250℃ but not below 100℃, the temperature
being taken at the centre of weld on the surface of seam.
2
Butt Weld Test Assemblies (Fig. M6.2)
(1) Test assemblies are to be welded in each welding position (flat, horizontal, vertical upward, vertical downward, overhead)
which is recommended by the manufacturer.
(2) After each run, the assembly is to be left in still air until it has cooled to less than 250℃ but not below 100℃ the temperature
being taken at the centre of weld on the surface of seam.
(3) In all cases except one side welding, the back sealing runs are to be made with 4 mm electrode in the welding position appropriate
to each test sample, after cutting out the root run to clean metal. For electrodes suitable for downhand welding only, the test
assemblies may be turned over to carry out the back sealing run.
(4) For one side weld test assemblies, all of the welding is done from one side such that beads with no defects are formed on the
back. Further the root gaps are to be the maximum within the range specified by the manufacturer.
3
Hydrogen Assemblies
Test assemblies and welding procedures of hydrogen test are left to the discretion of the Society.
4
Fillet Weld Test Assemblies (Fig. M6.3)
(1) Test assembly is to be welded in each welding position (flat, horizontal, vertical upward, vertical downward, or overhead) which
is recommended by the manufacturer.
(2) The first fillet is to be welded using the maximum size of electrode manufactured and the opposite side is to be welded using
the minimum size electrode manufactured.
(3) In case of fillet welds using gravity or similar contact welding method, the fillet welding is to be carried out with electrodes of
maximum length.
(4) The fillet size will in general be determined by the electrode size and the welding current employed during testing.
5
After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be subjected to any heat treatment.
6
The welded assemblies may be subjected to radiographic examination prior to taking test specimens from the assemblies.
77
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Fig. M6.1
Fig. M6.2
Deposited Metal Test Assembly (Unit: mm)
Butt Weld Test Assembly (Unit: mm )
78
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Fig. M6.3
6.2.6
1
Fillet Weld Test Assembly (Unit: mm )
Deposited Metal Tensile Test
The tensile test specimens are to be U1A specimen shown in Table M3.1, and the specimens are to be taken from each test
assembly, care being taken that the longitudinal axis coincides with the centre of weld and the mid-thickness of plate.
2
The tensile test specimen may be subjected to a temperature not exceeding 250℃ for a period not exceeding 16 hours for
hydrogen removal, prior to testing.
3
The tensile strength, yield point and elongation of each test specimen are to comply with the requirements in Table M6.5
appropriate to the kind of electrodes. Where the upper limit of tensile strength is exceeded, special consideration will be given to the
approval of the electrode, taking the other mechanical properties shown in the test results and the chemical composition of deposited
metal into consideration.
Table M6.5
Grade of electrode
Tensile Test Requirements for Deposited Metal
Tensile Strength
(N/mm 2)
Yield point
(N/mm 2)
Elongation (%)
400～560
305 min.
490～660
375 min.
510～690
400 min.
KMW63Y47
KMWL1
570～720
400～560
460 min.
305 min.
19 min.
22 min.
KMWL2
KMWL3
440～610
490～660
345 min.
375 min.
21 min.
KMWL91
590 min.
375(1) min.
25 min.
660 min.
(1)
KMW1
KMW2
KMW3
KMW52
KMW53
KMW54
KMW52Y40
KMW53Y40
KMW54Y40
22 min.
KMW55Y40
KMWL92
410 min.
Note:
(1) 0.2% proof stress
6.2.7
1
Deposited Metal Impact Test
The impact test specimens are to be U4 specimens shown in Table K2.5, and one set of three, test specimens is to be taken from
each of the deposited metal test assembly. The test specimen is to be cut with its longitudinal axis transverse to the direction of welding,
and the test specimen is to coincide with the mid-thickness of the plate shown in Fig. M6.4.
2
The notch is to be positioned in the centre of weld and is to be cut in the face of test specimen perpendicular to the surface of
79
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
plate.
3
Testing temperature and minimum mean absorbed energy are to comply with the requirements given in the Table M6.6
appropriate to the grade of the electrode.
4
When the absorbed energy of two or more test specimens among the one set of specimens is under the required minimum mean
absorbed energy or the absorbed energy of anyone of the test specimens is under 70% of the required minimum mean absorbed energy,
the impact test is considered to be failed.
Position of Impact Test Specimen (Unit: mm , t: Plate thickness)
Fig. M6.4
Table M6.6
Impact Test Requirements for Deposited Metal
Grade of electrode
Testing temperature (℃)
KMW1
20
Minimum mean absorbed
energy (J)
6.2.8
1
KMW2
0
KMW3
-20
KMW52
KMW53
0
-20
KMW54
KMW52Y40
-40
0
KMW53Y40
-20
KMW54Y40
-40
KMW55Y40
KMW63Y47
-60
-20
64
KMWL1
KMWL2
-40
-60
34
KMWL3
-60
KMWL91
-196
KMWL92
-196
47
27
Butt Weld Tensile Test
The tensile test specimen is to be U2A or U2B specimen shown in Table M3.1, and test specimen is to be taken from each test
assembly.
2
The tensile strength of test specimen is to comply with the requirements given in Table M6.7.
Table M6.7
Tensile Test Requirements for Butt Weld
Tensile Strength (N/mm 2)
400 min.
Grade of electrode
KMW1, KMW2, KMW3
KMW52, KMW53, KMW54
KMW52Y40, KMW53Y40, KMW54Y40, KMW55Y40
490 min.
510 min.
KMW63Y47
570 min.
KMWL1
400 min.
KMWL2
KMWL3
440 min.
490 min.
KMWL91
KMWL92
630 min.
670 min.
80
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
6.2.9
1
Butt Weld Bend Test
The face bend and root bend test specimens are to be UB-6 specimen shown in Table M3.2, and the test specimens are to be
taken from each test assembly. However, for KMWL91 or KMWL92, the face bend and root bent specimens are to be B-7 specimen
shown in Table M3.2, and the test specimens are to be taken longitudinally from each assembly.
2
The test specimens are to be capable of withstanding, without crack exceeding 3 mm long on the outer surface of other defects,
being bent through an angle of 120 degrees over a former having a radius of 1.5 times the thickness of test specimen. The radius and
angle of the former for KMWL91 and KMWL92, however, are to be 2 times the thickness of the specimen and 180 degrees respectively.
6.2.10
1
Butt Weld Impact Test
The impact test specimens are to be U4 specimen shown in Table K2.5, and one set of three test specimens are to be taken from
each test assembly. The test specimen is to be set with its longitudinal axis transverse to the weld length and the centre of the test
specimen is to coincide with the mid-thickness of the plates.
2
Testing temperature and minimum mean absorbed energy are to comply with the requirements given in Table M6.8 appropriate
to the grades of the electrode and welding position.
3
The requirements in the preceding 6.2.7-2 and -4 are to be applied to this clause.
TableM6.8
Impact Test Requirements for Butt Weld
Minimum mean absorbed energy (J)
Grade of electrode
KMW1
20
KMW2
KMW3
0
-20
KMW52
0
KMW53
-20
KMW54
KMW52Y40
-40
0
KMW53Y40
KMW54Y40
KMW55Y40
-20
-40
-60
KMW63Y47
KMWL1
-20
-40
KMWL2
-60
KMWL3
-60
KMWL91
KMWL92
-196
-196
6.2.11
1
Flat, Horizontal,
Overhead
Testing temperature (℃)
Vertical upward,
Vertical downward
34
47
39
64
27
27
Hydrogen Test*
The hydrogen test is to be carried out through the glycerine method, mercury method, gas chromatographic method or other
methods deemed appropriate by the Society.
2
The average volume of hydrogen is to comply with the requirements given in Table M6.9 according to the test procedures
specified in preceding -1 or the type of suffixes to be added to the grade marks.
Table M6.9
Requirements for Hydrogen Contents
Requirements for Hydrogen Contents (cm3/g)
Mark
Glycerine method
Mercury method(1)
Gas chromatographic method(1)
H15
0.10 max.
0.15 max.
0.15 max.
H10
0.05 max.
0.10 max.
0.10 max.
Note:
(1) The Society may designate the values for the average value of hydrogen which are lower than “0.10 max.” to be the
code values.
81
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
6.2.12
Fillet Weld Macro-etching Test
1
For macro-etching test specimens, those with breadth of 25 mm are selected from three places shown in Fig. M6.3.
2
The macro-etching test is conducted on the section of welding joints, and no incomplete fusion and penetration or other harmful
defects are to be present.
6.2.13
Fillet Weld Hardness Test
The hardness of weld metal, heat affected zone and base metal are to be measured at places given in Fig. M6.5 for each test
specimen which has undergone the macro-etching test specified in 6.2.12. The respective hardness are to be noted.
6.2.14
1
Fillet Weld Fracture Test
One of the test assemblies remaining after taking the macro-etching test specimens is to have the first fillet weld removed to
facilitate fracture by applying force as shown in Fig. M6.6, and the surface of the second fillet weld section is inspected. Next, on the
other test assembly, the second fillet weld is to be removed and the same fracture test is to be carried out.
2
The surface of the fractured weld section is not to show evidence of incomplete penetration or other harmful defects.
Fig. M6.5
Hardness Test(Unit: mm)
Fig. M6.6
6.2.15
1
Fracture Test
Annual Inspections
In the annual inspections, test specified in the following -2 and -3 are to conduct for each brand of the approved electrodes and
they are to be passed satisfactorily.
2
The kinds of tests etc. in the annual inspections for manual welding electrodes are to be as given in Table M6.10.
3
The kinds of test etc. in the annual inspections of electrodes used in gravity welding or other welding using similar welding
devices are to be as given in Table M6.11.
4
The welding process and requirements for test assemblies of tests specified in the preceding -2 and -3 to be as specified in 6.2.5
through 6.2.10.
82
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.10 Kind of Test for Annual Inspection
Test assembly
Kind of test
Welding
Diameter of
position
electrode (mm)
Deposited
metal test
Flat
Number
Dimensions
Kind and no. of test specimens
Thickness (2)
taken from test assembly
(mm)
4(1)
1
exceeding 4,
1
Fig. M6.1
Tensile test specimen : 1
20
Impact test specimen : 3
8 max.
Notes:
(1) Where deemed necessary by the Society, butt weld tests in the flat or vertical (either upward or downward) welding
position specified in Table M6.2 of 6.2.4-1 may be requested in place of deposited metal tests of 4 mm diameter
electrodes. In this case, impact test specimens (one set of three) are to be selected.
(2) Thicknesses of KE47 steel used as test specimens may be reduced to the thicknesses in the table by machining before
welding.
Table M6.11 Kind of Test for Annual Inspection
Test assembly
Kind of test
Deposited
Welding
Diameter of
Position
electrode (mm)
Flat
Number
4 min.
Dimensions
Thickness
(mm)
1
Fig. M6.1
20
metal test
6.2.16
1
Kind and no. of test specimens
taken from test assembly
Tensile test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
Changes in Grades
Where changes in grades relating to the strength or toughness of approved electrodes are to be made, the tests specified in -2 or
-3 are to be carried out according to the requirements in 6.1.3-6, and the electrodes must pass the tests satisfactorily.
2
For changes in grades relating to strength, annual inspection specified in 6.2.15 and the butt weld tests specified in 6.2.4-1 are
to be conducted.
3
For changes in grades relating to toughness, annual inspection specified in 6.2.15 and, among the butt weld tests specified in
6.2.4-1, only the impact test are to be conducted.
6.3
6.3.1
1
Automatic Welding Consumables for Mild Steels, High Tensile Steels and Steels for Low Temperature Service
Application
Welding consumables for mild steels, high tensile steels and steels for low temperature service, which given in following (1)
through (3) (in case of single electrodes, hereinafter referred to as “automatic welding consumables” in 6.3) are to be subjected to the
approval tests and annual inspections in accordance with the requirements in 6.3.
(1) Submerged arc automatic welding consumables
(2) Gas shielded arc automatic welding consumables (solid wire automatic welding consumables and fluxed wire automatic
welding consumables with shielding gas).
(3) Self-shielded arc automatic welding consumables (fluxed wire automatic welding consumables without shielding gas).
2
Approval tests and annual inspections for automatic welding materials of multiple electrodes are to be in accordance with the
requirement specified in 6.1.3-3 and 6.1.5-2.
6.3.2
Grades and Marks of Automatic Welding Consumables
1
The automatic welding consumables are classified into grades as given in Table M6.12.
2
Automatic welding consumables which have passed the tests for each welding process given in Table M6.15 are appended with
suffixes shown in Table M6.13 at the end of their marks.
3
In the preceding -2, a suffix G will be added to the grade mark for gas shielded arc automatic welding consumables, and a
suffix N will be added for self-shielded arc automatic welding consumables. Further, the type of gas used is to be specified in Table
M6.14 and the suffix given in Table M6.14 will be added after the suffix G. (Example: KAW53TMG (M1))
83
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
For mild steel
KAW1
KAW2
KAW3
KAW51
KAW52
KAW53
KAW54
Table M6.12 Grades and Marks
For high tensile steel
KAW52Y40
KAW63Y47
KAW53Y40
KAW54Y40
KAW55Y40
For steel for low temperature service
KAWL1
KAWL91
KAWL2
KAWL92
KAWL3
Table M6.13 Marks
Welding technique
Multi-run technique (1)
Two-run technique (2)
Multi-run and Two-run technique
Mark
M
T
TM
Notes:
(1) Multi-run technique refers to a welding process involving multiple passes.
(2) Two-run technique refers to a welding process involving a single pass on both sides.
Group
M1
M2
M3
I
C
E
Table M6.14 Gas types
Gas composition (Vol. %)
Type
CO 2
O2
H2
M1-1
1~5
1~5
M1-2
1~5
M1-3
1~3
M1-4
1~5
1~3
M2-1
6~25
M2-2
4~10
M2-3
6~25
1~8
M3-1
26~50
M3-2
11~15
M3-3
6~50
9~15
I-1
C-1
100
C-2
Rest
1~30
E-1
Except above
84
Ar
Rest
Rest
Rest
Rest
Rest
Rest
Rest
Rest
Rest
Rest
100
-
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.15 Kind of Test of Automatic Welding Consumables
Welding
process
Kinds of test(8)
Deposited metal test
Multi-run
technique
Butt weld test
Grade of welding
consumable
KAW1, KAWL1
KAW2, KAWL2
KAW3, KAWL3
KAW51, KAWL91
KAW52, KAWL92
KAW53, KAW54,
KAW52Y40
KAW53Y40
KAW54Y40
KAW55Y40
KAW63Y47
KAW1, KAW51
Submerged
arc
welding
Butt
Weld
test
Two-run
technique
Gas
shielded
arc and
selfshielded
arc
welding
Butt weld
test
Deposited
metal test
Multi-run
and
two-run
technique
Butt weld
test
KAW2, KAW52Y40
KAW3, KAW53Y40
KAW52, KAW54Y40
KAW53, KAW55Y40
KAW54,KAW63Y47
KAW1, KAW2
KAW3
KAW51, KAW52
KAW53, KAW54
KAW52Y40
KAW53Y40
KAW54Y40
KAW55Y40
KAW63Y47
KAWL1, KAWL2
KAWL3, KAWL91
KAWL92
Test assembly
Kind and number of test
specimens taken from test assembly
Number
Dimension
Thickness
(mm) (3)(9)
1
Fig. M6.7
20
Tensile test specimen : 2
Impact test specimen : 3
20～25
Tensile test specimen : 2 (4)
Face bend test specimen : 2 (4)(6)
Root bend test specimen : 2 (4)(6)
Impact test specimen : 3
Fig. M6.8
1 (4)
1
1
1
12～15
20～25
20～25
1
30～35
1
Fig. M6.9
1
12～15 (1)
20 (2)
20～25 (1)
30～35 (2)
1
12～15
1
20～25
KAW1, KAWL1
KAW2, KAWL2
KAW3, KAWL3
KAW51, KAWL91
KAW52, KAWL92
KAW53
KAW54
KAW52Y40
KAW53Y40
KAW54Y40
KAW55Y40
KAW63Y47
Tensile test specimen : 2
Longitudinal tensile test specimen : 1 (5)
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
Tensile test specimen : 2
Longitudinal tensile test specimen : 1 (5)
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
Tensile test specimen : 2
Longitudinal tensile test specimen : 1 (5)
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
(7)
Notes:
(1) Thickness of test assemblies where applied maximum plate thickness is not more than 25 mm.
(2) Thickness of test assemblies where applied maximum plate thickness is more than 25 mm.
(3) Where thickness is restricted by welding process, thickness of test assemblies may be changed upon approval of the
Society. In this case, the maximum test thickness is taken to be the maximum applied thickness.
(4) The number of butt weld test assemblies for multi-run gas shielded arc and self-shielded arc welding techniques is to be
one for each welding position. However, where there is more than one welding position, the number of tensile test
specimens and bend test specimens selected from the test assemblies for each welding position may be half of the
specified number.
(5) Test specimens are to be selected from only the thicker of two test assemblies.
(6) The number of face bend test and root bend test specimens selected from the butt weld test assemblies for KAWL91 and
KAWL92 is to be one each.
(7) Tests on both multi-run and two-run technique are to be conducted for multi-run and two-run welding respectively, and
the number, dimensions and thickness of test assemblies, along with the kinds and number of test specimens selected
from each test assembly are to be in accordance with each of the welding processes. However, the number of tensile test
85
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
specimens in the deposited metal test for the multi-pass welding technique is to be one
(8) The hydrogen test may be applied by request of the manufacturer.
(9) Thicknesses of KE47 steel used as test specimens may be reduced to the thicknesses in the table by machining before
welding.
6.3.3
1
Approval Test
For the approval of automatic welding consumables, the tests specified in 6.3.4-1 are to be conducted for each brand of
automatic welding consumables.
2
For wire-gas automatic welding consumables, the test in the preceding -1 is to be performed for each type of gas given in Table
M6.14. Although, when the manufacturer of the consumables recommends gas types of the group of M1, M2, M3 or C in Table M6.14,
the approval test is referred to one of following procedures.
(1) When the test is conducted in accordance with the preceding -1 on one of the gas type, the test on the other gas types belonging
to the same category are allowed to be dispensed with.
(2) When the consumables is specified as applicable to any combination of the groups of M1, M2 and M3, the test is allowed to
limit any one of the gas type of M1, M2 or M3 in accordance with the preceding -1, subject to the agreement of the Society.
6.3.4
1
General Provisions for Tests
Kinds of tests, number, thickness and dimensions of test assemblies, kinds and number of test specimens taken from each test
assembly for automatic welding consumables are specified in Table M6.15.
2
Grades of steel to be used in preparation of test assemblies are to be as given in Table M6.16.
Table M6.16 Grades of Steel Used for Test Assembly
Grade of steel used for test assembly(1)(2)
Grade of welding consumable
KAW1
KA
KAW2
KA, KB or KD
KAW3
KA, KB, KD or KE
KAW51
KA32 or KA36
KAW52
KA32, KA36, KD32 or KD36
KAW53
KA32, KA36, KD32, KD36, KE32 or KE36
KAW54
KA32, KA36, KD32, KD36, KE32, KE36, KF32 or KF36
KAW52Y40
KA40 or KD40
KAW53Y40
KA40, KD40 or KE40
KAW54Y40, KAW55Y40
KA40, KD40, KE40 or KF40
KAW63Y47
KE47
KAWL1
KE or KL24A
KAWL2
KE, KL24A, KL24B, KL27 or KL33
KAWL3
KL27, KL33 or KL37
KAWL91
KL9N53 or KL9N60
KAWL92
KL9N53 or KL9N60
Notes:
(1) Notwithstanding the requirements in this Table, mild or high tensile steels may be used for deposited metal test
assembly. In this case, appropriate buttering is to be carried out for KAWL91 and KAWL92.
(2) The tensile strength of high tensile steels KA32, KD32, KE32 and KF32 used in the butt weld test assemblies is to be
greater than 490 N/mm 2.
6.3.5
1
Welding Sequence of Test Assemblies
Deposited Metal Test Assemblies with Multi-run Technique (Fig. M6.7)
(1) Test assemblies are to be welded in flat position by multi-run technique according to the normal practice. The deposition of
each run is to be started alternately from each end of the plate and the thickness of layer is not to be less than the diamet er
86
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
of wire nor less than 4 mm whichever is the greater for submerged arc automatic welding consumables. For gas shielded arc
and self-shielded arc automatic welding consumables the thickness of layer is not to be less than 3 mm.
(2) After each run, the assembly is to be left in still air until it has cooled to less than 250℃ but not below 100℃, the temperature
being taken at the centre of weld on the surface of seam.
2
Butt Weld Test Assemblies with Multi-run Technique (Fig. M6.8)
(1) The face side of the test assemblies is to be multi-pass welded in flat position, and the corresponding welding procedure is to
follow the requirements of the preceding -1. However, for wire-gas and self-shielded wire automatic welding consumables, the
welding position is to be as specified by the manufacturer.
(2) After completing the face welding, back welding is performed. In this instance, back chipping may be carried out to expose
sound deposited metal at the root.
3
Butt Weld Test Assemblies with Two-run Technique (Fig. M6.9)
(1) The maximum diameter of wire and edge preparation are to be in accordance with Fig. M6.10, but some deviation may be
allowed where accepted by the Society.
(2) Test assemblies are to be welded according to the normal practice in downward position by two-run technique where each run
is to be started alternately from each end of the plate.
(3) After completing the first run, the assembly is to be left in still air until it is cooled to 100℃ or below, the temperature being
taken in the centre of weld on the surface of seam.
4
After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be subjected to any heat treatment.
5
The welded assemblies may be subjected to radiographic examination prior to taking test specimens from the assemblies.
Fig. M6.7
Deposited Metal Test Assembly with Multi-run Technique (Unit: mm)
87
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Fig. M6.8
Butt Weld Test Assembly with Multi-run Technique (Unit: mm)
88
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Fig. M6.9
Butt Weld Test Assembly with Two-run Technique (Unit: mm, t=Plate thickness)
89
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Fig. M6.10
Edge Preparation of Butt Weld Test Assembly with Two-run Technique (Unit: mm, t=Plate thickness)
90
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
6.3.6
1
Deposited Metal Tensile Test with Multi-run Technique
The tensile test specimens are to be U1A specimen shown in Table M3.1 and two specimens are to be taken from test assembly
with care being taken that the longitudinal axis coincides with the centre of weld and the mid-thickness of plate.
2
The tensile strength, yield point and elongation of the deposited metal are to pass the requirements specified in Table M6.17
according to the grade of automatic welding consumables. However, welding consumables whose tensile strength exceeds the upper
limit of the requirements may pass the tests by giving consideration to other mechanical properties and chemical composition of the
deposited metal.
3
The requirements in the preceding 6.2.6-2 are also to be applied to this paragraph.
Table M6.17 Tensile Test Requirements for Deposited Metal
Grade of welding
consumable
Tensile strength
2
Yield point
Elongation (%)
2
(N/mm )
(N/mm )
400～560
305 min.
490～660
375 min.
KAW1
KAW2
KAW3
KAW51
KAW52
KAW53
22 min.
KAW54
KAW52Y40
KAW53Y40
510～690
400 min.
KAW63Y47
570～720
460 min.
KAWL1
400～560
305 min.
KAWL2
440～610
345 min.
KAWL3
490～660
375 min.
21 min.
590 min.
375
(1)
min.
25 min.
410
(1)
min.
KAW54Y40
KAW55Y40
KAWL91
KAWL92
660 min.
19 min.
Note:
(1) 0.2% proof stress
6.3.7
1
Deposited Metal Impact Test with Multi-run Technique
The impact test specimens are to be U4 specimen shown in Table K2.5 and one set of three specimens are to be taken from test
assembly. Longitudinal direction of the test specimen is to be perpendicular to the weld line and the centre line of the test specimen is
to coincide with the half depth position of the test assembly as given in Table M6.4 of the preceding 6.2.7.
2
Testing temperature and minimum mean absorbed energy are to meet the requirements of Table M6.18 according to the grades
of the automatic welding consumables.
3
The requirements in the preceding 6.2.7-2 and 6.2.7-4 are also to be applied to this paragraph.
91
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.18 Impact Test Requirements for Deposited Metal
Grade of Welding consumable
Minimum mean absorbed energy (J)
Testing temperature (℃)
KAW1
20
KAW2
0
KAW3
-20
KAW51
20
34
KAW52
0
KAW53
-20
KAW54
-40
KAW52Y40
0
KAW53Y40
-20
39
KAW54Y40
-40
KAW55Y40
-60
KAW63Y47
-20
64
KAWL1
-40
KAWL2
-60
KAWL3
-60
27
KAWL91
-196
KAWL92
-196
6.3.8
1
Butt Weld Tensile Test with Multi-run Technique
The tensile test specimens are to be U2A or U2B specimen shown in Table M3.1 and two specimens are to be taken from each
test assembly.
2
The tensile strength obtained from the tensile tests is to meet the requirements of Table M6.19, according to the grades of the
automatic welding consumables.
Table M6.19 Tensile Test Requirements for Butt Weld
Tensile Strength (N/mm 2)
Grade of welding consumable
6.3.9
1
KAW1, KAW2, KAW3
400 min.
KAW51, KAW52, KAW53, KAW54
490 min.
KAW52Y40, KAW53Y40, KAW54Y40, KAW55Y40
510 min.
KAW63Y47
570 min.
KAWL1
400 min.
KAWL2
440 min.
KAWL3
490 min.
KAWL91
630 min.
KAWL92
670 min.
Butt Weld Bend Test with Multi-run Technique
The face and root bent test specimens are to be UB-6 specimen shown in Table M3.2 and two test specimens are to be taken
from each test assembly. For KAWL91 or KAWL92 face and root bend test specimen are to be B-7 test specimens shown in Table M3.2,
and test specimens are to be taken longitudinally from each test assembly.
2
Bend test specimens are subjected to face bending and root bending by a push arm with inner radius corresponding to 1.5 times
the plate thickness, and even at bending angle of greater than 120 degrees cracks exceeding 3 mm on the outer surface of bending or
any other defects is not to develop. However, the inner radius and bending angle of KAWL92 are to be 2.0 times the plate thickness and
180 degrees respectively.
6.3.10
1
Butt Weld Impact Test with Multi-run Technique
The impact test specimens are to be U4 specimen shown in Table K2.5 and one set of three specimens are to be taken from test
assembly. Longitudinal direction of the test specimen is to be perpendicular to the weld line and the centre line of the test specimen is
to coincide with the half depth position of the test assembly as given in Table M6.4 of the preceding 6.2.7.
2
Testing temperature and the minimum mean absorbed energy are to meet the requirements of Table M6.18 according to the
92
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
grades of the automatic welding consumables.
3
The requirements in the preceding 6.2.7-2 and 6.2.7-4 are also to be applied to this paragraph.
6.3.11
1
Butt Weld Tensile Test with Two-run Technique
The tensile test specimens are to be U2A or U2B specimen shown in Table M3.1 and two specimens are to be taken from each
assembly.
2
The tensile strength obtained from the tensile tests is to meet the requirements of Table M6.19, according to the grades of the
automatic welding consumables.
3
Where the automatic welding consumables are used for two-run technique only, one longitudinal tensile test specimen of U1A
shown in Table M3.1 is to be machined from the thicker test assembly and the longitudinal axis is to coincide with the centre of weld
about 7 mm below the plate surface on the side from which the second run was made.
4
The test specimen specified in preceding -3 may be subjected to a temperature not exceeding 250℃ for a period not exceeding
16 hours for hydrogen removal prior to testing.
5
The requirements for tensile tests specified in preceding -3 and -4 are to be as given in Table M6.17 according to the grades of
the automatic welding consumables. Where the upper limit of tensile strength exceeds the standard value, special consideration will be
given to the approval of the welding consumables, taking the other mechanical properties shown in the test results and the chemical
composition of deposited metal into consideration.
6.3.12
1
Butt Weld Bend Test with Two-run Technique
The face and root bent test specimens are to be UB-6 specimen shown in Table M3.2 and test specimens are to be taken from
each test assembly. However, for KAWL91 and KAWL92, the face bend and face and root bend test specimens are to be B-7 test
specimens, and test specimens are to be taken longitudinally from each test assembly.
2
The requirements in 6.3.9-2 are to be applied to this clause.
6.3.13
1
Butt Weld Impact Test with Two-run Technique
The impact test specimens are to be U4 specimen shown in Table K2.5 and one set of three specimens are to be taken from test
assembly. Longitudinal direction of the test specimen is to be perpendicular to the weld line and the surface line of the tes t specimen
is to coincide with the 2 mm depth position of the test assembly as given in Table M6.4 of the preceding 6.2.7.
2
Test temperature and the minimum mean absorbed energy are to meet the requirements of Table M6.18 according to the grades
of the automatic welding consumables.
3
The requirements in the preceding 6.2.7-2 and 6.2.7-4 are also to be applied to this clause.
Fig. M6.11
6.3.14
Position of Butt Weld Impact Test Specimen with Two-run Technique (Unit: mm , t=Plate thickness)
Hydrogen Test
The hydrogen tests are to be in accordance with the requirements specified in 6.2.11.
6.3.15
1
Annual Inspections
In the annual inspection, test specified in the following -2 are to be conducted for each approved brand, and the consumables
are to meet the corresponding requirements.
2
The kinds of tests etc. involved in the annual inspections are to be as given in Table M6.20.
3
Welding procedures and requirements for test assemblies specified in the preceding -2 are to be as specified in 6.3.5 through
6.3.13.
93
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
6.3.16
1
Changes in Grades
Where changes in grades relating to the strength or toughness of approved automatic welding consumables are to be made, the
tests specified in -2, -3 or -4, as applicable, are to be carried out according to the requirements in 6.1.3-6, and the electrodes must pass
the tests satisfactorily.
2
Changes in grades concerning the strength and toughness of multi-run automatic welding consumables are to refer the following
(1) and (2).
(1) For changes in grades concerning strength, the butt weld tests, specified in the annual inspections specified in 6.3.15 and in the
requirements of 6.3.4-1, are to be conducted.
(2) For changes in grades concerning toughness, the butt weld impact tests, specified in the annual inspections specified in 6.3.15
and in the requirements of 6.3.4-1, are to be conducted.
3
Changes in grades concerning the strength and toughness of two-run automatic welding consumables are to refer the following
(1) and (2).
(1) For changes in grades concerning strength, all tests specified in 6.3.4-1 are to be performed.
(2) For changes in grades concerning toughness, the butt weld impact tests, specified in the annual inspections of 6.3.15 and in
Table M6.15 of 6.3.4-1 using the thicker of two maximum applied thickness of the test assemblies, are to be conducted.
4
Changes in grades concerning the strength or toughness of automatic welding consumables for multi-run and two-run use are
to be as specified in the preceding -2 or -3.
Table M6.20 Kind of Test for Annual Inspection
Grade of
welding
consumable
KAW1
KAW2
KAW3
KAW51
KAW52
KAW53
KAW54
KAW52Y40
KAW53Y40
KAW54Y40
KAW55Y40
KAW63Y47
KAWL1
KAWL2
KAWL3
KAWL91
KAWL92
Welding
Kinds of test
process
Test assembly
Kind and number of test specimens
Number
Dimension
Thickness(2)
(mm)
Multi-run
technique
Deposited metal test
1
Fig. M6.7
20
Two-run
technique
Butt
weld
test
Submerged
arc welding
1
Fig. M6.9
20
Gas
shielded
arc and
shield arc
welding
1
Deposited metal test
1
Fig. M6.7
20
Butt(1)
weld
test
1
Fig. M6.9
20
Multi-run
and
two-run
technique
Submerged
arc welding
Gas
shielded
arc and
shield arc
welding
20～25
20～25
1
taken from test assembly
Tensile test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
Tensile test specimen : 1
Longitudinal tensile test specimen : 1
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
Tensile test specimen : 1
Longitudinal tensile test specimen : 1
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
Tensile test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
Tensile test specimen : 1
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
Tensile test specimen : 1
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
Notes:
(1) Butt weld test for multi-run and two-run technique is to be carried out by two-run technique.
(2) Thicknesses of KE47 steel used as test specimens may be reduced to the thicknesses in the table by machining before
welding.
94
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
6.4
Semi-automatic Welding Consumables for Mild Steels, High Tensile Steels and Steels for Low Temperature Service
6.4.1
Application
Welding wires for semi-automatic welding for mild steels, high tensile steels and steels for low temperature service (hereinafter
referred to as “semi-automatic welding consumables”) are to be subjected to the approval test and annual inspections in accordance
with the requirements in 6.4.
6.4.2
Grades and Marks of Semi-automatic Welding Consumables
1
Semi-automatic welding consumables are classified into grades as given in Table M6.21.
2
A suffix G will be added to the grade marks of semi-automatic welding consumables which use shield gas, and a suffix N will
be added to the grade marks of semi-automatic welding consumables which do not use shield gas. Further, the type of shield gas used
is to be as specified in Table M6.14 of 6.3.2-3, and the suffix given in Table will be added after suffix G. (Example : KSW53G (M1))
For mild steel
KSW1
KSW2
KSW3
6.4.3
1
KSW51
KSW52
KSW53
KSW54
Table M6.21 Grades and Marks
For high tensile
steel
KSW52Y40
KSW63Y47
KSW53Y40
KSW54Y40
KSW55Y40
For steel for low
temperature service
KSWL1
KSWL91
KSWL2
KSWL92
KSWL3
Approval Test
For the approval of semi-automatic welding consumables, the test specified in 6.4.4-1 is to be conducted for each brand of semi-
automatic welding consumables.
2
For semi-automatic welding consumables which use shield gas, the test in the preceding -1 is to be performed for each type
of gas given in Table M6.14. Although, when the manufacturer of the consumables recommends gas types of the group of M1, M2,
M3 or C, in Table M6.14, the approval test is referred to one of the following procedures.
(1) When the test is conducted in accordance with the preceding -1 on one of the gas type, the test on the other gas types belonging
to the same category are allowed to be dispensed with.
(2) When the consumables is specified as applicable to any combination of the group of M1, M2 or M3, the test is allowed to limit
any one of the gas types of M1, M2 or M3 in accordance with the preceding -1, subject to the agreement of the Society.
6.4.4
1
General Provisions for Tests
Kinds of test, number, thickness and dimensions of test assemblies, diameter of wire used for welding, and the kinds and number
of test specimens taken from each test assembly, position for semi-automatic welding consumables used in butt welds or in both butt
and fillet welds are to be as given in Table M6.22.
2
The requirements in 6.2.4-2 are to be applied to the semi-automatic welding consumables used in fillet welds.
3
Steel plates to be used for test assemblies are to be as given in Table M6.23, appropriate to the kind of semi-automatic welding
consumables.
95
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.22 Kind of Test for Semi-Automatic Welding Consumable
Kinds of
Test assembly
(6)
test
Welding
position
Deposited
Flat
metal test
Kind and number of test
Wire diameter (mm)
Number
Dimensions
maximum diameter
1
(1)
Fig. M 6.1
1
(1)
1
(2)
minimum diameter
Flat
(3)
Horizontal
Thickness
(7)
(mm)
assembly
20
Tensile test specimen: 1
Impact test specimen: 3
1
Butt weld
Vertical
First-run :
test
upward
minimum diameter
Vertical
Remaining-run :
downward
maximum diameter
Overhead
1
Fig. M 6.2
15～20
Face bend test specimen: 1
Impact test specimen: 3
1
Horizontal
Maximum diameter
fillet(4)
The second side :
test
Tensile test specimen: 1
Root bend test specimen: 1
1
Macro test specimen: 3(5)
The first side :
Fillet weld
specimens taken from test
1
Fig. M 6.3
20
minimum diameter
Hardness test specimen:
3(5)
Fracture test specimen: 2
Notes:
(1) Where the core diameter to be manufactured is of single variety, the number of test assembly is to be one.
(2) Where tests are conducted solely in the flat position, one test assembly welded with of different wire diameters is to be
added.
(3) For semi-automatic welding consumables which have passed butt weld tests in the flat and vertical upward positions,
the horizontal butt weld test may be omitted, upon approved by the Society.
(4) This test is to be added solely against welding electrodes for use in both butt and fillet welds to which the preceding
(3) apply.
(5) The test specimens used in the macro-etching test and hardness test are to be the same.
(6) The hydrogen test may be carried out at the request of the manufacturer.
(7) Thicknesses of KE47 steel used as test specimens may be reduced to the thicknesses in the table by machining before
welding.
96
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.23 Grades of Steel Used for Test Assembly
Grade of welding
Grade of steel used for test assembly(1)(2)
consumable
KSW1
KA
KSW2
KA, KB or KD
KSW3
KA, KB, KD or KE
KSW51
KA32 or KA36
KSW52
KA32, KA36, KD32 or KD36
KSW53
KA32, KA36, KD32, KD36, KE32 or KE36
KSW54
KA32, KA36, KD32, KD36, KE32, KE36, KF32 or KF36
KSW52Y40
KA40 or KD40
KSW53Y40
KA40, KD40 or KE40
KSW54Y40, KSW55Y40
KA40, KD40, KE40 or KF40
KSW63Y47
KE47
KSWL1
KE or KL24A
KSWL2
KE, KL24A, KL24B, KL27 or KL33
KSWL3
KL27, KL33 or KL37
KSWL91
KL9N53 or KL9N60
KSWL92
KL9N53 or KL9N60
Notes:
(1) Notwithstanding the requirements in this Table, mild or high tensile steels may be used for deposited
metal test assembly. In this case, appropriate buttering is to be carried out for KSWL91 and KSWL92.
(2) The tensile strength of high tensile steels KA32, KD32, KE32 and KF32 used in the test assemble is to
be greater than 490 N/mm 2.
6.4.5
1
Welding Sequence of Test Assemblies
Deposited Metal Test Assemblies (Fig. M6.1)
(1) The test assemblies are to be welded in flat position according the welding procedure recommended by the manufacturer and
the thickness of each layer of weld metal is to be in range from 2 mm to 6 mm.
(2) After each run, the assembly is to be left in still air until it has cooled to less than 250℃ but not below 100℃, the temperature
being taken at the centre of weld on the surface of seam.
2
Butt Weld Test Assemblies (Fig. M6.2)
(1) Test assemblies are to be welded in each welding position (flat, horizontal, vertical upward, vertical downward and overhead)
which is recommended by the manufacturer.
(2) After each run, the assembly is to be left in still air until it has cooled to less than 250℃, but not below 100℃, the temperature
being taken at the centre of weld on the surface of seam.
3
Fillet Weld Test Assemblies (Fig. M6.3)
The test assemblies are to be in accordance with the requirements in 6.2.5-4.
4
After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be subjected to any heat treatment.
5
The welded assemblies may be subjected to radiographic examination prior to taking test specimens from the assemblies.
6.4.6
1
Deposited Metal Tensile Test
The tensile test specimens are to be U1A specimen shown in Table M3.1 and one specimen is to be taken from each assembly,
care being taken that the longitudinal axis coincides with the centre of weld and the mid-thickness of plate.
2
The tensile strength, yield point and elongation of each test specimens are to comply with the requirements in Table M6.24
appropriate to the kind of welding consumables. Where the upper limit of tensile strength is exceeded, special consideration will be
given to the approval of the semi-automatic welding consumables, taking the other mechanical properties shown in the test results and
the chemical composition of deposited metal into consideration.
97
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
3
The requirements in preceding 6.2.6-2 are to be applied to 6.4.6.
Table M6.24 Tensile Test Requirements for Deposited Metal
Grade of welding consumable
Tensile Strength
2
Yield point
Elongation (%)
2
(N/mm )
(N/mm )
400～560
305 min.
490～660
375 min.
KSW1
KSW2
KSW3
KSW51
KSW52
KSW53
22 min.
KSW54
KSW52Y40
KSW53Y40
510～690
400 min.
KSW63Y47
570～720
460 min.
19 min.
KSWL1
400～560
305 min.
22 min.
KSWL2
440～610
345 min.
KSWL3
490～660
375 min.
21 min.
590 min.
(1)
min.
25 min.
(1)
min.
KSW54Y40
KSW55Y40
KSWL91
KSWL92
660 min.
375
410
Note:
(1) 0.2% proof stress
6.4.7
1
Deposited Metal Impact Test
The impact test specimens are to be U4 specimens as shown in Table K2.5 and one set of three test specimens being taken from
each of the deposited metal test assemblies. The test specimen is to be cut with its longitudinal axis transverse to the direction of
welding, and the centre of the test specimen is to coincide with the mid-thickness of the plate.
2
Test temperature and minimum mean absorbed energy are to comply with the requirements given in the Table M6.25 appropriate
to the grade of the electrode.
3
The requirements in the preceding 6.2.7-2 and -4 are to be applied to 6.4.7.
98
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.25 Impact Test Requirements for Deposited Metal
6.4.8
1
Grade of welding
Testing temperature
Minimum mean
consumable
(℃)
absorbed energy (J)
KSW1
20
KSW2
0
KSW3
-20
KSW51
20
KSW52
0
KSW53
-20
KSW54
-40
KSW52Y40
0
KSW53Y40
-20
KSW54Y40
-40
KSW55Y40
-60
KSW63Y47
-20
KSWL1
-40
KSWL2
-60
KSWL3
-60
KSWL91
-196
KSWL92
-196
47
64
34
27
Butt Weld Tensile Test
The tensile test specimens are to be U2A or U2B specimen shown in Table M3.2 and one specimen is to be taken from each
assembly.
2
The tensile strength of each test specimen is to comply with the requirements given in Table M6.26.
Table M6.26 Tensile Test Requirements for Butt Weld
6.4.9
1
Grade of welding consumable
Tensile Strength (N/mm 2)
KSW1, KSW2, KSW3
400 min.
KSW51, KSW52, KSW53, KSW54
490 min.
KSW52Y40, KSW53Y40, KSW54Y40, KSW55Y40
510 min.
KSW63Y47
570 min.
KSWL1
400 min.
KSWL2
440 min.
KSWL3
490 min.
KSWL91
630 min.
KSWL92
670 min.
Butt Weld Bend Test
The face and root bend specimens are to be UB-6 specimen shown in Table M3.2 and one specimen is to be taken from each
test assembly. However, for KSWL91 and KSWL92, the face and root bend specimens are to be UB-7 specimen shown in Table M3.2
and specimen is to be taken longitudinally from each test assembly.
2
The test specimens are to be capable of withstanding, without crack exceeding 3 mm long on the outer surface of the specimen
or other defect, being bent through an angle of 120 degrees over a former having a radius of 1.5 times the thickness of test specimen.
The radius and angle of the former for KMWL91 and KMWL92, however, are to be 2 times the thickness of the specimen and 180
degrees respectively.
99
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
6.4.10
1
Butt Weld Impact Test
The impact test specimens are to be U4 specimen as shown in Table K2.5 and one set of three test specimens being taken from
each of the deposited metal test assemblies. The test specimen is to be cut with its longitudinal axis transverse to the direction of
welding, and the centre of the test specimen is to coincide with the mid-thickness of the plate.
2
Test temperature and minimum mean absorbed energy are to comply with the requirements given in the Table M6.27 appropriate
to the grades of the electrode and welding position.
3
The requirements in the preceding 6.2.7-2 and 6.2.7-4 are to be applied to this clause.
6.4.11
Hydrogen Test
The hydrogen tests are to be in accordance with the requirements specified in 6.2.11.
6.4.12
Fillet Weld Macro-etching Test
The macro-etching test is to be in accordance with the requirements in 6.2.12.
6.4.13
Fillet Weld Hardness Test
The hardness test is to be in accordance with the requirements in 6.2.13.
6.4.14
Fillet Weld Fracture Test
The fracture test is to be in accordance with the requirements in 6.2.14.
6.4.15
1
Annual Inspections
In the annual inspections, tests specified in the following -2 are to be conducted for each approved brand and they are to be
passed satisfactorily.
2
The kinds of test etc. in the annual inspection are to be as given in Table M6.28.
3
The welding procedures and requirements for the test assemblies for the tests specified in the preceding -2 are to be in
accordance with the requirements in 6.4.5 through 6.4.10.
Table M6.27 Impact Test Requirements for Butt Weld
Minimum mean absorbed energy (J)
Grade of welding
consumable
Testing temperature (℃)
KSW1
20
KSW2
0
KSW3
-20
KSW51
20
KSW52
0
KSW53
-20
KSW54
-40
KSW52Y40
0
KSW53Y40
-20
KSW54Y40
-40
KSW55Y40
-60
KSW63Y47
-20
KSWL1
-40
KSWL2
-60
KSWL3
-60
KSWL91
-196
KSWL92
-196
Vertical upward,
Flat, Horizontal, Overhead
Vertical downward
34
47
39
64
27
100
27
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.28 Kind of Test for Annual Inspection
Test assembly
Kind of test
Deposited
Welding
Diameter of
position
wire (mm)
Flat
Number
Kind and no. of test
Dimensions
Thickness
(2)
(mm)
(1)
1
Fig. M6.1
specimens
taken
from
test
assembly
20
metal test
Tensile test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3
Notes:
(1) The diameters of the wire are to be within the range specified by the manufacturers.
(2) Thicknesses of KE47 steel used as test specimens may be reduced to the thicknesses in the table by machining before
welding.
6.4.16
1
Changes in Grades
Where changes in grades relating to the strength or toughness of approved semi-automatic welding consumables are to be made,
the tests specified in -2, or -3 are to be carried out according to the requirements in 6.1.3-6, and the semi-automatic welding consumables
must pass the tests satisfactorily.
2
Where changes are to be made in the strength of the welding consumables, the annual inspection specified in 6.4.15 and the
butt weld tests specified in 6.4.4-1, are to be carried out.
3
Where changes are to be made in the toughness of the welding consumables, the butt weld impact tests specified in the annual
inspection in 6.4.15 and in 6.4.4-1 are to be carried out.
6.5
6.5.1
Electro-slag and Electro-gas Welding Consumables
Application
Electro-slag and electro-gas welding consumables for mild and high tensile steels (hereinafter refered to as “welding
consumables” in 6.5) are to be subjected to the approval test and annual inspections in accordance with the requirements in 6.5.
6.5.2
Grades and Marks of Welding Consumables
Welding consumables are classified into grades as given in Table M6.29.
6.5.3
Approval Test
For the approval of welding materials, the tests specified in 6.5.4-1 are to be conducted for each brand of welding materials.
Table M6.29 Grades and Marks
For mild steel
KEW1
KEW2
KEW3
6.5.4
1
For high tensile steel
KEW52Y40
KEW53Y40
KEW54Y40
KEW55Y40
KEW51
KEW52
KEW53
KEW54
General Provisions for Tests
Kinds of tests, number, thickness and dimensions of test assemblies, kinds and number of test specimens taken from each test
assembly for welding consumables are to be as given in Table M6.30.
2
KEW63Y47
Grades of steel to be used for test assemblies are to be as given in Table M6.31.
101
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.30 Kind of Test for Electro-slag and Electro-gas Welding Consumables
Test assembly
Kinds and no. of test specimens taken
Kind of test
from test assembly
Number
Dimensions
1
Fig.M6.12
Thickness
(1)(2)
(mm)
Butt weld test
Tensile test specimen : 2
20～25
Longitudinal tensile test specimen : 2
Side bend test specimen : 2
1
35～45
Impact test specimen : 6
Macro test specimen : 2
Notes:
(1) Where thickness is restricted by welding process, thickness of test assemblies may be changed upon approval of the
Society. In this case, the maximum thickness of test assemblies in thickness restrictions is to be taken as the maximum
applicable thickness, as is to be certificated.
(2) Thicknesses of KE47 steel used as test specimens may be reduced to the thicknesses in the table by machining before
welding.
Table M6.31 Grades of Steel Used for Test Assembly
Grade of welding
Grade of steel used for test assembly(1)
consumable
KEW1
KA
KEW2
KA, KB or KD
KEW3
KA, KB, KD or KE
KEW51
KA32 or KA36
KEW52
KA32, KA36, KD32 or KD36
KEW53
KA32, KA36, KD32, KD36, KE32 or KE36
KEW54
KA32, KA36, KD32, KD36, KE32, KE36, KF32 or KF36
KEW52Y40
KA40 or KD40
KEW53Y40
KA40, KD40 or KE40
KEW54Y40, KEW55Y40
KA40, KD40, KE40 or KF40
KEW63Y47
KE47
Note:
(1) The tensile strength of high tensile steels KA32, KD32, KE32 and KF32 used in the test assemble is
to be greater than 490 N/mm 2.
6.5.5
1
Welding Sequence of Test Assemblies
Butt weld test assemblies (Fig. M6.12)
(1) The edge preparation is to be in accordance with the recommendations by the manufacturer.
(2) Test assemblies are to be welded upward in vertical position in one pass, generally, and in accordance with the practice
recommended by the manufacturer.
2
After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be subjected to any heat treatment.
3
The welded assemblies may be subjected to radiographic examination prior to taking test specimens from the assemblies.
102
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Fig. M6.12
Butt Weld Test Assembly
(Unit: mm, t=Plate thickness)
6.5.6
1
Tensile Test
Two tensile test specimens to be U2A or U2B specimen and two longitudinal tensile test specimens to be U1A specimen as
shown in Table M3.1 to be taken from each test assembly.
2
Longitudinal tensile test specimens may be subjected to the heat treatment not exceeding 250℃ for a period not exceeding 16
hours for hydrogen removal prior to testing.
3
Tensile strength of each test specimen U2A or U2B is to comply with the requirements in Table M6.32 according to the grade
of welding consumable. Tensile strength, yield point and elongation of each longitudinal test specimen U1A are to comply with the
requirements in Table M6.33 according to the grade of welding consumable. Where the upper limit of tensile strength is exceeded,
special consideration will be given to the approval of the welding consumables, taking the other mechanical properties in the test results
and chemical composition of deposited metal into consideration.
Table M6.32 Tensile Test Requirement
Tensile Strength (N/mm 2)
Grade of welding consumable
KEW1
KEW2
400 min.
KEW3
KEW51
KEW52
490 min.
KEW53
KEW54
KEW52Y40
KEW53Y40
510 min.
KEW54Y40
KEW55Y40
KEW63Y47
570 min.
103
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.33 Longitudinal Tensile Test Requirement
Grade of welding consumable
Tensile Strength
2
Yield point
(N/mm )
(N/mm 2)
400～560
305 min.
490～660
375 min.
Elongation (%)
KEW1
KEW2
KEW3
KEW51
KEW52
22 min.
KEW53
KEW54
KEW52Y40
KEW53Y40
KEW54Y40
510～690
400 min.
570～720
460 min.
KEW55Y40
KEW63Y47
6.5.7
19 min.
Bend Test
1
Two pieces of side bend test specimen UB-8 shown in Table M3.2 are taken from each test assembly.
2
The test specimens are to be capable of withstanding, without fracture, being side bent through an angle of 180 degrees over a
former having a radius of 2 times the thickness of test specimen. The test specimens may be considered as complying with the
requirements if, on completion of the test, no crack or defect greater than 3 mm can be seen on the outer surface of the test specimen.
6.5.8
1
Impact Test
The impact test specimens are to be U4 specimen as shown in Table K2.5, and six specimens are taken from each test assembly.
The test specimen is to be cut with its longitudinal axis perpendicular to the weld and the upper surface 2 mm apart from the surface of
test assembly as specified in Fig. M6.13.
2
The position of the notch is to be in accordance with Fig. M6.13(a) and (b) respectively, and its longitudinal direction is to be
perpendicular to the surface of the test assembly.
3
Testing temperature and each value of minimum mean absorbed energy is to be in accordance with the requirements in Table
M6.34 according to grade of welding consumable.
4
The requirements in 6.2.7-4. are to be applied to this clause.
Fig. M6.13
Position of Impact Specimen (Unit: mm , t＝Plate thickness)
104
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
TableM6.34
6.5.9
1
Impact Test Requirement
Grade of welding consumable
Testing temperature (℃)
KEW1
20
KEW2
0
KEW3
-20
KEW51
20
KEW52
0
KEW53
-20
KEW54
-40
KEW52Y40
0
KEW53Y40
-20
KEW54Y40
-40
KEW55Y40
-60
KEW63Y47
-20
Minimum mean absorbed energy (J)
34
39
64
Macro-etching Test
Two macro-etching test specimens are to be taken from each test assembly. As for the surface to be tested, one is to be normal
to the assembly surface and the other parallel to the assembly surface.
2
The welding joints on test specimens are to be polished and etched, and are to show complete fusion, penetration and sound
metallurgical structure.
6.5.10
Annual Inspections
1
In the annual inspections, the approved welding consumables are to be subjected to the tests provided in -2.
2
The kinds of tests in the annual inspections are to be as given in Table M6.35.
3
The welding procedure and requirements for test assemblies specified in -2 are to be in accordance with the requirements in
6.5.5 to 6.5.8.
Table M6.35 Kind of Test for Annual Inspection
Test assembly
Kind of test
Number
Dimensions
Kind and no. of test specimens
Thickness
(1) (3) (4)
taken from test assembly
(mm)
Butt weld test
1
Fig. M6.12
20~25
Tensile test specimen : 1
Longitudinal Tensile test specimen : 1
Side bend test specimen : 2
Impact test specimen : 6(1)
Macro test specimen : 1(2)
Notes:
(1) Where approved by the Society, 3 pieces of impact test specimen may be taken from the centre of welded part.
(2) The surface to be tested is to be vertical to the test assembly surface.
(3) Thicknesses of KE47 steel used as test specimens may be reduced to the thicknesses in the table by machining before
welding.
(4) In cases where testing is difficult to carry out under the applied welding process, the specified value in this table may be
changed.
6.5.11
Changes in Grades
Where changes in grades relating to the strength or toughness of approved welding consumables are to be made, the tests
specified in 6.5.4-1 are to be carried out according to the requirements in 6.1.3-6, and the welding consumables must pass the tests
satisfactorily.
105
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
6.6
One Side Automatic Welding Consumables for Mild Steels, High Tensile Steels and Steels for Low Temperature
Service
6.6.1
1
Application
Welding consumables for mild steels, high tensile steels and steels for low temperature service, which given in following (1)
through (3) (hereinafter referred to in 6.6 as “one side automatic welding consumables”) are to be subjected to the approval tests and
annual inspections in accordance with the requirements in 6.6.
(1) Submerged arc one side automatic welding consumables
(2) Gas shielded arc one side automatic welding consumables (solid wire one side automatic welding consumables and fluxed wire
one side automatic welding consumables with shielding gas)
(3) Self-shielded arc one side automatic welding consumables (fluxed wire one side automatic welding consumables without
shielding gas).
2
Approval tests and annual inspections of one side covered electrodes for mild steels, high tensile steels and steels for low
temperature service, and one side semi-automatic welding consumables are to be in accordance with the requirements specified in
6.1.3-3 and 6.1.5-1.
3
The backing consumables used for one side welding in combination with one side welding consumables of the preceding -1
and -2 are to be as deemed appropriate by the Society.
6.6.2
Grades and Marks of Welding Consumables
1
One side automatic welding consumables are classified into as given in Table M6.12.
2
One side automatic welding consumables which have passed the tests for each welding process given in Table M6.37 are to be
appended with suffixes given in Table M6.36 at the end of their marks.
3
In the preceding -2, suffix G will be added to the grade marks of gas shielded arc one side automatic welding consumables and
a suffix N will be added to the grade marks of self-shielded arc one side automatic welding consumables. Further, the type of shield
gas used is to be as specified in Table M6.14 of 6.3.2-3, and the suffix given in Table M6.14 will be added after the suffix G. (Example :
KAW53SMPG (M1))
Table M6.36 Suffix
Welding technique
Suffixes
(1)
One-run technique
SP
(2)
Multi-run technique
MP
One-run and multi-run technique
SMP
Notes:
(1) One-run technique refers to a welding process which is performed in one pass regardless of the number of
electrodes.
(2) Multi-run technique refers to a welding process which is performed in multiple passes regardless of the number of
electrodes.
106
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.37 Kinds of Test for One-side Automatic Welding Consumable
Grade of
Welding
Kinds of
Test assembly
Kind and number of test specimens
(1)(8)
welding
consumable
process
test(5)
Number
Dimension
Thickness
(mm)
12～15
1
KAW1
One-run
KAW3
technique
Face bend test specimen : 1
KAW51
20～25
1
12～15
(2)
Tensile test specimen : 2
20～25
(3)
Longitudinal tensile test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 6 (4)
Macro-etching test specimen : 1
KAW53
Butt
KAW54
Multi-run
KAW52Y40
KAW53Y40
technique
Fig. M6.14
weld
test
20～25 (2)
1
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
KAW54Y40
30～35 (3)
KAW55Y40
KAW63Y47
Impact test specimen : 6 (4)
Macro-etching test specimen : 1
One-run
and
KAWL2
KAWL91
Root bend test specimen : 1
1
KAW52
KAWL3
Tensile test specimen : 2
Longitudinal tensile test specimen : 1
KAW2
KAWL1
taken from test assembly
Tensile test specimen : 2
(6)
1
12～15
1
20～25 (2)(7)
Multi-run
technique
Longitudinal tensile test specimen : 1
Face bend test specimen : 1
KAWL92
30～35 (3)(7)
Root bend test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 6 (4)
Macro-etching test specimen : 1
Notes:
(1) Where thickness is restricted by welding process, thickness of test assemblies may be changed upon approval of the
Society. In this case, the maximum thickness of test assemblies restrictions is to be taken as the maximum applicabl e
thickness, and is to be certified.
(2) Thickness of test assemblies corresponding to single electrodes.
(3) Thickness of test assemblies corresponding to multiple electrodes.
(4) Where thickness of test assemblies ranges between 12～15 mm, the test specimens are to be 1 set of 3 impact test
specimens given in Fig. M 6.15(b).
(5) The hydrogen test may be carried out at the request of the manufacturer.
(6) Thickness of test assembly for one-run technique.
(7) Thickness of test assembly for multi-run technique.
(8) Thicknesses of KE47 steel used as test specimens may be reduced to the thicknesses in the table by machining before
welding.
6.6.3
1
Approval Test
For the approval of one side automatic welding consumables, the tests specified in 6.6.4-1 are to be conducted for each brand
and the semi-automatic welding consumables.
2
For one side automatic welding consumables, the test in the preceding -1, is to be performed for each type of gas given in Table
M6.14. Although, when the manufacturer of the consumables recommends gas types of the group of M1, M2, M3 or C in Table M6.14,
the approval test is referred to one of the following procedures.
(1) When the test is conducted in accordance with the preceding -1 on one of the gas type, the test on the other gas types belonging
to the same category are allowed to be dispensed with.
(2) When the consumables is specified as applicable to any combination of the groups of M1, M2 and M3, the test is allowed to
limit any one of the gas types of M1, M2 or M3 in accordance with the preceding -1, subject to the agreement of the Society.
107
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
6.6.4
1
General Provisions for Tests
Kinds of tests, number, thickness and dimensions of test assemblies, kinds and number of test specimens taken from each test
assembly for one side automatic welding consumables are specified in Table M6.37.
2
Grades of steel to be used in preparation of test assemblies are to be as given in Table M6.38.
Table M6.38 Grades of Steel Used for Test Assembly
Grade of steel used for test assembly(1)
Grade of welding consumable
KAW1
KA
KAW2
KA, KB or KD
KAW3
KA, KB, KD or KE
KAW51
KA32 or KA36
KAW52
KA32, KA36, KD32 or KD36
KAW53
KA32, KA36, KD32, KD36, KE32 or KE36
KAW54
KA32, KA36, KD32, KD36, KE32, KE36, KF32 or KF36
KAW52Y40
KA40 or KD40
KAW53Y40
KA40, KD40 or KE40
KAW54Y40, KAW55Y40
KAW63Y47
KA40, KD40, KE40 or KF40
KE47
KAWL1
KE or KL24A
KAWL2
KE, KL24A, KL24B, KL27 or KL33
KAWL3
KL27, KL33 or KL37
KAWL91
KL9N53 or KL9N60
KAWL92
KL9N53 or KL9N60
Note:
(1) The tensile strength of high tensile steels KA32, KD32, KE32 and KF32 used in the test assemble is to be greater than
490 N/mm 2.
6.6.5
1
Welding Sequence of Test Assemblies
Butt Weld Test Assemblies with One-run and Multi-run Technique (Fig. M6.14)
(1) The edge preparations and root gaps of test assemblies, together with the diameter of core wire and the number of electrodes
etc. are to be within the range specified by the manufacturer.
(2) Test assemblies are to be welded in flat position by one-run technique or multi-run technique according to the procedures
specified by the manufacturer. However, for gas shielded arc and self-shielded arc one side automatic welding consumables,
the welding position is to be specified by the manufacturer.
(3) In case of multi-run technique, after each run the assembly is to be left in still air until it has cooled to less than 250℃ but not
below 100℃, the temperature being taken at the centre of weld on the surface of seam.
2
After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be subjected to any heat treatment.
3
The welded assemblies may be subjected to radiographic examination prior to taking specimen from the assembly.
108
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Fig. M6.14
6.6.6
1
Butt Weld Test Assembly with One-run and Multi-run Technique (Unit: mm , t=Plate thickness)
Butt Weld Test with One-run and Multi-run Technique
Two tensile test specimens to be U2A or U2B as shown in Table M3.1 and one longitudinal tensile test specimen to be U1A are
to be taken from each test assembly with care being taken that the longitudinal axis coincides with the centre of weld and the midthickness of plate.
2
The longitudinal tensile test specimen may be subjected to a temperature not exceeding 250℃ for a period not exceeding 16
hours for hydrogen removal prior to testing.
3
Tensile strength of U2A or U2B test specimen is to be as given in Table M6.19 of 6.3.8 according to the grades of one side
automatic welding consumables. Tensile strength, yielding point and elongation of U1A longitudinal tensile test specimens are to
be as given in Table M6.17 of 6.3.8 according to the grades of one side automatic welding consumables. Where the upper limit of
tensile strength is exceeded, special consideration will be given to the approval of the welding consumables, taking the other
mechanical properties shown in the test results and the chemical composition of deposited metal into consideration.
109
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
6.6.7
Butt Weld Bend Test with One-run and Multi-run Technique
The bend tests are to be in accordance with the requirements in 6.3.12.
6.6.8
1
Butt Weld Impact Test with One-run and Multi-run Technique
Two sets of impact test specimens to be U4 test specimens as shown in Table K2.5 are to be taken from each test assembly.
Longitudinal direction of the test specimen is to be perpendicular to the weld line and each position from which the test specimens are
taken is to be (a) and (b) as shown in Fig. M6.15.
2
Testing temperature and the value of minimum mean absorbed energy are to meet the requirements of Table M6.18 according
to the grades of one side automatic welding consumables.
3
The requirements in the preceding 6.2.7-2 and 6.2.7-4 are also to be applied to this paragraph.
Fig. M6.15
Position of Impact Test Specimen for Butt Weld with One-run and Multi-run Technique
(Unit: mm, t=Plate thickness)
6.6.9
1
Butt Weld Macro-etching Test with One-run and Multi-run Technique
Macro-etching test specimens are to be taken as shown in Fig. M6.14. The surface to be tested is to be normal to the surface of
the test assembly.
2
Both the welded parts and the weld junctions are to show complete fusion, penetration and sound metallurgical structure.
6.6.10
Hydrogen Test
The hydrogen tests are to be in accordance with the requirements specified in 6.2.11.
6.6.11
1
Annual Inspections
In the annual inspection, tests specified in the following -2 and -3 are to be conducted for each approved brand, and the
consumables are to meet the corresponding requirements.
2
The kinds of tests in the annual inspection are to be as given in Table M6.39.
3
The welding process and requirements of test assemblies used for test specified in the preceding -2 are to be in accordance with
the requirements in 6.6.5 through 6.6.8.
110
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.39 Kinds of Test at Annual Inspection
Grade of
Welding
Kinds of
Test assembly
Kind and number of test
(3)
welding
consumable
process
test
Number
Dimension
Thickness
(mm)
specimens taken from test assembly
Tensile test specimen : 1
KAW1
KAW2
Longitudinal tensile test specimen : 1
One-run
KAW3
1
technique
KAW51
20
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
KAW52
Impact test specimen : 3 (1)
KAW53
Tensile test specimen : 1
KAW54
Longitudinal tensile test
KAW52Y40
Multi-run
Butt weld (2)
KAW53Y40
technique
test
1
Fig. M6.14
20～25
specimen : 1
Face bend test specimen : 1
KAW54Y40
Root bend test specimen : 1
KAW55Y40
Impact test specimen : 3 (1)
KAW63Y47
Tensile test specimen : 1
KAWL1
One-run
KAWL2
and
KAWL3
Multi-run
KAWL91
technique
Longitudinal tensile test
20～25
1
specimen : 1
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Impact test specimen : 3 (1)
KAWL92
Notes:
(1) The positions of notch and selection of impact test specimens are to be as given in Fig. M6.15(b).
(2) The butt weld tests for one-run and multi-run technique are to be carried out by one-run technique.
(3) Thicknesses of KE47 steel used as test specimens may be reduced to the thicknesses in the table by machining before
welding.
6.6.12
Changes in Grades
Where changes in grades relating to the strength or toughness of approved one side automatic welding consumables are to be
made, all the tests specified in 6.6.4-1 are to be carried out according to the requirements in 6.1.3-6, and one side automatic welding
consumables must pass the tests satisfactorily.
6.7
6.7.1
Welding Consumables for Stainless Steel
Application
Welding consumables for stainless steels (hereinafter referred to as “welding consumables” in 6.7) are to be subjected to the
approval tests and annual inspections in accordance with the requirements in 6.7.
6.7.2
Grades and Marks of Welding Consumables*
1
Welding consumables are classified into grades as given in Table M6.40.
2
Submerged arc welding consumables which have passed the tests for each welding process given in Table M6.42 are appended
with suffixes shown in Table M6.41 at the end of their marks.
3
For fluxed wire semi-automatic welding consumables in the preceding -1, a suffix G will be added to the grade marks of welding
consumables which use shield gas, and a suffix N will be added to the grade marks of welding consumables which do not use shield
gas. Further, the type of shield gas used is to be specified in Table M6.14 of 6.3.2-3, and the suffix given in the table will be added after
suffix G. (Example: KW308G (c))
4
For welding consumables of which the specified minimum proof stress is altered to other value subject to the approval of the
Society, the value and “M” is to be suffixed to the grade marks of welding consumables. (Example: KW308G(C)-315M)
111
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.40 Grades and Marks of Welding Consumables
Electrode for
Consumable
Flux wire
Consumable
manual
for TIG and
semi-automatic
for
MIG welding
welding
submerged
arc
welding
arc welding
KD308
KY308
KW308
KU308
KD308L
KY308L
KW308L
KU308L
KD308N2
KY308N2
KW308N2
-
KD309
KY309
KW309
KU309
KD309L
KY309L
KW309L
KU309L
KD309Mo
KY309Mo
KW309Mo
KU309Mo
KD309MoL
-
KW309MoL
-
KD310
KY310
KW310
KU310
-
KY310S
-
-
KD310Mo
-
-
-
KD316
KY316
KW316
KU316
KD316L
KY316L
KW316L
KU316L
KD317
KY317
KW317
KU317
KD317L
KY317L
KW317L
KU317L
-
KY321
-
-
KD329J1
-
-
-
KD329J4L
KY329J4L
KW329J4L
-
KD2209
KY2209
KW2209
-
KD347
KY347
KW347
KU347
Table M6.41 Suffix
Welding process
Multi-run technique
Suffix
M
Two-run technique
T
Multi-run and Two-run technique
TM
112
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.42 Kinds of Test of Welding Consumables for Stainless Steel
Kind of
welding
consumables
Test assembly
Kind of test
Deposited
metal test
Electrode for
manual arc
welding
Butt weld
test
Deposited
metal test
Consumables
for TIG
welding
Butt weld
test
Deposited
metal test
Consumables
for MIG
welding
Butt weld
test
Deposited
metal test
Flux wire for
semi-automatic
welding
Butt weld
test
Welding
position
Flat
Dia. of
electrode or
wire(1) (mm)
3.2
4.0
No.
Dimension
1
Fig. M6.16
Flat
1
Horizontal
1
Vertical
upward
3.2 or 4.0
1
Vertical
downward
1
Overhead
1
2.4
Flat
1
1
2.0~3.2
1
Vertical
downward
1
Overhead
1
1.2
1
1.6
1
Flat
1
Horizontal
1
Vertical
upward
1.2~2.0
1
Vertical
downward
1
Overhead
1
3.2 or
max. dia.
Tensile test specimen : 1
Tensile test specimen : 1
Fig. M6.17
Fig. M6.16
9~12
12
19
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Tensile test specimen : 1
Tensile test specimen : 1
Fig. M6.17
9~12
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Fig. M6.16
Tensile test specimen : 1
19
Flat
1
1
1.2~3.2
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
12
1
Horizontal
Vertical
upward
9~12
19
1.2~2.4
Flat
Tensile test specimen : 1
12
1
Horizontal
Flat
19
Fig. M6.16
3.2
Vertical
upward
12
Kind and number of test
specimens taken from test
assembly
Tensile test specimen : 1
Fig. M6.17
1
Flat
Thickness
(mm)
1
Vertical
downward
1
Overhead
1
113
Tensile test specimen : 1
Fig. M6.17
9~12
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Multi-run
technique
Kind of
welding
consumables
Test assembly
Kind of
test
Welding
position
Dia. of
electrode or
wire(1) (mm)
No.
Dimension
Thickness
(mm)
Deposited
metal test
Flat
1.2~4.0
1
Fig. M6.16
19~25
Butt weld
test
Flat
1.2~4.0
1
Fig. M6.18(a)
19
Flat
1.2~2.4
1
Kind and number of test
specimens taken from test
assembly
Tensile test specimen : 1
Tensile test specimen : 1
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Consumables for sub-merged arc welding
Two-run
technique
Tensile test specimen : 1
Butt weld
test
12
Fig. M6.18(b)
Flat
4.0
1
19
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Tensile test specimen : 1
Longitudinal
tensile
specimen : 1
test
Multi-run and Two-run technique
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Deposited
metal test
Flat
1.2~4.0
1
Fig. M6.16
19~25
Butt weld
test
(Multi-run)
Flat
1.2~4.0
1
Fig. M6.18(a)
19
Tensile test specimen : 1
Tensile test specimen : 1
Flat
1.2~2.4
1
Butt weld
test
(Two-run)
12
4.0
1
Tensile test specimen : 1
Longitudinal
tensile
specimen: 1
test
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Fig. M6.18(b)
Flat
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
19
Tensile test specimen : 1
Longitudinal
tensile
specimen: 1
test
Face bend test specimen : 1
Root bend test specimen : 1
Note:
(1) Where approval is granted by the Society, the diameter of electrodes or wires may be changed.
6.7.3
1
Approval Test
For the approval of welding consumables, the tests specified in 6.7.4-1 are to be conducted for each brand of welding
consumables.
2
For fluxed wire semi-automatic welding consumables, which use shield gas, the test in the preceding -1 is to be performed for
each type of gas given in Table M6.14. Although, when the manufacturer of the consumables recommends gas types of the group of
M1, M2 or M3 in Table M6.14, the approval test is referred to one of the following procedures.
(1) When the test is conducted in accordance with the preceding -1 on one of the gas type, the test on the other gas types belonging
to the same category are allowed to be dispensed with.
(2) When the consumables is specified as applicable to any combination of the groups of M1, M2 or M3, the test is allowed to limit
any one of the gas types of M1, M2 and M3 in accordance with the preceding -1, subject to the agreement of the Society.
6.7.4
1
General Provisions for Tests
Kinds of test, number, thickness and dimensions of test assemblies, diameter of wire used for welding, and the kinds and number
of test specimens taken from each test assembly in each welding position for welding consumables are to be given in Table M6.42.
However, additional tests according to steels, such as test on corrosion-resistance test, impact test, macro etching test, etc., except the
test given in the table may be required where considered necessary by the Society.
2
The steels used for tests are to be of those grades of steel specified in Table M6.43 according to types of welding consumables,
or those considered to be equivalent by the Society.
114
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.43 Grades of Steel for Test Assembly
Grade of welding consumable
Grade of steel for test assembly
KD308，KY308，KW308，KU308
KSUS304，KSUS304L
KD308L，KY308L，KW308L，KU308L
KD308N2，KY308N2，KW308N2
KSUS304N2
KD309，KY309，KW309，KU309
KD309L，KY309L，KW309L，KU309L
KSUS309S
KD309Mo，KY309Mo，KW309Mo，KU309Mo
KD309MoL，KW309MoL
KD310，KY310，KW310，KU310
KY310S
KSUS310S
KD310Mo
KD316，KY316，KW316，KU316
KSUS316，KSUS316L
KD316L，KY316L，KW316L，KU316L
KD317，KY317，KW317，KU317
KSUS317，KSUS317L
KD317L，KY317L，KW317L，KU317L
KY321
KSUS321
KD329J1
KSUS329J1
KD329J4L，KY329J4L，KW329J4L
KSUS329J4L
KD2209，KY2209，KW2209
KSUS323L，KSUS329J3L，KSUS821L1
KD347，KY347，KW347，KU347
KSUS321，KSUS347
Note:
Notwithstanding the requirements in this table, mild steel or high tensile steel may be used for deposited metal test assembly.
In this case, appropriate buttering is to be carried out for test assembly.
6.7.5
1
Welding Sequence of Test Assemblies
Deposited metal test assemblies (Fig. M6.16)
(1) Test assemblies are to be welded in flat position according to the welding process recommended by the manufacturer.
(2) After each run, the test assembly is to be left in still air until it has cooled to less than 150℃, but not below 15℃, the temperature
being taken at the centre of weld on the surface of seam.
2
Butt weld test assemblies (Fig. M6.17 and Fig. M6.18)
(1) Test assemblies are to be welded in each welding position (flat, horizontal, vertical upward, vertical downward and overhead)
which is recommended by the manufacturer.
(2) After each run, the assembly is to be left in still air until it has cooled to less than 150℃, but not below 15℃, the temperature
being taken at the centre of weld on the surface of seam.
3
After being welded, the test assemblies are not to be subjected to any heat treatment.
4
The welded assemblies may be subjected to radiographic examination prior to taking specimen from the assembly.
115
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Fig. M6.16
Fig. M6.17
Deposited Metal Test Assembly (Unit: mm)
Butt Weld Test Assembly for Electrode for Manual Arc Welding, Consumables MIG and TIG Welding Consumables
and Flux Wire for Semi-automatic Welding (Unit: mm )
116
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Fig. M6.18
6.7.6
1
Butt Weld Test Assembly for Submerged Arc Welding (Unit: mm)
Chemical Composition
Electrodes for manual arc welding and welding consumables for fluxed wire semi-automatic welding and for submerged arc
welding are to have the chemical composition deposited metal analysis value complied with the requirements as given in Table M6.44,
Table M6.46 and Table M6.47.
2
TIG welding consumables and MIG welding consumables are to have chemical composition of ladle analysis value complied
with the requirements as given in Table M6.45.
6.7.7
1
Deposited Metal Tensile Test
The tensile test specimen is to be 1B or 1C specimen shown in Table M3.1, and test specimen is to be taken from each test
assembly. Further, where approved by the Society, one U1A tensile test specimen may be taken, care being taken that the longitudinal
axis coincides with the centre of weld and the thickness. (Fig. M6.16)
2
The tensile test specimens may be heated at below 250℃ for 16 hours or less before conducting the tests for removing hydrogen.
117
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
3
The tensile strength, yield point and elongation of the test specimens are to be complied with the requirements of Table M6.48,
according to the grades of welding material. However, the specified value of the minimum proof stress may be altered to other values
subject to the approval of the Society.
Table M6.44 Chemical Composition of Deposited Metal for Electrodes
Grade
KD308
KD308L
KD308N2
C
0.08 max.
0.04 max.
0.10 max.
Si
0.90 max.
0.90 max.
0.90 max.
Chemical composition of deposited metal (%)
Mn
P
S
Ni
Cr
2.50 max.
0.04 max. 0.03 max. 9.0~11.0
18.0~21.0
2.50 max.
0.04 max. 0.03 max. 9.0~12.0
18.0~21.0
1.00~4.00 0.04 max. 0.03 max. 7.0~11.0
20.0~25.0
KD309
KD309L
KD309Mo
KD309MoL
KD310
KD310Mo
KD316
KD316L
KD317
KD317L
0.15 max.
0.04 max.
0.12 max.
0.04 max.
0.20 max.
0.12 max.
0.08 max.
0.04 max.
0.08 max.
0.04 max.
0.90 max.
0.90 max.
0.90 max.
0.90 max.
0.75 max.
0.75 max.
0.90 max.
0.90 max.
0.90 max.
0.90 max.
2.50 max.
2.50 max.
2.50 max.
2.50 max.
2.50 max.
2.50 max.
2.50 max.
2.50 max.
2.50 max.
2.50 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
12.0~14.0
12.0~16.0
12.0~14.0
12.0~14.0
20.0~22.0
20.0~22.0
11.0~14.0
11.0~16.0
12.0~14.0
12.0~16.0
22.0~25.0
22.5~25.0
22.0~25.0
22.0~25.0
25.0~28.0
25.0~28.0
17.0~20.0
17.0~20.0
18.0~21.0
18.0~21.0
2.0~3.0
2.0~3.0
2.0~3.0
2.0~2.75
2.0~2.75
3.0~4.0
3.0~4.0
Others
N 0.12
~0.30
-
KD329J1
0.08 max.
0.90 max.
1.50 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
6.0~8.0
23.0~28.0
1.0~3.0
-
KD329J4L
0.04 max.
1.00 max.
0.5~2.5
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
8.0~11.0
23.0~27.0
3.0~4.5
Mo
-
Cu:
1.0 max.
N:
0.08~0.30
W:
2.5 max.
KD2209
0.04 max.
1.00 max.
0.5~2.0
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
7.5~10.5
21.5~23.5
2.5~3.5
Cu:
0.75 max.
N:
KD347
0.08 max.
0.90 max.
2.50 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
118
9.0~11.0
18.0~21.0
-
0.08~0.20
Nb8×
C(%)~1.0
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.45 Chemical Composition of Deposited Metal for TIG Electrodes or MIG Wires
Grade
KY308
C
0.08 max.
Si
0.65 max.
Chemical composition of deposited metal (%)
Mn
P
S
Ni
Cr
1.0~2.5
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
9.0~11.0
19.5~22.0
Mo
-
Others
-
1.0~2.5
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
9.0~11.0
19.5~22.0
-
-
(1)
KY308L
0.03 max.
0.65 max.
(1)
KY308N2
0.10 max.
0.90 max.
1.0~4.0
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
7.0~11.0
20.0~25.0
-
KY309
0.12 max.
0.65 max.
1.0~2.5
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
12.0~14.0
23.0~25.0
-
N 0.12
~0.30
-
1.0~2.5
1.0~2.5
1.0~2.5
1.0~2.5
1.0~2.5
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
12.0~14.0
12.0~14.0
20.0~22.5
20.0~22.5
11.0~14.0
23.0~25.0
23.0~25.0
25.0~28.0
25.0~28.0
18.0~20.0
2.0~3.0
2.0~3.0
-
1.0~2.5
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
11.0~14.0
18.0~20.0
2.0~3.0
-
(1)
KY309L
KY309Mo
KY310
KY310S
KY316
0.03 max.
0.12 max.
0.15 max.
0.08 max.
0.08 max.
0.65 max.
0.65 max.
0.65 max.
0.65 max.
0.65 max.
(1)
KY316L
0.03 max.
0.65 max.
(1)
KY317
KY317L
KY321
0.08 max.
0.03 max.
0.08 max.
0.65 max.
0.65 max.
0.65 max.
1.0~2.5
1.0~2.5
1.0~2.5
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
13.0~15.0
13.0~15.0
9.0~10.5
18.0~20.5
18.0~20.5
18.0~20.5
3.0~4.0
3.0~4.0
-
Ti9×
C(%)~1.0
KY329J4L
0.03 max.
0.90 max.
0.5~2.5
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
8.0~11.0
23.0~27.0
3.0~4.5
Cu:
1.0 max.
N:
0.08~0.30
KY2209
0.03 max.
0.90 max.
0.5~2.0
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
7.5~9.5
21.5~23.5
2.5~3.5
Cu:
0.75 max.
N:
KY347
0.08 max.
0.65 max.
1.0~2.5
0.03 max.
(1)
0.03 max.
9.0~11.0
19.0~21.5
-
0.08~0.20
Nb10×
C(%)~1.0
Note:
(1) Where approved by the Society, the value of Si may be taken greater than 0.65% but not greater than 1.00%.
119
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.46 Chemical Composition of Deposited Metal for Semi-automatic Welding
(a)With Gas
Chemical composition of deposited metal (%)
P
S
Ni
Cr
0.04 max. 0.03 max. 9.0~11.0
18.0~21.0
0.04 max. 0.03 max. 9.0~12.0
18.0~21.0
0.04 max. 0.03 max. 7.0~11.0
20.0~25.0
Grade
KW308
KW308L
KW308N2
C
0.08 max.
0.04 max.
0.10 max.
Si
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
Mn
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
1.0~4.0
Mo
-
KW309
KW309L
KW309Mo
KW309MoL
KW310
KW316
KW316L
KW317
KW317L
0.10 max.
0.04 max.
0.12 max.
0.04 max.
0.20 max.
0.08 max.
0.04 max.
0.08 max.
0.04 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
12.0~14.0
12.0~14.0
12.0~14.0
12.0~14.0
20.0~22.0
11.0~14.0
11.0~14.0
12.0~14.0
12.0~16.0
22.0~25.0
22.0~25.0
22.0~25.0
22.0~25.0
25.0~28.0
17.0~20.0
17.0~20.0
18.0~21.0
18.0~21.0
2.0~3.0
2.0~3.0
2.0~3.0
2.0~3.0
3.0~4.0
3.0~4.0
Others
N 0.12
~0.30
-
KW329J4L
0.04 max.
1.0 max.
0.5~2.0
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
8.0~11.0
23.0~27.0
2.5~4.0
Cu:
-
1.0 max.
N:
0.08~0.30
KW2209
0.04 max.
1.0 max.
0.5~2.0
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
7.5~10.0
21.0~24.0
2.5~4.0
Cu:
0.5 max.
N:
KW347
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
9.0~11.0
18.0~21.0
-
Chemical composition of deposited metal (%)
P
S
Ni
Cr
0.04 max. 0.03 max. 9.0~11.0
19.5~22.0
0.04 max. 0.03 max. 9.0~12.0
19.5~22.0
0.04 max. 0.03 max. 7.0~11.0
20.0~25.0
Mo
-
0.08~0.20
Nb 8×
C (%)~1.0
0.08 max.
1.0 max.
0.5~2.5
Grade
KW308
KW308L
KW308N2
C
0.08 max.
0.04 max.
0.10 max.
Si
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
Mn
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
1.0~4.0
KW309
KW309L
KW309Mo
KW309MoL
KW310
KW316
KW316L
KW317
KW317L
0.10 max.
0.04 max.
0.12 max.
0.04 max.
0.20 max.
0.08 max.
0.04 max.
0.08 max.
0.04 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.5~2.5
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
12.0~14.0
12.0~14.0
12.0~14.0
12.0~14.0
20.0~22.0
11.0~14.0
11.0~14.0
13.0~15.0
13.0~15.0
23.0~25.5
23.0~25.5
22.0~25.0
22.0~25.0
25.0~28.0
18.0~20.5
18.0~20.5
18.5~21.0
18.5~21.0
2.0~3.0
2.0~3.0
2.0~3.0
2.0~3.0
3.0~4.0
3.0~4.0
Others
N 0.12
~0.30
-
KW2209
0.04 max.
1.0 max.
0.5~2.0
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
7.5~10.0
21.0~24.0
2.5~4.0
Cu:
(b)Without Gas
-
0.5 max.
N:
KW347
0.08 max.
1.0 max.
0.5~2.5
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
120
9.0~11.0
19.0~21.5
-
0.08~0.20
Nb 8×
C (%)~1.0
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.47 Chemical Composition of Deposited Metal for Submerged Arc Welding
Chemical composition of deposited metal (%)
Grade
C
Si
Mn
P
S
Ni
Cr
Mo
Others
KU308
0.08 max.
1.0 max.
2.5 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
9.0~11.0
18.0~21.0
-
-
KU308L
0.04 max.
1.0 max.
2.5 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
9.0~12.0
18.0~21.0
-
-
KU309
0.15 max.
1.0 max.
2.5 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
12.0~14.0
22.0~25.0
-
-
KU309L
0.04 max.
1.0 max.
2.5 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
12.0~14.0
22.5~25.0
-
-
KU309Mo
0.12 max.
1.0 max.
2.5 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
12.0~14.0
22.0~25.0
2.0~3.0
-
KU310
0.20 max.
1.0 max.
2.5 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
20.0~22.0
25.0~28.0
-
-
KU316
0.08 max.
1.0 max.
2.5 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
11.0~14.0
17.0~20.0
2.0~2.75
-
KU316L
0.04 max.
1.0 max.
2.5 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
11.0~16.0
17.0~20.0
2.0~2.75
-
KU317
0.08 max.
1.0 max.
2.5 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
12.0~14.0
18.0~21.0
3.0~4.0
-
KU317L
0.04 max.
1.0 max.
2.5 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
12.0~16.0
18.0~21.0
3.0~4.0
-
KU347
0.08 max.
1.0 max.
2.5 max.
0.04 max.
0.03 max.
9.0~11.0
18.0~21.0
-
Nb 8×
C (%)~1.0
Table M6.48 Tensile Test Requirements for Deposited Metal
Electrode for
TIG and MIG
Flux wire for
Submerged arc
manual arc
welding
semi-automatic
welding
welding
consumable
welding
consumable
KD308
KY308
KW308
KD308L
KY308L
KD308N2
Tensile strength
2
0.2%proof
Elongation (%)
2
(N/mm )
stress (N/mm )
KU308
550 min.
225 min.
35 min.
KW308L
KU308L
510 min.
205 min.
35 min.
KY308N2
KW308N2
-
690 min.
375 min.
25 min.
KD309
KY309
KW309
KU309
550 min.
225 min.
30 min.
KD309L
KY309L
KW309L
KU309L
510 min.
205 min.
30 min.
KD309Mo
KY309Mo
KW309Mo
KU309Mo
550 min.
225 min.
30 min.
KD309MoL
-
KW309MoL
-
510 min.
205 min.
30(1)min.
KD310
KY310
KW310
KU310
550 min.
225 min.
30 min.
-
KY310S
-
-
550 min.
225 min.
30 min.
KD310Mo
-
-
-
550 min.
225 min.
30 min.
KD316
KY316
KW316
KU316
550 min.
225 min.
30 min.
KD316L
KY316L
KW316L
KU316L
510 min.
205 min.
35 min.
KD317
KY317
KW317
KU317
550 min.
225 min.
30 min.
KD317L
KY317L
KW317L
KU317L
510 min.
205 min.
30 min.
-
KY321
-
-
550 min.
225 min.
30 min.
KD329J1
-
-
-
590 min.
390 min.
15 min.
KD329J4L
KY329J4L
KW329J4L
-
690 min.
450 min.
15 min.
KD2209
KY2209
KW2209
-
690 min.
450 min.
15 min.
KD347
KY347
KW347
KU347
550 min.
225 min.
30 min.
Note:
(1) Elongation of KW309MoL is not be less than 20(%).
6.7.8
1
Butt Weld Tensile Test
The tensile test specimen are to be U2A or U2B specimen shown in Table M3.1, and test specimen is to be taken from each test
assembly.
2
The tensile strength of each test specimen is to comply with the requirements given in Table M6.49.
3
Submerged arc welding consumables used only in the two-run technique are to be selected as U1A tensile test specimens of
121
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M3.1, such that the longitudinal centre line of the test specimen from centre of thickness coincide with the weld centre line of
the test assemblies and centre of thickness.
4
The longitudinal tensile test specimens specified in the preceding -3 may be heated at below 250℃ for 16 hours or less before
conducting the tests for removing hydrogen.
5
The requirements for tensile tests specified in the preceding -3 and -4 are to be given in Table M6.48. However, the specified
value of the minimum proof stress may be altered to other value subject to the approval of the Society.
6.7.9
1
Bend Test of Butt Welds*
The face bend and root bend test specimens are to be UB-6 specimen shown in Table M3.1, and test specimens are to be taken
from each assembly. (Fig. M6.17 and Fig. M6.18)
2
The test specimens are to be capable of withstanding without crack exceeding 3mm long on the outer surface of the specimen
or other defects, being bent through an angle 120 degrees over a former having a radius of 1.5 times the thickness of test specimen.
3
For the test specified in the preceding -1 and -2, longitudinal bend test deemed appropriate by the Society may be accepted.
6.7.10
1
Annual Inspections
In the annual inspections, tests specified in the following -2, and -3, are conducted for each approved brand, and the welding
consumables are to be passed these tests satisfactorily.
2
The kinds of tests etc. involved in the annual inspections are to be as given in Table M6.50.
3
The welding procedure and requirements of test assemblies specified in 6.7.5 through 6.7.9.
Table M6.49 Tensile Test Requirements for Butt Weld
Tensile strength (N/mm2 )
Electrode for manual
TIG and MIG welding
Flux wire for
Submerged arc welding
arc welding
consumable
semi-automatic welding
consumable
KD308
KY308
KW308
KU308
520 min. (1)
KD308L
KY308L
KW308L
KU308L
520 min. (1)
KD308N2
KY308N2
KW308N2
－
690 min.
KD309
KY309
KW309
KU309
520 min.
KD309L
KY309L
KW309L
KU309L
520 min.
KD309Mo
KY309Mo
KW309Mo
KU309Mo
520 min.
KD309MoL
－
KW309MoL
－
520 min.
KD310
KY310
KW310
KU310
520 min.
－
KY310S
－
－
520 min.
KD310Mo
－
－
－
520 min.
KD316
KY316
KW316
KU316
520 min. (1)
KD316L
KY316L
KW316L
KU316L
520 min. (1)
KD317
KY317
KW317
KU317
520 min. (1)
KD317L
KY317L
KW317L
KU317L
520 min. (1)
－
KY321
－
－
520 min.
KD329J1
－
－
－
590 min.
KD329J4L
KY329J4L
KW329J4L
－
620 min.
KD2209
KY2209
KW2209
－
620 min. (2)
KD347
KY347
KW347
KU347
520 min.
Notes:
(1) Where the test assembly is made of KSU304L, KSU316L and KSU317L, the tensile strength is not to be less than
480 N/mm 2.
(2) Where the test assembly is made of KSU323L and KSU821L1, tensile strength is not to be less than 600 N/mm 2.
122
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.50 Kinds of Test at Annual Inspections
Test assembly
Kind of welding
Kind of test
consumables
Welding
Dia.
of
position
electrode or
Number
Kind and number
Dimensions
Thickness
of test specimens taken
(mm)
from test assembly
wire (mm)
Electrode for manual
Deposition
arc welding
metal test
TIG welding consumable
Deposition
Flat
3.2~4.0
1
Fig. M6.16
12~19
Tensile test specimen : 1
Flat
2.4~3.2
1
Fig. M6.16
12~19
Tensile test specimen : 1
Flat
1.2~1.6
1
Fig. M6.16
12~19
Tensile test specimen : 1
Flat
1.2~3.2
1
Fig. M6.16
12~19
Tensile test specimen : 1
Flat
1.2~4.0
1
Fig. M6.16
19~25
Tensile test specimen : 1
Flat
2.4~4.0
1
Fig. M6.18
12~19
Tensile test specimen : 1
metal test
MIG welding
Deposition
consumable
metal test
Flux wire for
Deposition
semi-automatic welding
metal test
Multi-run
Deposition
technique
metal test
Consumable
Two-run
Butt weld
for
technique
test
(b)
Longitudinal tensile test
submerged
specimen : 1
arc welding
Face bend specimen : 1
Root bend specimen : 1
Multi-run
Deposition
and
metal test
Two-run
Butt weld
technique
test
Flat
1.2~4.0
1
Fig. M6.16
19~25
Tensile test specimen : 1
Flat
2.4~4.0
1
Fig. M6.18
12~19
Tensile test specimen : 1
(b)
Fracture bend specimen :
1
Root bend specimen : 1
6.8
Welding Consumables for Aluminium Alloys
6.8.1
Application
Welding consumables used for aluminium alloys mentioned in the following (1) and (2) (hereinafter referred to as “welding
consumables” in 6.8) are to be subjected to the approval tests and annual inspections in accordance with the requirements of this
paragraph.
(1) Rod-gas combinations for tungsten inert gas arc welding (TIG welding) or plasma arc welding
(2) Wire electrode and wire gas combinations for metal-arc inert gas welding (MIG welding), tungsten inert gas arc welding or
plasma arc welding
6.8.2
Grades and Marks of Welding Consumables
1
Grades and marks of welding consumables are classified as given in Table M6.51.
2
Welding consumables using a specific shielding gas are to be suffixed with “G” at the end of the mark. Kinds of the shielding
gases are classified as shown in Table M6.52 and the kind is to be suffixed following to the mark “G”. (e.g. KAl5RBG(I-3))
Table M6.51 Grades and Marks
Kind of Welding consumables
Grade and Mark
Electrode
KAl5RA, KAl5RB, KAl5RC, KAl6RD
Wire
KAl5WA, KAl5WB, KAl5WC, KAl6WD
123
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.52 Kind of Gas
Group
Kind
Gas composition (%)
I-1
I
E
6.8.3
1
He
Ar
－
100
I-2
100
－
I-3
1～33
Rest
I-4
34～66
Rest
I-5
67～95
Rest
E-1
Other
Approval Test
For the approval of welding consumables, the tests specified in 6.8.4-1 are to be successfully conducted for each brand of
welding consumables.
2
For welding consumables using a shielding gas, the tests specified in -1 are to be conducted for each kind of gas designated
among Table M6.52 by the manufacturer. However, where the manufacturer designates several kinds of gas which are classified into
the group I in Table M6.52 and the tests specified in -1 are to be conducted for any one kind of gas, the tests for the other kind of gas
may be dispensed with subject to the approval of the Society.
3
When the manufacturer designated the gas classified into the group E in the tests specified in -2, the composition of the shielding
gas is to be reported to the Society.
6.8.4
1
General Provisions of Tests
Kinds of test, welding position, number, thickness and dimensions of test assemblies, kind and number of test specimen taken
from each test assembly for welding consumables are to be given in Table M6.53.
2
The aluminium alloys used in preparation for test assembly corresponding to welding consumables are to as given in Table
M6.54.
Table M6.53 Kinds of Test for Welding Consumables
Kind of test
Deposited metal test
(Chemical composition test)
Test assembly
Welding
position
Number
Dimension
Thickness
(mm)
Flat
1
Fig. M6.19
－
Flat
1
(1)
Butt weld test
Horizontal
1
Vertical upward
Overhead
1
1
Flat
1
Kind and number of test specimens
taken from test assembly
－
Tensile test specimen : 2
Fig. M6.20
10～12
Face bend test specimen : 2
Root bend test specimen : 2
Macro-etching test specimen : 1
Fig. M6.21
20～25
Tensile test specimen : 2
Face bend test specimen : 2
Root bend test specimen : 2
Macro-etching test specimen : 1
Note:
(1) Welding consumables satisfying the requirements for flat and vertical upward positions may be dispensed with the tests
for horizontal position subject to the approval of the Society.
124
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.54 Grade of Aluminium Alloys Used for Test Assembly
Grade of aluminium alloys used for test assembly(1)
Grade of welding consumable
KAl5RA，KAl5WA
5754P-O
KAl5RB，KAl5WB
5086P-O
5000 series
KAl5RC，KAl5WC
5083P-O
5383P-O
5456P-O
5059P-O
6005AS
KAl6RD，KAl6WD
6000 series
(2)
6061S
6082S
Notes:
(1) Material symbols of aluminium alloys include the symbols of which is the temper condition.
(2) Other rolled aluminium alloys of 6000 series with tensile strength 260 N/mm 2 may be used.
6.8.5
1
Welding Sequence of Test Assemblies
Deposited weld metal test assembly (Fig. M6.19)
(1) The test assemblies are to be welded in flat position in accordance with the welding process designated by the manufacturer.
(2) The size of test assembly corresponding to the welding consumables and welding process is to be of being taken a sufficient
amount of pure weld metal for chemical analysis.
2
Butt weld test assemblies (Fig. M6.20 and Fig. M6.21)
(1) The test assemblies are to be welded in each welding position designated by the manufacturer (downhand, horizontal, vertical upward and overhead). The test assembly as shown by Fig. M6.21 is to be welded in the downhand position.
(2) On completion of each run, the test assemblies are to be allowed to cool naturally in air until the temperature measured at the
surface of the centre of the welding joint is ambient temperature. However, the test assemblies for KAl6RD and KAl6WD are to
be allowed to naturally ageing for a minimum period of 72 hours from the completion of welding before testing is carried out.
3
The test assemblies are not to be subjected to any heat treatment.
4
The welded assemblies may be subjected to a radiographic examination prior to taking test specimens from the test assemblies.
6.8.6
Chemical Composition
The chemical composition of the welding consumables is to be determined by the analysis of the deposited weld metal specified
in Fig. M6.19 and the results of the analysis are to comply with the limit value specified by the manufacturer.
Fig. M6.19
6.8.7
1
Deposited Weld Metal Test Assembly (Unit: mm)
Butt Weld Tensile Test
The tensile test specimens are to be U2A or U2B specimen shown in Fig. M3.1 and two test specimens are to be taken from
each assembly.
2
The tensile strength corresponding to the grade of welding consumables is to comply with the requirements as given in Table
M6.55.
125
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.55 Tensile Test Requirements
Grade of welding consumable Tensile strength (N/mm 2)
190 min
KAl5RA，KAl5WA
240 min
KAl5RB，KAl5WB
275 min(1)
290 min(2)
KAl5RC，KAl5WC
330 min(3)
170 min
KAl6RD，KAl6WD
Notes:
(1) For test specimens of grade 5083P-O
(2) For test specimens of grade 5383P-O or 5456P-O
(3) For test specimens of grade 5059P-O
6.8.8
1
Butt Weld Bend Test
The face bend and root bend test specimens are to be UB-6 specimen shown in Table M3.2 and two test specimens are to be
taken from each assembly.
2
The test specimens are to sustain the face and root bend tests over 180 degrees using a former having a diameter in accordance
with Table M6.56, without cracks exceeding 3 mm in length and other any defects on the outer surface.
Table M6.56 Former Diameter of Bend Test
Grade of welding consumable
Former diameter (mm)(1)
KAl5RA, KAl5WA
3t
KAl5RB, KAl5WB
KAl5RC, KAl5WC
6t
KAl6RD, KAl6WD
Note:
(1) t: Thickness of the test specimen (mm)
6.8.9
1
Butt Weld Macro-etching Test
One macro-etching test specimen as shown in Fig. M6.20 and Fig. M6.21 is to be taken from the butt weld test assembly. The
surface to be tested is to be normal to the surface of the test assembly.
2
The welding joint of macro etching test specimen is to be examined that there are not any imperfections such as lack of fusion,
cavities, inclusions, pores or cracks.
126
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Fig. M6.20
Butt Weld Test Assembly with a Thickness of 10 to 12 mm (Unit: mm)
Notes:
(1) Back sealing runs are allowed in single V weld assemblies.
(2) In case of double V assembly both sides are to be welded in the same welding position.
127
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Fig. M6.21
Butt Weld Test Assembly with a Thickness of 20 to 25 mm (Unit: mm)
Note :
(1) Back sealing runs are allowed.
6.8.10
1
Annual Inspections
In the annual inspections, every approved welding consumable is to be subjected to the tests provided in -2 and are to be
successfully examined.
2
Kinds of tests in the annual inspections are to be as given in Table M6.57.
3
The welding procedure and requirements for test assemblies specified in -2 are to be in accordance with the requirements in
6.8.5 to 6.8.9.
6.9
6.9.1
Welding Consumables for High Strength Rolled Steels for Offshore Structures
Application
Welding consumables for high strength rolled steels for offshore structures, which are given in following (1) through (3)
(hereinafter referred to as “welding consumables” in 6.9) the approval test and annual inspections are to be in accordance with the
128
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
requirements specified in 6.9.
(1) Electrodes for manual arc welding (specified in 6.2.1(1) and (2))
(2) Automatic welding consumables (specified in 6.3.1-1(1), (2) and (3). However, in this case, used only for multi-run technique
in principle.)
(3) Semi-automatic welding consumables
Table M6.57 Kinds of Tests in Annual Inspections
Kind of test
Test assembly
Welding
position
Deposited weld metal test
(Chemical composition Analysis)
Flat
Number
Dimensions
1
Fig. M6.19
Kind and number of test
Thickness
specimens
(mm)
assembly
－
taken
from
test
－
Tensile test specimen : 2
Butt weld test
Flat
1
Fig. M6.20
10～12
Face bend test specimen : 2
Root bend test specimen : 2
Macro-etching test specimen : 1
6.9.2
Grades and Marks of Welding Consumables
1
Grades and marks of welding consumables are classified as give in Table M6.58.
2
Where the welding consumables have passed the test specified in 6.9.3, the suffixes are to be added to the grade marks with
same methods as specified in 6.2.2-2, 6.3.2-2 and -3 or 6.4.2-2, according to grade of welding consumables.
3
For low hydrogen electrodes which have passed the hydrogen test specified in 6.9.11 the suffixes given in Table M6.63 are to
be added to the grade marks (after the suffixes in the case of the preceding -2) of the said electrodes. (Example: KMW3Y46H5)
129
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.58 Kind and Grade
High Strength Rolled Steels for Offshore Structures
Electrode for manual arc
Welding consumables for
Welding consumables for
welding
Semi-automatic welding
automatic welding
KMW2Y42
KSW2Y42
KAW2Y42
KMW2Y46
KSW2Y46
KAW2Y46
KMW2Y50
KSW2Y50
KAW2Y50
KMW2Y55
KSW2Y55
KAW2Y55
KMW2Y62
KSW2Y62
KAW2Y62
KMW2Y69
KSW2Y69
KAW2Y69
KMW2Y89
KSW2Y89
KAW2Y89
KMW2Y96
KSW2Y96
KAW2Y96
KMW3Y42
KSW3Y42
KAW3Y42
KMW3Y46
KSW3Y46
KAW3Y46
KMW3Y50
KSW3Y50
KAW3Y50
KMW3Y55
KSW3Y55
KAW3Y55
KMW3Y62
KSW3Y62
KAW3Y62
KMW3Y69
KSW3Y69
KAW3Y69
KMW3Y89
KSW3Y89
KAW3Y89
KMW3Y96
KSW3Y96
KAW3Y96
KMW4Y42
KSW4Y42
KAW4W42
KMW4Y46
KSW4Y46
KAW4Y46
KMW4Y50
KSW4Y50
KAW4Y50
KMW4Y55
KSW4Y55
KAW4Y55
KMW4Y62
KSW4Y62
KAW4Y62
KMW4Y69
KSW4Y69
KAW4Y69
KMW4Y89
KSW4Y89
KAW4Y89
KMW4Y96
KSW4Y96
KAW4Y96
KMW5Y42
KSW5Y42
KAW5Y42
KMW5Y46
KSW5Y46
KAW5Y46
KMW5Y50
KSW5Y50
KAW5Y50
KMW5Y55
KSW5Y55
KAW5Y55
KMW5Y62
KSW5Y62
KAW5Y62
KMW5Y69
KSW5Y69
KAW5Y69
6.9.3
Approval Test
For the approval of welding consumables, the tests specified in 6.2.3, 6.3.3 or 6.4.3 are to be conducted for each brand of
welding consumables.
6.9.4
1
General Provisions for Tests
Kinds of test, number, thickness, and dimensions of test assembles, diameters of electrodes or wires used for welding and
welding positions, together with kinds and number of test specimens taken from each test assembly for welding consumables are to be
in accordance with the requirements specified given in 6.2.4, 6.3.4 or 6.4.4. However, Note(4) of TableM6.2 and Note(3) of Table
M6.22 are not to be required. Provisions for automatic welding consumables are to be the requirements specified multi-run technique.
2
In addition to the test specified in -1 above, the hydrogen test specified in 6.9.11 is to be carried out during the approval test,
notwithstanding Note(6) of TableM6.2, Note(2) of TableM6.3, Note(8) of TableM6.15 and Note(6) of TableM6.22.
3
The grades of steels used for tests are to be those given in Table M6.59 in corresponding to the grades of welding consumables,
or those which considered equivalent by the Society.
130
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.59 Grades of Steel for Test Assembly
Grades of welding consumables
KMW2Y42 ～ 96
KSW2Y42 ～ 96
KAW2Y42 ～ 96
KMW3Y42 ～ 96
KSW3Y42 ～ 96
KAW3Y42 ～ 96
KMW4Y42 ～ 96
KSW4Y42 ～ 96
KAW4Y42 ～ 96
KMW5Y42 ～ 69
KSW5Y42 ～ 69
KAW5Y42 ～ 69
Grade of steel for test assembly(1) (2)
KA420～KA960
KA420～KA960 or KD420～KD960
KA420～KA960, KD420～KD960 or KE420～KE960
KA420～KA690, KD420～KD690, KE420～KE690
or KF420～KF690
Note:
(1) Notwithstanding the requirements in this table, mild or high tensile steels may be used for deposited
metal test assembly. In this case, appropriate buttering is to be carried out.
(2) For butt weld test assemblies, a grade of steel having the same strength as the welding consumable is
to be used.
6.9.5
Welding Sequence of Test Assemblies
The welding sequence of test assemblies is to be in accordance with the requirements specified in 6.2.5, 6.3.5 or 6.4.5
appropriate to the grade of the welding consumables.
6.9.6
1
Deposited Metal Tensile Test
Kinds, numbers and selection methods of the deposited metal tensile test specimens being taken from each test assembly are to
comply with the requirements specified in 6.2.6-1, 6.3.6-1 or 6.4.6-1 according to the grade of the welding consumables.
2
The tensile strength, yield point (or proof stress) and elongation of each test specimen are to comply with the requirements
specified in Table M6.60 according to the grade of the welding consumables.
3
6.9.7
1
The provisions specified in the preceding 6.2.6-2 may be applied to the tensile test specimens.
Deposited Metal Impact Test
Kinds, numbers and selection methods of the deposited metal impact test specimens being taken from each test assembly are to
comply with the requirements specified in 6.2.7-1, 6.3.7-1 or 6.4.7-1 according to the grade of the welding consumables.
2
The test temperature and minimum mean absorbed energy are to comply with the requirements specified given in Table M6.60
according to the grade of the welding consumables.
3
The requirements specified in the preceding 6.2.7-2 and -4 are to be applied to this test.
131
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.60 Test Requirements for Deposited Metal
Tensile test
Grades of welding consumables
Tensile
Yield point or
strength
proof stress
(N/mm 2)
(N/mm 2)
Impact test
Elongation
（％）
temperature
(℃)
KMW2Y42,KSW2Y42,KAW2Y42
KMW3Y42,KSW3Y42,KAW3Y42
520～680
420 min.
energy(Ｊ)
-20
20 min.
KMW2Y46,KSW2Y46,KAW2Y46
-60
540～720
460 min.
-20
-40
KMW5Y46,KSW5Y46,KAW5Y46
-60
KMW2Y50,KSW2Y50,KAW2Y50
0
590～770
500 min.
-20
KMW4Y50,KSW4Y50,KAW4Y50
-40
KMW5Y50,KSW5Y50,KAW5Y50
-60
KMW2Y55,KSW2Y55,KAW2Y55
550 min.
18 min.
-20
-40
KMW5Y55,KSW5Y55,KAW5Y55
-60
KMW2Y62,KSW2Y62,KAW2Y62
0
700～890
620 min.
-20
KMW4Y62,KSW4Y62,KAW4Y62
-40
KMW5Y62,KSW5Y62,KAW5Y62
-60
KMW2Y69,KSW2Y69,KAW2Y69
0
KMW3Y69,KSW3Y69,KAW3Y69
770～940
690 min.
17 min.
-20
KMW4Y69,KSW4Y69,KAW4Y69
-40
KMW5Y69,KSW5Y69,KAW5Y69
KMW2Y89,KSW2Y89,KAW2Y89
KMW3Y89,KSW3Y89,KAW3Y89
KMW4Y89,KSW4Y89,KAW4Y89
KMW2Y96,KSW2Y96,KAW2Y96
KMW3Y96,KSW3Y96,KAW3Y96
KMW4Y96,KSW4Y96,KAW4Y96
-60
0
-20
-40
0
-20
-40
6.9.8
1
50
0
640～820
KMW4Y55,KSW4Y55,KAW4Y55
KMW3Y62,KSW3Y62,KAW3Y62
47
0
KMW4Y46,KSW4Y46,KAW4Y46
KMW3Y55,KSW3Y55,KAW3Y55
absorbed
-40
KMW5Y42,KSW5Y42,KAW5Y42
KMW3Y50,KSW3Y50,KAW3Y50
mean
0
KMW4Y42,KSW4Y42,KAW4Y42
KMW3Y46,KSW3Y46,KAW3Y46
Minimum
Test
940～1100
890 min.
14 min.
980～1150
960 min.
13 min.
55
62
69
69
69
Butt Weld Tensile Test
Kinds and numbers of the butt weld tensile test specimens being taken from each test assembly are to comply with the
requirements specified in 6.2.8-1, 6.3.8-1 or 6.4.8-1 according to the grade of the welding consumables.
2
The tensile strength of each test specimen is to meet the requirements given in Table M6.61 according to the grade of the
welding consumables.
6.9.9
1
Butt Weld Bend Test
Kinds and numbers of the butt weld face bend and root bend test specimens being taken from each test assembly are to comply
with the requirements specified in 6.2.9-1, 6.3.9-1 or 6.4.9-1 according to the grade of the welding consumables.
2
The test specimens are to be subjected to face bend and root bend tests by using former having a radius given in Table M6.62.
Outer surface of the specimens is to be free from any cracks exceeding 3 mm long or other defects when they are bent to the angle of
120 degrees.
132
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
6.9.10
1
Butt Weld Impact Test
Kinds, numbers and selection method of the butt weld impact test specimens being taken from each test assembly are to comply
with the requirements specified in 6.2.10-1, 6.3.10-1 or 6.4.10-1 according to the grade of the welding consumables.
2
Testing temperature and minimum mean absorbed energy are to comply with the requirements specified given in Table M 6.60
according to the grade of the welding consumables.
3
The requirements specified in the preceding 6.2.7-2 and -4 are to be applied to these tests.
Table M6.61 Tensile Strength Requirements for Butt Weld
Tensile strength (N/mm 2)
Grade of welding consumables
KMW2Y42,KSW2Y42,KAW2Y42
KMW3Y42,KSW3Y42,KAW3Y42
520 min.
KMW4Y42,KSW4Y42,KAW4Y42
KMW5Y42,KSW5Y42,KAW5Y42
KMW2Y46,KSW2Y46,KAW2Y46
KMW3Y46,KSW3Y46,KAW3Y46
540 min.
KMW4Y46,KSW4Y46,KAW4Y46
KMW5Y46,KSW5Y46,KAW5Y46
KMW2Y50,KSW2Y50,KAW2Y50
KMW3Y50,KSW3Y50,KAW3Y50
590 min.
KMW4Y50,KSW4Y50,KAW4Y50
KMW5Y50,KSW5Y50,KAW5Y50
KMW2Y55,KSW2Y55,KAW2Y55
KMW3Y55,KSW3Y55KAW3Y55
640 min.
KMW4Y55,KSW4Y55,KAW4Y55
KMW5Y55,KSW5Y5,KAW5Y55
KMW2Y62,KSW2Y62,KAW2Y62
KMW3Y62,KSW3Y62,KAW3Y62
700 min.
KMW4Y62,KSW4Y62,KAW4Y62
KMW5Y62,KSW5Y62,KAW5Y62
KMW2Y69,KSW2Y69,KAW2Y69
KMW3Y69,KSW3Y69,KAW3Y69
770 min.
KMW4Y69,KSW4Y69,KAW4Y69
KMW5Y69,KSW5Y69,KAW5Y69
KMW2Y89,KSW2Y89,KAW2Y89
KMW3Y89,KSW3Y89,KAW3Y89
KMW4Y89,KSW4Y89,KAW4Y89
KMW2Y96,KSW2Y96,KAW2Y96
KMW3Y96,KSW3Y96,KAW3Y96
KMW4Y96,KSW4Y96,KAW4Y96
940 min.
980 min.
133
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.62 Butt Weld Bend Test for the Bend Radius
Grade of welding consumable
Radius of plunger (mm)
KMW2Y42～50, KSW2Y42～50, KAW2Y42～50
KMW3Y42～50, KSW3Y42～50, KAW3Y42～50
KMW4Y42～50, KSW4Y42～50, KAW4Y42～50
2.0t
KMW5Y42～50, KSW5Y42～50, KAW5Y42～50
KMW2Y55～69, KSW2Y55～69, KAW2Y55～69
KMW3Y55～69, KSW3Y55～69, KAW3Y55～69
KMW4Y55～69, KSW4Y55～69, KAW4Y55～69
2.5t
KMW5Y55～69, KSW5Y55～69, KAW5Y55～69
KMW2Y89, KSW2Y89, KAW2Y89
KMW3Y89, KSW3Y89, KAW3Y89
KMW4Y89, KSW4Y89, KAW4Y89
3.0t
KMW2Y96, KSW2Y96, KAW2Y96
KMW3Y96, KSW3Y96, KAW3Y96
KMW4Y96, KSW4Y96, KAW4Y96
3.5t
Note:
𝑡: thickness of bend test specimens (mm) .
6.9.11
1
Hydrogen Test
Hydrogen Test is to be carried out for welding consumables except gas shielded arc solid wire by the glycerine method, mercury
method, gaschromatographic method or other methods deemed appropriate by the Society.
2
The average volume of hydrogen is to comply with the requirements specified given in Table M 6.63 according to the test
procedures specified in preceding -1 or the type of suffixes to be added to the grade marks.
134
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
Table M6.63 Requirements for Hydrogen Contents
Requirements for Hydrogen Contents (cm 3/g)
Grade of welding
consumables
Suffixes
Gas chromatographic
Glycerine method
Mercury method
H10
0.05 max.
0.10 max.
0.10 max.
H5
-
0.05 max.
0.05 max.
H5
-
0.05 max
0.05 max
method
KMW2Y42～50
KMW3Y42～50
KMW4Y42～50
KMW5Y42～50
KSW2Y42～50
KSW3Y42～50
KSW4Y42～50
KSW5Y42～50
KAW2Y42～50
KAW3Y42～50
KAW4Y42～50
KAW5Y42～50
KMW2Y55～69
KMW3Y55～69
KMW4Y55～69
KMW5Y55～69
KSW2Y55～69
KSW3Y55～69
KSW4Y55～69
KSW5Y55～69
KAW2Y55～69
KAW3Y55～69
KAW4Y55～69
KAW5Y55～69
KMW2Y89, 96
KMW3Y89, 96
KMW4Y89, 96
KSW2Y89, 96
KSW3Y89, 96
KSW4Y89, 96
KAW2Y89, 96
KAW3Y89, 96
KAW4Y89, 96
6.9.12
Fillet Weld Macro-etching Test
The fillet weld macro-etching test is to be in accordance with the requirements specified in 6.2.12.
6.9.13
Fillet Weld Hardness Test
The fillet weld hardness test is to be in accordance with the requirements specified in 6.2.13.
6.9.14
Fillet Weld Fracture Test
The fillet weld fracture test is to be in accordance with the requirements specified in 6.2.14.
6.9.15
1
Annual Inspections
Annual inspections are to comply with the requirements specified in 6.2.15, 6.3.15 or 6.4.15 according to the grade of the
welding consumables. However, in general, annual inspections for automatic welding consumables are to comply with the requirements
specified for multi-run technique.
135
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 6)
2
A hydrogen test is to be carried out in addition to the test specified in -1 above for the welding consumables whose grade
symbols end in Y69, Y89 or Y96.
6.9.16
Change in Grades
The changes in grades relating to the strength or toughness of approved welding consumables are to comply with the
requirements specified in 6.2.16, 6.3.16 or 6.4.16 according to the grade of the welding consumables.
136
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 7)
Chapter 7
7.1
Non-Destructive Testing Service Suppliers
7.1.1
General
1
Application*
The requirements of this chapter are applied to firms providing NDT (Non-Destructive Testing) services for ships and offshore
structures as well as their components.
2
The requirements of this chapter are intended to ensure that such firms are using appropriate procedures, have qualified and
certified personnel and have implemented written procedures for the training, experience, education, examination, certification,
performance, application, control, verification and reporting of NDT. In addition, firms are to furnish appropriate equipment and
facilities commensurate with providing a professional service.
3
7.1.2
In case where such a firm requests approval, the Society may approve it as a NDT service supplier.
Definitions
The definitions of terms which appear in this chapter are specified in the following Table M7.1.
Table M7.1
NDT
Non-Destructive Testing. Comprising, but not limited to the methods and techniques
MT, PT, RT, RT-D, VT, UT, PAUT, TOFD, ET and/or ACFM
Supplier
Independent NDT company or NDT department/section that forms a part of a company
providing NDT services on ship and/or offshore components/structures.
MT
Magnetic Particle Testing
PT
Penetrant Testing
RT
Radiographic Testing
RT-D
Digital Radiography Testing (A technique within the method RT, e.g. Computed
Radiography or Direct Radiography).
UT
Ultrasonic Testing
PAUT
Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing, (A type of UT technique in which electronically
controls the transmission time of a pulse wave transmitted from a plurality transducer
as ultrasonic beam at an arbitrary refraction angle and focal length to detect flaws. A
device that can display and record flaw detection results as a two-dimensional image).
TOFD
Time of Flight Diffraction (A type of UT technique in which plane flaw detection and
dimension measurement are performed by a method using the correlation between
interference waves at various probe positions or angles of incidence).
ET
Electromagnetic Testing, Eddy Current Testing and/or Alternating Current Field
Measurements (ACFM), etc.
7.1.3
VT
Visual Testing
Industrial
Section of industry or technology where specialized NDT practices are used, requiring
sector
specific product-related knowledge, skill, equipment and/or training.
References
The following referenced documents are to be used for the application of this chapter as appropriate. Other national standards
listed below are accepted as compliant and hence are accepted for use together with this document. The below standards, in principle,
refer to the most recent version published.
(1) ISO 9712:2012: Non-destructive testing – Qualification and certification of NDT personnel
(2) ISO/IEC 17020:2012: Conformity assessment – Requirements for the operation of various types of bodies performing
inspection
137
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 7)
(3) ISO/IEC 17024:2012: Conformity assessment – General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons
(4) ISO 9001:2015: Quality Management Systems – Requirements
7.2
Requirements for Documents
7.2.1
Requirements for Documents
1
Suppliers are to create and maintain documentation containing the following information.
(1) An outline of the supplier’s organization and management structure, including any subsidiaries.
(2) Information on the structure of the supplier’s quality management system.
(3) Quality manual and documented procedures covering the requirements given in 7.3
(4) For companies with an in-house certification scheme for personnel, a written practice developed in accordance with a
recognized standard or recommended practice (i.e. ASNT’s SNT-TC-1A, 2016, ANSI/ASNT CP-189, 2016 or similar).
(5) Operational work procedures for each NDT method, including selection of the NDT technique.
(6) Training and follow-up programmes for NDT operators including practical training on various ship and offshore products.
(7) For suppliers who have personnel certification schemes, procedures related to the supervisor authorisation of NDT operators.
(8) Experience of the supplier in the specific service area.
(9) A list of documented training and experience for NDT operators within the relevant service area, including qualifications and
third party certification per ISO 9712:2012 based certification schemes.
(10) Description of equipment used for the services performed by the suppliers.
(11) A guide for NDT operators to use equipment mentioned in (10).
(12) Record formats.
(13) Information on other activities which may present a conflict of interest.
(14) Record of customer claims and corrective actions.
(15) Any current or past legal proceedings involving the company.
2
7.3
The documents mentioned in -1 are to be made available to the Society upon request.
Quality Requirements
7.3.1
1
Quality Management System
Suppliers are to have a documented quality management system, covering at least the following.
(1) Work procedures for all tasks and operations, including the various NDT methods and NDT techniques for which the supplier
is involved.
(2) Preparation, issuance, maintenance and control of documents.
(3) Maintenance and calibration of the NDT equipment.
(4) Training programs for the NDT operators and the supervisors.
(5) Maintenance of records for NDT operators and supervisors training, qualification and certification.
(6) Certification of NDT operators (the latest version).
(7) Procedures for testing operator visual acuity.
(8) Supervision and verification of operation to ensure compliance with the NDT procedures.
(9) Quality management of subsidiaries.
(10) Job preparation.
(11) Order reference system where each engagement is traceable to when and where the test was carried out as well as who carried
it out.
(12) Recording and reporting of information, including retention time of records.
(13) Code of conduct for the supplier’s activities, especially NDT related activities.
(14) Periodic review of work process procedures.
(15) Corrective and preventive action.
(16) Feedback and continuous improvement.
138
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 7)
(17) Internal audits.
(18) Provisions of accessibility to required codes, standards and procedures to assist NDT operators.
2
A documented quality system complying with the most recent version of ISO/IEC 17020:2012 and including the above
information mentioned in -1 would be considered acceptable. The supplier may satisfy the requirements of Type A or Type B inspection
body, as described in ISO/IEC 17020:2012.
7.3.2
Qualification and Certification of NDT Personnel
1
Supplier supervisors and operators are to be recognised by a certification scheme based upon ISO 9712:2012 or JIS Z2305. The
aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
2
The supplier is to be responsible for the above -1.
3
Personnel qualification by an employer based upon relevant and/or recommendation standards which are found acceptable by
the Society (e.g. SNT-TC-1A, 2016 or ANSI/ASNT CP-189, 2016 etc.) may be accepted if the supplier’s written practice is reviewed
and found acceptable by the Society. In such cases, the supplier’s written practice is at a minimum, except for the impartiality
requirements of a certification body and/or authorised body, to comply with ISO 9712:2012.
4
Supervisor and operator certificates and competence are to comprise all industrial sectors and techniques being applied by the
supplier.
7.3.3
1
Supervisor
Suppliers are to have a supervisor or supervisors who are responsible for the appropriate execution of NDT operations and for
the professional standard of the operators and their equipment, including the professional administration of the working procedures.
2
Supervisors are to be independently certified to Level 3 by a third party based upon 7.3.2 and accepted by the Society.
3
In relation to -2, suppliers are to employ, on a full-time basis, at least one supervisor for all NDT methods which are carried out
by the supplier, except in cases where it is recognised that it is difficult for the supplier to directly employ a Level 3 certified supervisor
for all the stated NDT methods.
4
Supervisors are to be directly involved in the review and acceptance of NDT procedures, NDT reports and the calibration of
NDT equipment and tools.
7.3.4
Operators
1
Operators are at a minimum to be qualified and certified to Level 2 in the NDT method(s) concerned and as described in 7.3.2.
2
Operators who are qualified and certified as Level 1 are to only undertake the gathering of data and the using of NDT methods.
They are not, however, to undertake the performing data interpretation or data analysis.
3
Operators are to have adequate knowledge of materials, welds, structures or components as well as of NDT equipment and its
limitations that is sufficient to apply the relevant NDT method for each application appropriately.
7.3.5
Sub-contractors
1
Suppliers are to provide information on agreements and arrangements if any part(s) of the services provided are subcontracted.
2
Suppliers, in the following-up of subcontracts, are to give consideration to the quality management system of the subcontractor.
3
Subcontractors are to meet the same requirements placed upon suppliers for any NDT performed.
7.4
7.4.1
Equipment
1
Equipment
Suppliers are to maintain records of the NDT equipment used and detailed information related to maintenance, calibration and
verification activities. Operators are to be familiar with the specific equipment type prior to using it.
2
Where the equipment is of unique nature, operators are to be trained by competent personnel in the operation and use of the
equipment before carrying out NDT using such equipment.
3
Under all circumstances, suppliers are to possess sufficient equipment to carry out the services being a part of the NDT scope
required by the Society.
139
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 7)
7.5
Work instructions and procedures etc.
7.5.1
Work instructions and procedures
1
Suppliers are to produce written procedures for the NDT being applied. These procedures are to be written, verified or approved
by the supplier’s Level 3 supervisor.
2
Procedures are to be documented and include all relevant information relating to the inspection, including the defect evaluation
acceptance criteria deemed appropriate by the Society.
3
All NDT procedures and instructions are to be properly documented in such a way that the performed testing can be easily
traced and/or repeated at a later stage.
4
All NDT procedures stipulated in 7.5.1 are to be reviewed by the Society.
7.6
Reporting
7.6.1
1
Reporting to the Society
All reports are to be properly documented in such a way that the performed testing and examination can be easily traced and/or
repeated.
2
All reports are to identify the defects present in the tested area, and include a conclusive statement as to whether the material,
weld, component or structure satisfies the acceptance criteria.
3
All reports are to include references to the applicable standards, NDT procedures and acceptance criteria applied with respect
to the applicable NDT method/technique. In general, the acceptance criteria are to comply with relevant Society Rules.
140
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 8)
Chapter 8
8.1
NON-DESTRUCTIVE INSPECTION FOR THE WELDED JOINTS OF
HULL CONSTRUCTIONS
General
8.1.1
General*
1
Non-destructive test is normally to be performed by the shipbuilder or its subcontractors in accordance with this chapter.
2
It is the shipbuilder’s responsibility to assure that testing specifications and procedures are adhered to during the construction
and that relevant reports are made available to the Society on the findings made by non-destructive test.
3
Members subject to inspections, the locations of inspections and the number of inspections are to be as deemed appropriate by
the Society.
8.1.2
1
Application
This chapter applies to the non-destructive inspections for the welded joints of hull constructions during new building. The
details of the base metals, welding procedures and welded joints to be subject to the requirements of this chapter are as follows.
(1) Base metals
This chapter applies to the following types of base metals: the rolled steels for hulls specified in 3.1, 3.10 and 3.12, Part K of
the Rules; the rolled steels for low temperature service specified in 3.4, Part K of the Rules; the rolled stainless steels specified
in 3.5, Part K of the Rules; the high strength rolled steels for offshore structures specified in 3.8, Part K of the Rules; the
steel castings specified in 5.1, Part K of the Rules; and the steel forgings specified in 6.1, Part K of the Rules.
(2) Welding procedures
This chapter applies to the following welding procedures: manual metal arc welding, metal arc welding (including flux cored
wire arc welding), TIG welding, submerged arc welding, electro-slag welding and electro-gas welding.
(3) Welded joints
This chapter applies to the following types of welded joints: butt welded joints with full penetration, T-joints, corner and
cruciform joints with or without full penetration, and fillet welds.
2
Base metals, welding procedures and welded joints other than those specified in the preceding -1 are to be deemed appropriate
by the Society.
3
Advanced non-destructive testing is to be in accordance with Chapter 9.
4
Non-destructive inspections for internal imperfections of the welded joints of hull constructions are, in principle, to be
radiographic testing.
5
In cases where the following (1) and (2) are fulfilled, ultrasonic testing may be used in lieu of radiographic testing.
(1) Non-destructive inspection specifications comply with ISO 17640 or other standards deemed appropriate by the Society are
approved by the Society.
(2) Non-destructive inspection specifications apply to ultrasonic testing for 1/10 of welds to be subject to radiographic testing of at
least 3 ships and their consistent application is approved by the Society in advance.
8.1.3
Surveyor Presence at Non-destructive Test
1
For non-destructive test of surface imperfections, a Surveyor is, in principle, to be present during the test.
2
For non-destructive test of internal imperfections, a Surveyor is to be present at the following times.
(1) For radiographic testing, a Surveyor is to review the records of the test for judgement.
(2) For ultrasonic testing, a Surveyor is, in principle, to be present during the test. The Surveyor is also to review the records of the
test for judgement.
8.1.4
1
Timing of Non-destructive Test
Non-destructive test shall be carried out after welds have cooled to ambient temperature and after post weld heat treatment
where applicable.
2
For high strength steels for welded structures with specified minimum yield stresses in the range of 420 N/mm 2 to 690 N/mm 2,
non-destructive test shall not be carried out before 48 hours have passed after the completion of welding. For steels with specified
141
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 8)
minimum yield stresses greater than 690 N/mm 2, non-destructive test shall not be carried out before 72 hours have passed after the
completion of welding. However, in cases where the following (1) and (2) are fulfilled, the 72-hour interval may be reduced to 48 hours
for radiographic testing or ultrasonic testing.
(1) A complete visual for the entire welded joint and random magnetic particle or penetrant test for those locations indicated by the
surveyor is carried out 72 hours after the welding work has been completed and the welds have cooled to the ambient
temperature, and the results are to be a pass.
(2) The Surveyor determines that there is no indication of delayed cracking due to low temperatures occurring.
3
Notwithstanding the preceding -2, where post weld heat treatment is carried out, the requirement of the preceding -2 may be
mitigated when agreed to by the surveyor.
4
In cases where evidence of delayed cracking due to low temperatures has been observed, or in the case of high thickness welds,
a longer interval or additional random inspection at a later period may be required when deemed necessary by the surveyor.
8.1.5
1
Application of Non-destructive Test Method
The methods mentioned in this chapter for the detection of surface imperfections are visual testing (VT), liquid penetrant testing
(PT) and magnetic particle testing (MT). The methods mentioned for detection of internal imperfections are ultrasonic testing (UT) and
radiographic testing (RT).
2
The locations to which non-destructive test methods may be applied are specified in Table M8.1 according to joint type and
base metal thickness.
Table M8.1
Applicable Non-destructive Test Methods for the Welded Joints
Welded joint
Butt welded joints
Thickness of base
Applicable test methods
metal
< 8 mm (1)
VT, PT, MT, RT
≥ 8 mm
VT, PT, MT, UT, RT
(1)
VT, PT, MT, RT(3)
T-joints, corner joints and cruciform
< 8 mm
joints with full penetration
≥ 8 mm
VT, PT, MT, UT, RT(3)
all
VT, PT, MT, UT(2) , RT(3)
T-joint, corner joints and cruciform
joints with partial penetration, and
fillet weld joints
Notes:
(1)
In cases where thickness is below 8 mm, the Society may consider the application
of an appropriate advanced ultrasonic testing method.
(2)
In cases where it is deemed appropriate by the Society, ultrasonic testing may be
used to check the extent of penetration for T-joints, and corner and cruciform joints.
(3)
In cases where it is deemed appropriate by the Society, radiographic testing may be
applied.
8.2
8.2.1
Qualification of Non-destructive Testing Personnel
1
Qualification and Certification of Non-destructive Testing Personnel
Supervisors and operators are to be recognised by a certification scheme based upon ISO 9712 or JIS Z2305. The
aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
2
The shipbuilder or its subcontractor is to be responsible for the preceding -1.
3
Operator certificates issued by an employer based upon relevant and/or recommendation standards which are found acceptable
by the Society (e.g. SNT-TC-1A, 2016 or ANSI/ASNT CP-189, 2016 etc.) may be accepted if the shipbuilder’s or its subcontractor’s
written practice is reviewed and found acceptable by the Society. In such cases, the shipbuilder’s or its subcontractor’s written practice
is at a minimum, except for the impartiality requirements of a certification body and/or authorised body, to comply with ISO 9712.
142
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 8)
4
Supervisor and operator certificates and competence are to appropriate for the non-destructive inspection methods being
employed by the shipbuilder or its subcontractor.
8.2.2
1
Supervisor
The shipbuilders or its subcontractors are to have a supervisor or supervisors who are responsible for the appropriate execution
of non-destructive test operations and for the professional standard of the operators and their equipment, including the professional
administration of the working procedures.
2
Supervisors are to be certified to Level 3 by a certification body deemed appropriate by the Society (e.g. The Japanese Society
for Non-destructive Inspection) based upon 8.2.1.
3
In relation to the preceding -2, shipbuilders or its subcontractors are to employ, on a full-time basis, at least one supervisor for
all non-destructive testing methods which are carried out by the shipbuilder or its subcontractor, except in cases where it is recognised
that it is difficult for the shipbuilder or its subcontractor to directly employ a Level 3 certified supervisor for all the stated nondestructive testing methods.
4
Supervisors are to be directly involved in the review and acceptance of non-destructive inspection specifications, the making
of test records and survey records, and the calibration of non-destructive testing equipment and tools.
5
Supervisors are to evaluate the competence of operators annually.
8.2.3
1
Operator
Operators, in principle, are to be certified to Level 2 by a certification body deemed appropriate by the Society (e.g. The
Japanese Society for Non-destructive Inspection), based upon 8.2.1, except in cases where the requirement of 8.2.1-3 is to be applied.
2
Operators who are qualified and certified as Level 1 are to only undertake the gathering of data and the using of non-destructive
testing methods. They are not, however, to undertake the performing data interpretation or data analysis.
3
Operators are to have adequate knowledge of materials, welds, structures, or components as well as of non-destructive testing
equipment and its limitations that is sufficient to apply the relevant non-destructive testing method for each application appropriately.
8.3
8.3.1
Surface Condition
1
Surface Condition
Location of inspections are to be free from scale, slag, loose rust, weld spatter, oil, grease, dirt, or paint that might affect the
sensitivity of the testing method.
2
Preparation and cleaning of welds for subsequent non-destructive test are to be in accordance with the accepted non-destructive
inspection specifications.
3
8.4
The Society may not accept result of non-destructive test to be carried out on surface that prevent proper interpretation.
8.4.1
General Plan of Non-destructive Inspection
General
1
Members subject to inspections, location of inspections and the quality level specified in ISO 5817 are to be planned by the
shipbuilder according to ship design, ship type and welding the processes used. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the
most recent version published.
2
Prior to welding works, the shipbuilder is to submit the non-destructive inspection plan containing the details of the non-
destructive test to be applied, the members subject to inspections, the location of inspections, the number of inspections, test length
and Quality Level to the Society for approval. The Society, however, may require changes in non-destructive test to be applied, the
members subject to inspections, the locations of inspections, the number of inspections, test length and Quality Level where deemed
necessary even after a non-destructive inspection plan has been approved.
3
Particular attention is to be paid to inspecting welds in highly stressed areas and welds in primary and special structures.
4
Non-destructive inspection plans are to only be released to the personnel in charge of the non-destructive test and its supervision.
8.4.2
1
Location of Inspections*
In selecting the locations of inspections, emphasis is to be given to the following locations:
(1) Welds in high stressed areas
143
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 8)
(2) Fatigue sensitive areas
(3) Field erected welds
(4) Suspected problem areas
(5) Welds which are inaccessible or very difficult to inspect in service
(6) Other important structural elements
(7) Welds for which non-destructive inspections are deemed necessary by the Surveyor
2
Block construction welds performed in yards, or at subcontracted yards or facilities are to be considered when selecting
locations of inspections.
3
The result of non-destructive inspections and the locations of inspection are to be in total correspondence.
4
For welded constructions (e.g. marine and offshore structures) other than hull constructions, the locations of inspections is to
be as deemed appropriate by the Society.
5
If an unacceptable level of indications is found, the number of inspections is to be increased in accordance with 8.9.2.
8.4.3
1
Non-destructive Test Application Procedure*
All welds over their full length are to be subject to visual test by personnel designated by the shipbuilder, and such personnel
may be exempted from the qualification requirements specified in 8.2.
2
When it is deemed necessary by the Surveyor, liquid penetrant testing or magnetic particle testing is to be used when
investigating the outer surface of welds, checking the intermediate weld passes and back-gouged joints prior to subsequent passes
deposition.
3
For non-destructive test of surface imperfections for important T-joints or corner joints, liquid penetrant testing or magnetic
particle testing deemed appropriate by the Society is to be carried out.
4
Welded connections between large castings (e.g. rudder horn) or forged components and rolled steels for hull are to be tested
over their full length using liquid penetrant testing or magnetic particle testing, and locations deemed appropriate by the Society are to
be tested using ultrasonic testing or radiographic testing.
5
Non-destructive test to be applied are to be suited for the detection of particular types, orientations and dimensions of
discontinuities. In addition, the non-destructive test method is to be agreed by the Society.
6
In general, start/stop points in welds made using automatic (mechanised) welding processes are to be examined using ultrasonic
testing or radiographic testing, except for internal members where the omission of testing is to be agreed by the Surveyor.
7
Where the surveyor becomes aware that a location has been repaired without a record of the original defect, the shipyard is to
carry out additional tests on locations adjacent to the repaired location according to the Surveyor’s instructions.
8
Ultrasonic testing is to be carried out on all block-to-block butt joints of all upper flange longitudinal structural members in the
cargo hold region of container carriers applying extremely thick steel plates which complies with 10.5, Part 2-1, Part C. Upper flange
longitudinal structural members include the topmost strakes of the inner hull/bulkhead, the sheer strake, strength deck, hatch side
coaming plate, coaming top plate, and all attached longitudinal stiffeners. These members are shown in Fig. M8.1.
Fig. M8.1
Members in Container Carriers Subject to Additional Non-destructive Inspections
144
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 8)
8.5
Non-destructive Testing Procedure
8.5.1
1
General
The testing method, equipment and conditions are to comply with recognized national or international standards, or other
documents deemed appropriate by the Society.
2
The shipbuilder and its subcontractor is to obtain the confirmation of the Society for non-destructive inspection specifications
containing sufficient details of the testing method to be applied. For non-destructive inspection specifications of ultrasonic testing, the
shipbuilder or its subcontractor is to obtain approval of the Society in accordance with 8.1.2-5.
3
Members subject to inspections, location of inspections and test length are to be in accordance with the decision of the Surveyor
and the approved non-destructive inspection plans specified in 8.4.
4
The testing volume is to be the zone which includes the weld and base metal for at least 10 mm on each side of the weld, or the
width of the HAZ, whichever is greater. In all cases, the inspection is to cover the whole testing volume.
5
Where it is deemed necessary by the Surveyor, provision is to be made for the Surveyor to verify the testing method, the test
records specified in 8.7, and the inspection records specified in 8.8.
6
Where the Surveyor decides that the proportion of non-conforming indications is abnormally high, the number of inspections
is to be increased.
8.5.2
Visual Testing
The personnel in charge of visual testing is to confirm that the surface condition is acceptable prior to carrying out the inspection.
Visual testing are to be carried out in accordance with standards agreed upon between the shipbuilder and the Society.
8.5.3
1
Liquid Penetrant Testing*
Liquid penetrant testing is to be carried out in accordance with ISO 3452-1, ISO 3452-2, ISO 3452-3, ISO 3452-4, JIS Z 2343-
1, JIS Z 2343-2, JIS Z 2343-3, JIS Z 2343-4 or equivalent standards approved by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle,
refer to the most recent version published.
2
The surfaces of the location of inspections are to be clean and free from any contaminants or paint that may impede the
penetration of the inspection media.
3
The temperatures of the locations of inspections are to be typically between 5 °C and 50 °C. Where the temperature is outside
of this temperature range, it is to be as deemed appropriate by the Society.
8.5.4
1
Magnetic Particle Testing*
Magnetic particle testing is to be carried out in accordance with ISO 17638, JIS Z 2320-1, JIS Z 2320-2, JIS Z 2320-3 or
equivalent standards approved by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
2
The surfaces of the locations of inspections are to be clean, dry and free from any contaminants or paint that may impede the
test and its accurate evaluation.
8.5.5
1
Radiographic Testing*
Radiographic testing is to be carried out in accordance with ISO 17636, JIS Z 3104 or equivalent standards approved by the
Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
2
Test length of the location of inspections is to be not less than either 300 mm or the overall length of the welds inspected,
whichever is smaller.
3
Consideration may be given for a reduction of inspection frequency for automated welds where quality assurance techniques
indicate consistent satisfactory quality.
4
The surfaces of the locations of inspections are to be free from any irregularities that may impede the test and its accurate
evaluation.
8.5.6
1
Ultrasonic Testing
Ultrasonic testing is to be carried out in accordance with ISO 17640, ISO 11666, ISO 23279 or equivalent standards approved
by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
2
Test length of the locations of inspections are to be not less than either 300 mm or the overall length of the welds inspected,
whichever is smaller.
145
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 8)
8.6
Non-destructive Testing Criteria
8.6.1
1
General
As far as necessary, testing techniques are to be combined to facilitate the assessment of indications against the acceptance
criteria.
2
Where equivalency is established and it is deemed appropriate by the Society, alternative acceptance criteria not specified in
this chapter may be applied.
8.6.2
1
Quality Level
For hull constructions, Quality Level C is, in principle, to be applied. Where it is deemed necessary by the Society, Quality
level B may be applied.
2
Testing Level and Acceptance Level of non-destructive testing to be applied are to be appropriate level which corresponds to
Quality Level agreed by the Society in accordance with Table M8.2 to M8.7.
8.6.3
1
Testing Level
Testing Level specified in Table M8.2 to M8.7 stipulates testing coverage and the probability of detection. Accuracy of test and
the probability of detection increase from Testing Level A to Testing Level C.
2
Testing Level for non-destructive testing to be applied is to be agreed by the Society. Testing Level D is intended for special
applications, and may only be used when defined by specification.
3
Testing Level to be applied is to be specified in the non-destructive testing specifications and the non-destructive inspection
plan.
8.6.4
Acceptance Level
Acceptance Level is to be in accordance with each standard specified in Table M8.2 to M8.7, or as deemed appropriate by the
Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
8.6.5
Visual Testing Criteria *
The Acceptance Levels and required Quality Levels for visual testing are to be in accordance with Table M8.2 and deemed
appropriate by the Society.
Table M8.2
Each Level of Visual Testing Corresponding to Quality Level
Quality Levels
Testing Levels
(ISO 5817)(1)
(ISO 17637)(1)
B
C
Acceptance Levels (2)
B
Level not specified
D
C
D
Notes:
(1) To be in accordance with this standard or an equivalent standard
approved by the Society.
(2) The Acceptance Levels for visual testing are the same for the Quality
Levels specified in ISO 5817.
8.6.6
Liquid Penetrant Testing Criteria
The Acceptance Levels, Testing Level and required Quality Levels for liquid penetrant testing are to be in accordance with
Table M8.3.
146
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 8)
Table M8.3
Each Level of Liquid Penetrant Testing Corresponding to Quality Level
Quality Levels
Testing Levels
Acceptance Levels
(ISO 5817)(1)
(ISO 3452-1)(1)
(ISO 23277)
B
2X
C
Level not specified
D
2X
3X
Note:
(1) To be in accordance with this standard or an equivalent standard
approved by the Society.
8.6.7
Magnetic Particle Testing Criteria
The Acceptance Levels, Testing Level and required Quality Levels for magnetic particle testing are to be in accordance with
Table M8.4.
Table M8.4
Each Level of Magnetic Particle Testing Corresponding to Quality Level
Quality Levels
Testing Levels
(1)
(1)
(ISO 5817)
(ISO 17638)
B
C
Acceptance Levels
(ISO 23278)
2X
Level not specified
D
2X
3X
Note:
(1)
To be in accordance with this standard or an equivalent standard
approved by the Society.
8.6.8
1
Radiographic Testing Criteria
The Acceptance Levels, Testing Level and required Quality Levels for radiographic testing are to be in accordance with Table
M8.5.
2
Reference radiographs are to be submitted to the Society after they are evaluated in accordance with ISO 5817, ISO 10675-1 or
a standard deemed appropriate by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
147
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 8)
Table M8.5
Each Level of Radiographic Testing Level Corresponding to Quality Level
Quality Levels
Testing Levels
Acceptance Levels
(ISO 5817)(1)
(ISO 17636-1)(1)
(ISO 10675-1)
B
Class B
1
C
Class B(2)
2
D
At least Class A
3
Notes:
(1) To be in accordance with this standard or an equivalent standard
approved by the Society.
(2) For circumferential weld testing, the minimum number of exposures
may correspond to the requirements of ISO 17636-1, Class A
8.6.9
1
Ultrasonic Testing Criteria
The Acceptance Level, Testing Level and required Quality Levels for ultrasonic testing are to be in accordance with Table M8.6
and M8.7.
2
Acceptance Level of ultrasonic testing applies to the non-destructive testing of butt welded joints, T-joints, corner joints and
cruciform joints with full penetration of carbon steels with thicknesses from 8 mm to 100 mm.
3
Non-destructive inspection specifications for welded joints other than those specified in the preceding -2 are to be approved by
the Society apart from the non-destructive inspection specifications specified in 8.1.2-5.
4
The nominal frequency of probes used is to be between 2 MHz and 5 MHz.
5
Acceptance Levels are to be in accordance with ISO 11666 or a recognized standard deemed appropriate by the Society. The
aforementioned standard, in principle, refers to the most recent version published.
6
The sensitivity levels are to be set in accordance with ISO 17640. The aforementioned standard, in principle, refers to the most
recent version published.
Table M8.6
Each level of Ultrasonic Testing Level Corresponding to Quality Level
Quality Levels
(ISO 5817)
(1), (2)
Testing Levels
(ISO 17640)
(1), (2)
Acceptance Levels
(ISO 11666) (1), (2)
B
At least B
2
C
At least A
3
D
At least A
3(3)
Notes:
(1)
To be in accordance with this standard or an equivalent standard
approved by the Society.
(2)
When characterization of indications is required, ISO 23279 is to
be applied
(3)
Ultrasonic testing is not recommended, but can be defined in a
specification with same requirement as Quality Level C
148
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 8)
Table M8.7
Recommended Testing and Quality Levels (ISO 17640)
Testing Levels
Quality Levels
(ISO 17640)(1)
(ISO 5817)
A
C，D
B
B
C
Quality Level deemed appropriate by the Society
D
Special Quality Level according to application target
Note:
(1)
8.7
Testing Level D for special application is to be agreed to by the Society.
Test Records
8.7.1
Test Record Preparation
1
Test records are to be submitted to the Society for confirmation in each stage of the construction process deemed appropriate
by the Surveyor.
2
In liquid penetrant testing, magnetic particle testing, radiographic testing and ultrasonic testing, the Surveyor is to decide
whether the results are acceptable when the test records are submitted.
3
Test records are to be prepared by the shipbuilder or its subcontractor and are to include the following information:
(1) Date of testing
(2) Location of testing
(3) Position and dimension of the discontinuities
(4) Signature and qualification level of operators and supervisors
4
In the case of liquid penetrant testing, in addition to the preceding -3, the following information is to be included in the test
records:
(1) Type of penetrant, cleaner and developer used
(2) Penetration time and development time
5
In the case of magnetic particle testing, in addition to the preceding -3, the following information is to be included in the test
records:
(1) Type of magnetization
(2) Magnetic field strength
(3) Detection media
(4) Viewing conditions
(5) Demagnetization, if required
6
In the case of radiographic testing, in addition to the preceding -3, the following information is to be included in the test records:
(1) Radiographs
(2) Type of discontinuity
7
In the case of ultrasonic testing, in addition to the preceding -3, the following information is to be included in the test records:
(1) Information and calibration result of ultrasonic equipment used
(2) Echo height of detected discontinuity
8.8
8.8.1
Inspection Records
1
Inspection Record Preparation
Inspection records are to be submitted to the Society for confirmation for each stage of the construction process deemed
appropriate by the Surveyor.
2
Inspection records are to be prepared by the shipbuilder or its subcontractor and are to include the following information.
149
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 8)
(1) Date of inspection
(2) Hull number, location of inspections and test length
(3) Signature and qualification level of operators
(4) Identification of the component inspected
(5) Identification of the welded joints inspected
(6) Steel grade, welded joint type, base metal thickness and welding procedure
(7) Acceptance criteria
(8) Testing standards used
(9) Testing equipment and arrangement used
(10) Any test limitations, viewing conditions and temperature
(11) Results with references given to acceptance criteria, locations and dimensions of reportable indications
(12) Acceptance criteria for discontinuities, date of evaluation, and signatures of operators
(13) Records of all repaired welds.
(14) Number of repairs if a specific location is repaired more than twice
3
In the case of liquid penetrant testing, in addition to the preceding -2, the following information is to be included in the
inspection records:
(1) Type of penetrant, cleaner and developer used
(2) Penetration time and development time
4
In the case of magnetic particle testing, in addition to the preceding -2, the following information is to be included in the
inspection records:
(1) Type of magnetization
(2) Magnetic field strength
(3) Detection media
(4) Viewing conditions
(5) Demagnetization, if required
5
In the case of radiographic testing, in addition to the preceding -2, the following information is to be included in the inspection
records. This information (including that of the preceding -2), in addition to documents, is to be recorded in a medium deemed
appropriate by the Society. In addition, where it is to be deemed necessary by the Society, the unprocessed original images and digitally
processes images is to be submitted to the Society.
(1) Type and size of radiation source (width of radiation source), X-ray voltage
(2) Type of film/designation and number of film in each film holder/cassette
(3) Number of radiographs (exposures)
(4) Type of intensifying screens
(5) Exposure technique, time of exposure and source-to-film distance
(6) Distance from radiation source to weld
(7) Distance from source side of the weld to radiographic film
(8) Angle of radiation beam through the weld (from normal)
(9) Sensitivity, type and position of IQI (source side or film side)
(10) Density
(11) Geometric un-sharpness
(12) Other information deemed necessary by the Society
6
In the case of ultrasonic testing, in addition to the preceding -2, the following information is to be included in the inspection
records. The method for review and evaluation of ultrasonic testing results are to be confirmed by the Surveyor at a frequency deemed
appropriate by the Surveyor.
(1) Type and identification of ultrasonic equipment used (instrument maker, model, series number), probes (instrument maker,
serial number), transducer type (angle, serial number and frequency) and type of couplant (brand).
(2) Sensitivity levels calibrated and applied for each probe
(3) Transfer loss correction applied type of reference blocks
150
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 8)
(4) Signal response used for defect detection
(5) Reflections interpreted as failing to meet acceptance criteria
8.8.2
Keeping of Inspection Records
The shipbuilder is to keep the inspection records specified in 8.8.1 at least for 5 years.
8.9
Repair of Faulty Welds, etc.
8.9.1
General
Unacceptable indications are to be eliminated and repaired where necessary. The repair welds are to be inspected on their full
length using appropriate non-destructive testing method at the discretion of the Surveyor.
8.9.2
1
Repair and Treatment after the Repair*
When unacceptable indications are found, additional areas of the same weld length are to be inspected unless it is agreed to
without any doubt by the surveyor and fabricator that the indication is isolated. In the case of automatically welded joints, additional
non-destructive testing are to be extended to all areas of the same weld length.
2
All radiographs exhibiting non-conforming indications are to be brought to the attention of the Surveyor. Such welds are to be
repaired and inspected as required by the Surveyor. When non-conforming indications are observed at the end of a radiograph,
additional radiographic testing is generally required to determine their extent. As an alternative, the extent of non-conforming welds
may be ascertained by excavation when approved by the surveyor.
8.9.3
1
Quality Improvements
Additional non-destructive testing can be required at the discretion of Surveyor when repeated non- acceptable discontinuities
are found.
2
Where the faulty welds are more than 10 % of the number of inspection, the results of an investigation into the substantial
causes of the faults as well as the measures taken to improve quality are to be submitted to the Surveyor.
3
The shipbuilder is to take appropriate action to monitor and improve the quality of welds to the required level. The repair rate
is to be recorded by the shipyard and any necessary corrective actions are to be identified in the shipbuilder’s QA system.
151
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
Chapter 9
9.1
Advanced Non-Destructive Testing
General
9.1.1
1
General
The requirements in this chapter are applied when Advanced Non-Destructive Testing (hereinafter referred to as “ANDT”) is
used in lieu of radiographic tests or ultrasonic tests for materials and welded joints during construction of ships, etc. specified in the
Rules. For the welded joints of liquefied gas cargo tanks specified in Part N and liquefied gas fuel tanks specified in Part GF, the
radiographic tests are not to be completely replaced by Phase Array Ultrasonic Testing (hereinafter referred to as “PAUT”) or Time of
Flight Diffraction (hereinafter referred to as “TOFD”)
2
ANDT is to be performed by the shipbuilder, manufacturer or its subcontractors (hereinafter referred to as the “supplier”) in
accordance with these requirements. The Surveyor is, in principle, to be present during the test.
3
Suppliers are to adhere to ANDT specifications and procedures. Reports on ANDT findings are to be made available to the
Society.
4
ANDT methods, structural members to be subjected to testing, locations to be tested and the number of tests are to be agreed on
between the supplier and the Society. ANDT, however, need not be performed in addition to that required for the structural members
and locations to be tested as well as the number of tests specified in the Rules.
5
Notwithstanding the requirements specified in 8.1.2-5, ANDT for the welded joints of hull structures specified in Chapter 8 of
this Part is to be in accordance with 9.5. Approved ANDT in accordance with 9.5 may be applied to all locations to be tested specified
in the non-destructive inspection plan.
9.1.2
Definitions
The terms used in this chapter are defined as follows in Table M9.1.
Table M9.1
Definitions
ANDT
Advanced Non-Destructive Testing
RT-D
Digital Radiography Testing
RT-S
Radioscopic Testing with Digital Image Acquisition，(Dynamic ≥12 bit)
RT-CR
Testing with Computed Radiography using storage phosphor imaging plates
PAUT
Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing
TOFD
Time of Flight Diffraction
AUT
Automated Ultrasonic Examinations. A technique of ultrasonic examination performed
with equipment and search units that are mechanically mounted and guided, remotely
operated, and motor-controlled (driven) without adjustments by the technician. The
equipment used to perform the examinations is capable of recording the ultrasonic
response data, including the scanning positions, by means of integral encoding devices
such that imaging of the acquired data can be performed.
SAUT
Semi-Automated Ultrasonic Examinations. A technique of ultrasonic examination
performed with equipment and search units that are mechanically mounted and guided,
manually assisted (driven), and which may be manually adjusted by the technician. The
equipment used to perform the examinations is capable of recording the ultrasonic
response data, including the scanning positions, by means of integral encoding devices
such that imaging of the acquired data can be performed.
152
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
9.2
Application
9.2.1
Material
The requirements in this chapter are applied to the materials specified in Part K of the Rules.
9.2.2
Welding Procedure
The requirements in this chapter are applied to the welding procedures specified in Table M9.2. ANDT for other welding
procedures may be in accordance with the requirements in this chapter, upon approval by the Society.
Table M9.2
Welding procedures
Reference number
Welding procedure
Manual welding
Shield Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)
111
Resistance welding
Flash Welding (FW)
24
(1) Metal Inert Gas Welding (MIG)
131
(2) Metal Active Gas Welding (MAG)
135, 138
(3) Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW)
136
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW)
141
(1) Submerged Arc Welding (SAW)
12
(2) Electro-gas Welding (EGW)
73
(3) Electro-slag Welding (ESW)
72
Semi-automatic
welding
TIG welding
Automatic welding
9.2.3
ISO 4063
Welded Joints
The requirements in this chapter, in principle, are applied to welded joints with full penetration. Other welded joints (e.g. T,
corner and cruciform joints) may be tested using PAUT. Welded joints to which ANDT is applied are to be confirmed by the Society
before application.
9.2.4
1
Timing
ANDT is to be performed after welds have cooled to an appropriate temperature and after post weld heat treatment (where
applicable) has been performed.
2
The timing of ANDT is to be in accordance with 8.1.4 when it is applied to the welds of hull structures using high tensile steels
for which the minimum yield stress is more than 420 N/mm 2.
9.3
Testing Method
9.3.1
General
The ANDT specified in this chapter, in principle, includes PAUT (only automated or semi-automated)，TOFD and RT-D. Other
ANDT may be applied in accordance with the requirements of this chapter provided that it is deemed appropriate by the Society.
9.3.2
Testing Methods for Welded Joint Types
The testing methods for the ANDT subject to the requirements of this chapter are specified according to material and welded
joint type as shown in Table M9.3.
153
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
Table M9.3
Testing Method According to Material and Welded Joint
Material and Welded Joint
Base Metal Thickness (t) Testing Method
t < 6 mm
RT-D
6 mm ≤ t ≤ 40 mm
PAUT, TOFD, RT-D
t > 40 mm
PAUT, TOFD, RT-D(2)
t ≥ 6 mm
PAUT, RT-D(2)
t ≥ 6 mm
PAUT (2)
t < 6 mm
RT-D
6 mm ≤ t ≤ 40 mm
RT-D, PAUT (2)
t > 40 mm
PAUT (2) , RT-D (2)
t ≥ 6 mm
PAUT (2) , RT-D (2)
t < 6 mm
RT-D
6 mm ≤ t ≤ 40 mm
RT-D, TOFD, PAUT
t > 40 mm
TOFD, PAUT, RT-D(2)
t ≥ 6 mm
PAUT (2) , RT-D (2)
t ≥ 6 mm
PAUT (2)
Copper alloy castings
—
PAUT, RT-D(2)
Steel forgings
—
PAUT, RT-D(2)
Steel castings
—
PAUT, RT-D(2)
t < 6 mm
RT-D
6 mm ≤ t ≤ 40 mm
PAUT, TOFD, RT-D
t > 40 mm
PAUT, TOFD, RT-D(2)
Carbon steel butt welded joints
Carbon steel T-joints and corner joins with full
penetration
Carbon steel cruciform joints with full penetration
(1)
Austenitic stainless steel
butt welded joints
Austenitic stainless steel(1) T-joints and corner joins
with full penetration
Aluminium alloy butt welded joints
Aluminium alloy T-joints and corner joins with full
penetration
Aluminium alloy cruciform joints with full
penetration
Rolled steels and aluminium alloy forgings
Notes:
(1) Where deemed necessary by the Society, either special specifications, supplementary devices (using angle compression
waves, creep wave probes or a combination of both for detecting defects close to the surface) or a combination of both
may be required when PAUT or TOFD are applied to anisotropic materials.
(2) Where the supplier has special qualifications for each type of ANDT and is agreed to by the Society, said ANDT may be
applied.
9.4
ANDT Personnel Qualifications
9.4.1
1
ANDT Personnel Qualifications and Certification
Supplier supervisors and operators are to be recognised by a certification scheme based on ISO 9712:2012 or JIS Z 2305. The
aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
2
The supplier is to be responsible for the preceding 1.
3
Personnel qualification by an employer based on standards deemed acceptable or recommended by the Society (e.g. SNT-TC-
1A, 2016 or ANSI/ASNT CP-189, 2016) may be accepted if the supplier’s written practice is reviewed and found acceptable by the
Society. In such cases, the supplier’s written practice, except for the impartiality requirements of a certification body or authorised
body, is to at a minimum comply with ISO 9712:2012.
4
Supervisor and operator certificates and competence are to comprise all industrial sectors and techniques being applied by the
supplier.
9.4.2
1
Supervisors
Suppliers are to have a supervisor or supervisors who are responsible for the appropriate execution of ANDT operations and for
154
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
the professional standard of the operators and their equipment, including the professional administration of the working procedures.
2
Supervisors are to be independently certified to Level 3 by a third party based on 9.4.1 and deemed acceptable by the Society.
3
In relation to the preceding 2, suppliers are to employ, on a full-time basis, at least one supervisor for all ANDT methods which
are carried out by the supplier, except in cases where it is recognised that it is difficult for the supplier to directly employ a Level 3
certified supervisor for all the stated ANDT methods.
4
Supervisors are to be directly involved in the review and acceptance of ANDT specifications and procedures, test records,
inspection records and the calibration of ANDT equipment and tools.
5
Supervisors are to evaluate operator skills and qualifications at least every 12 months.
9.4.3
1
Operators
Operators are, in principle, to be at least qualified and certified to Level 2 for the NDT method(s) concerned and as described
in 9.4.1, except in cases where 9.4.1-3 is applied.
2
Operators who are qualified and certified as Level 1 are to only undertake the gathering of data and the using of ANDT methods.
They are not, however, to perform data interpretation or data analysis.
3
Operators are to have adequate knowledge of materials, welds, structures or components as well as of ANDT equipment and its
limitations that is sufficient to apply the relevant ANDT method for each application appropriately.
9.5
ANDT Specification Verification
9.5.1
General
Suppliers are to submit the documents listed in the following (1) through (3):
(1) ANDT technical documents;
(2) The ANDT specifications specified in 9.8; and
(3) The results of the software simulations specified in 9.5.2, when applicable.
9.5.2
Software Simulations
1
Software simulation may be required by the Society, when PAUT or TOFD are applied.
2
Software simulation may include initial test set-up, scan plan, volume coverage and result image of artificial flaws, etc.
3
Where deemed necessary by the Society, artificial defect modeling/simulation may be required.
9.5.3
1
ANDT Specification Verification Tests*
Verification tests for ANDT specifications are to include the following (1) through (4):
(1) Review of available performance data for the inspection system (detection abilities and defect sizing accuracy);
(2) Identification and evaluation of significant parameters and their variability;
(3) Planning and execution of verification tests using qualification blocks and onsite testing for the purpose of confirmation for a
repeatability and reliability for inspection systems; and
(4) Making out of test reports for the verification tests specified in the preceding (3).
2
The data with respect to the repeatability and reliability obtained by the verification tests specified in the preceding 1(3) is to
be analyzed by comparing test reports for qualification blocks with those for onsite testing. Qualification blocks are to be manufactured
in accordance with a recognized standard deemed appropriate by the Society. Onsite verification test plans are to be confirmed by the
Society.
9.5.4
ANDT Specification Approval
Test reports for the verification tests specified in 9.5.3 are to be submitted to the Society for the purpose of ANDT specification
approval.
9.5.5
1
Onsite Verification Tests
After ANDT specifications are approved in accordance with the requirements specified in 9.5.4, a supplemental NDT is to be
performed at locations to be tested agreed to by the Society among those for which ANDT is performed for the purpose of verifying
the validity of ANDT results.
2
Notwithstanding the preceding 2, the aforementioned supplemental NDT may be reduced or omitted at the discretion of the
Society provided that ANDT results can be appropriately compared with technical documents submitted by the supplier and the validity
of ANDT results can be verified.
155
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
3
Documents with respect to probability of detection (POD) and sizing accuracy are to be created where deemed necessary by
the Society.
4
When the surveyor in attendance judges that the ANDT is not being carried out in accordance with its approved specifications ,
the ANDT is to be suspended immediately. In such cases, the supplier is to conduct an additional investigation and is to re-verify the
validity of the ANDT specifications in order to determine the cause of the failure.
5
When a significant nonconformity is found, the Society has the right to reject the ANDT results.
9.6
Surface Condition
9.6.1
Surface Condition
1
Locations to be tested are to be free from scales, loose rust, weld spatter, oil, grease, dirt or paint that may affect ANDT detection
sensitivity.
2
Where PAUT or TOFD are to be performed on painted surfaces, the suitability and sensitivity of the test are to be confirmed in
accordance with an appropriate transfer correction method defined in the specifications. In all cases, the reasons for transfer losses
exceeding 12 dB are to be examined, and further preparation of the scanning surfaces is to be conducted so that transfer losses do not
exceed 12 dB.
3
Where ANDT is to be performed on painted surfaces, the relevant procedures are to be qualified on a painted surface in
accordance with 9.5.3.
4
Requirements for acceptable test surface finishes are to ensure accurate and reliable detection of defects. For the testing of
welded joints, the weld is to be ground or machined in cases where the test surface is irregular or has other features likely to interfere
with the interpretation of ANDT results.
9.7
9.7.1
ANDT Selection
1
ANDT Selection
The locations to be tested and the number of ANDT tests are to be planned by the supplier according to ship design, ship or
equipment type and welding processes used.
2
Particular attention is to be paid to highly stressed areas.
3
The locations to be tested by ANDT are to be ones deemed appropriate by the Society according to material of the welded joints
to which ANDT is applied.
9.8
9.8.1
ANDT Requirements
1
General
Suppliers are to ensure that personnel performing ANDT or interpreting ANDT results are qualified to the appropriate level
specified in 9.4.
2
All ANDT is to be performed in accordance with ANDT specifications.
3
ANDT specifications are to be in accordance with the requirements provided below and those specified in 9.8.2, 9.8.3 or 9.8.4.
(1) ANDT specifications are to identify the members to be subjected to inspections, the ANDT method, the equipment to be used
and the full extent of the examinations including any test restrictions.
(2) ANDT specifications are to specify requirements for the clear identification of those locations to be tested as well as for a data
system or marking system to be applied to ensure repeatability of testing.
(3) ANDT specifications are to include the method and requirements for equipment calibration and functional checks, together with
specific technique sheets or scan plans, for the component under tests.
(4) ANDT specifications are to be approved by personnel qualified to Level III in the appropriate technique in accordance with 9.4.
(5) ANDT specifications are to be approved by the Society.
9.8.2
1
Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing (PAUT)
PAUT is to be performed according to procedures based on ISO 13588 and ISO 19285 or recognized equivalent standards
156
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
deemed acceptable by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
2
PAUT for base metals of metallic materials and non-metallic materials is to be as deemed appropriate by the Society.
3
The equipment used for PAUT is to conform to ISO 18563-1, ISO 18563-2, ISO 18563-3 or recognized equivalent standards
deemed acceptable by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
4
Depending on the complexity of the location to be tested and the access to surfaces, there may be a requirement for additional
scans or a supplementary NDT to ensure that full coverage of locations to be tested is achieved.
5
Where a special scan plan is applied, it is to be included in PAUT specifications for welds together with other representative
scans.
6
PAUT specifications are, at a minimum, to include the following information shown in Table M9.4. When an essential variable
given in Table M9.4 is to be changed from its specified value or range of values, the verification of the validity for the PAUT
specifications specified in 9.5.3 is to be performed according to the details of the change and then be approved by the Society.
7
When a nonessential variable given in Table M9.4 is to be changed from its specified value or range of values, the verification
of validity of the PAUT specifications specified in 9.5.3 may be omitted. In such cases, the PAUT specifications are to be rewritten and
then approved by the Society.
8
All changes of essential or nonessential variables are to be written in the most recent approved PAUT specifications specified
in the preceding 6 and 7.
9
The testing levels specified in the PAUT specifications are to be in accordance with ISO 13588 or equivalent recognized
standards accepted by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
10
The purpose of the testing is to be specified in the PAUT specifications. Based on this, the volume coverage is to be determined.
11
Scan plans (including volume coverage, base metal thickness and weld geometry) are to be submitted to the Society. Where
PAUT is applied as the NDT specified in Chapter 8, such plans may be included in the non-destructive inspection plan.
12
Where indication evaluations are only based on amplitude, E scans (or linear scans) are to be utilized to scan the fusion faces
of welds so that the sound beam is perpendicular to the fusion face ±5º. This, however, does not apply to cases where the Society finds
the existence and size of discontinuities at fusion faces are able to be appropriately detected by S (sectorial) scans using the PAUT
specifications. Where the POD of an S scan is verified, reference blocks containing suitable reflectors in fusion zone locations are to
be used.
13
The reference blocks used are to be appropriate for the testing level. The design and manufacture of reference blocks are to be
in accordance with ISO 13588 or recognized equivalent standards deemed by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle,
refer to the most recent version published.
14
Indications detected are to be evaluated either by length and height or by length and maximum amplitude. Indication assessment
is to be in accordance with ISO 19285 or recognized equivalent standards deemed acceptable by the Society. The 6 dB drop method is
only to be used as sizing technique for measuring indications that are larger than the beam width. The aforementioned standards, in
principle, refer to the most recent version published.
157
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
Table M9.4
PAUT Specification Requirements
Essential
Item
1
Variables
Material type or weld configuration to be inspected, including thickness dimensions and
material product form (castings, forgings, pipes, plates, etc.)
X
2
Scanning surfaces of locations to be tested (one surface, one side; one surface, both sides)
X
3
Technique(s) (straight beam, angle beam, contact, or immersion)
X
4
Scan plan (probe position according to base metal thickness, and groove shape and dimensions)
X
5
Angle(s) and mode(s) of wave propagation in the material (compressional wave or shear wave)
X
6
Search unit and wedge type, frequency, element size and number, element pitch and gap
dimensions, and element shape
7
Focal range (identify plane, depth, or sound path)
X
X
(1)
8
Virtual aperture size (number of elements, effective height
and element width)
9
Focal laws for E-scans and S-scans (range of element numbers used, angular range used,
element or angle increment change)
X
X
10
Special search units, wedges, shoes, or saddles (when used)
X
11
PAUT instrument(s)
X
12
Calibration (calibration block(s) and technique(s))
X
13
Directions and extent of scanning
X
14
Scanning method (manual, semi-automatic or automatic scanning)
X
15
Methods for sizing indications and for distinguishing geometric indications from flaw
indications
X
16
Methods for checking the effects of grating lobes and for treatment after checking said effects
X
17
Computer enhanced data acquisition (when used)
X
18
Scan overlap
X(2)
19
Supervisor and operator performance requirements (skill and qualifications)
X
20
Testing levels, acceptance levels and/ or recording levels
X
21
Supervisor and operator qualification level requirements
—
22
Surface condition (surface of location to be tested, reference block for calibration)
—
23
Couplant (brand name or type)
—
24
Post-inspection cleaning technique
—
25
Automatic alarm or recording equipment (when used)
—
26
Records, including minimum calibration data to be recorded (instrument settings)
—
27
Environmental and safety issues
—
28
Scan increment for recording PAUT data
—
29
Method for associating the locations to be tested, tests result and PAUT data
—
Notes:
(1) Effective height is the distance from the outside edge of the first to last element used in the focal law.
(2) To be treated as an essential variable only in cases where the range of scan overlap decreases.
158
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
9.8.3
1
Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD)
TOFD is to be performed according to procedures based on ISO 10863 and ISO 15626 or recognized equivalent standards
deemed acceptable by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
2
Depending on the complexity of the location to be tested and the access to surfaces, there may be a requirement for additional
scans or a supplementary NDT to ensure that full coverage of the locations to be tested is achieved.
3
TOFD specifications are, at a minimum, to include the following information shown in Table M9.5. When an essential variable
given in Table M9.5 is to be changed from its specified value or range of values, the verification of validity for the TOFD specifications
specified in 9.5.3 is to be performed according to the details of the change and then is to be approved by the Society.
4
When a nonessential variable given in Table M9.5 is to be changed from its specified value or range of values, the verification
of validity for the TOFD specifications specified in 9.5.3 may be omitted. In such cases, the TOFD specifications are to be rewritten
and then approved by the Society.
5
All changes of essential or nonessential variables are to be written in the most recent approved TOFD specifications specified
in the preceding 3 and 4.
6
The testing levels specified in TOFD specifications are to be in accordance with ISO 10863 or recognized standards accepted
by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
7
The purpose of the testing is to be specified in the TOFD specifications. Based on this, the volume coverage is to be determined.
8
Scan plans (including probe position, volume coverage, base metal thickness and weld geometry) are to be submitted to the
Society. Where TOFD is applied to the NDT specified in Chapter 8, such plans may be included in the non-destructive inspection plan.
9
Where TOFD is not appropriately performed in dead zones, additional scans or supplementary NDT is to be performed to ensure
that full coverage of the locations to be tested is achieved (Generally, either surfaces, back walls, or both may be dead zones).
159
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
Table M9.5
TOFD Specifications Requirements
Essential
Item
1
Variables
Material type or weld configuration to be inspected, including thickness dimensions and material product
X
form (castings, forgings, pipes, plates, etc.)
2
Scanning surfaces of locations to be tested (one surface, one side; one surface, both sides)
X
3
Angle(s) of wave propagation in the material (compressional wave or shear wave)
X
4
Search unit and wedge type, frequency, element size and shape
X
5
Special search units, wedges, shoes, or saddles (when used)
X
6
TOFD instrument(s) and software(s)
X
7
Calibration (calibration block(s) and technique(s))
X
8
Directions and extent of scanning
X
9
Scanning method (manual, semi-automatic or automatic scanning)
X
10
Scan increment for recording TOFD data
X(1)
11
Methods for sizing indications and distinguishing geometric indications from flaw indications
X
12
Computer enhanced data acquisition (when used)
X
13
Scan overlap
X(2)
14
Supervisor and operator performance requirements (skill and qualifications)
X
15
Testing levels, acceptance levels or recording levels
X
16
Supervisor and operator qualification level requirements
—
17
Surface condition (surface of location to be tested, reference block for calibration)
—
18
Couplant (brand name or type)
—
19
Post-inspection cleaning technique
—
20
Automatic alarm and/or recording equipment (when used)
—
21
Records, including minimum calibration data to be recorded (instrument settings)
—
22
Environmental and safety issues
—
Notes:
(1) To be treated as an essential variable only in cases where the range of scan increment for recording TOFD data increases .
(2) To be treated as an essential variable only in cases where the range of scan overlap decreases.
9.8.4
1
Digital Radiography (RT-D)
RT-D is to be performed according to procedures based on ISO 17636-2 and JIS Z 3110 or recognized equivalent standards
deemed acceptable by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.In cases where
other standards, however, are to be applied (e.g. those related to IQI placement), the Society approval is required in advance.
2
When an RT-D technique other than RT-S and RT-CR is applied, it is to be in accordance with the requirements of this chapter.
In such cases, the RT-D specifications are to be demonstrated as equivalent to the requirements of this chapter and approved by the
Society.
3
RT-D specifications are, at a minimum, to include the following information shown in Table M9.6. When the content of
approved RT-D specifications are changed, the verification of validity for the RT-D specifications specified in 9.5.3 is to be performed
according to the details of the change, and then is to be approved by the Society.
4
All content changes are to be written in the most recent approved RT-D specifications specified in the preceding 3.
5
For all RT-D techniques, detector (IP or digital detector array (DDA)) output quality control methods are to be specified in the
RT-D specifications in addition to the other required information.
6
RT-D specifications are to specify the level of magnification, post-processing tools, image/data security and storage for final
evaluation and reporting.
160
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
7
The testing levels specified in RT-D specifications are to be in accordance with ISO 13588 and ISO 19285 or recognized
equivalent standards deemed acceptable by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version
published.
Table M9.6
RT-D Specification Requirements
Item
1
Material type or weld configuration to be inspected, including thickness dimensions and material product
form (castings, forgings, pipes, plates, etc.)
2
Digitizing System Description:
(1) Manufacturer and model no. of digitizing system
(2) Physical size of the usable area of the image monitor
(3) Film size capacity of the scanning device
(4) Spot size(s) of the film scanning system (when applying RT-CR)
(5) Image display pixel size as defined by the vertical/horizontal resolution limit of the monitor
(6) Illuminance of the video display
(7) Data storage medium
3
Digitizing Technique:
(1) Digitizer spot size (in microns) to be used (when applying RT-S)
(2) Loss-less data compression technique, if used
(3) Method of image capture verification
(4) Image processing operations
(5) Time period for system verification
4
Spatial resolution used:
(1) Contrast sensitivity (density range obtained)
(2) Dynamic range used
(3) Spatial linearity of the system
(4) Material type and thickness range
(5) Source type or maximum X-ray voltage used
(6) Detector type
(7) Detector calibration (when applying DDA)
(8) Minimum source-to-object distance
(9) Distance between the test object and the detector
(10) Source size
(11) Test object scan plan (when applied)
(12) Image Quality Measurement Tools
(13) Image Quality Indicator (IQI)
(14) Wire Image Quality Indicator
(15) Duplex Image Quality Indicator
(16) Image Identification Indicator
(17) Testing levels, acceptance levels and/or recording levels
(18) Personnel qualification requirements
(19) Surface condition
(20) Records, including minimum calibration data to be recorded
(21) Environmental and Safety issues
161
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
9.9
9.9.1
Acceptance Level
General
1
This section specifies the acceptance criteria for the assessment of PAUT, TOFD and RT-D results.
2
It may be necessary to combine testing methods to facilitate accurate assessments. In such cases, the acceptance criteria for
each test method used are to be applied.
9.9.2
Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing (PAUT)
1
Quality levels, testing level and acceptance level are to be in accordance with Table M9.7.
2
Quality levels and acceptance levels for welded joints are to be in accordance with ISO 19285 or recognized equivalent standards
deemed acceptable by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
3
Acceptance level for the base metals of metallic materials and non-metallic materials are to be in accordance with the Rules or
as deemed appropriate by the Society.
Table M9.7
9.9.3
PAUT acceptance level
Quality level
Testing level
Acceptance level
ISO 5817
ISO 13588
ISO 19285
C, D
A
3
B
B
2
By agreement
C
1
Special application
D
By agreement
Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD)
1
Quality levels, testing level and acceptance level are to be in accordance with Table M9.8.
2
Quality levels and acceptance levels for welded joints are to be in accordance with ISO 15626 or recognized equivalent standards
deemed acceptable by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version published.
Table M9.8
TOFD acceptance level
Quality level
Testing level
Acceptance level
ISO 5817
ISO 10863
ISO 15626
B
C
1
C
At least B
2
D
At least A
3
162
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
9.9.4
Digital Radiography (RT-D)
1
Quality levels, testing level and acceptance level are to be in accordance with Table M9.9.
2
Quality levels and acceptance levels for welded joints are to be in accordance with ISO 10675-1, ISO 10675-2 or recognized
equivalent standards deemed acceptable by the Society. The aforementioned standards, in principle, refer to the most recent version
published.
Table M9.9
RT-D acceptance level
Quality level
Testing level
Acceptance level
ISO 5817 or ISO 10042
ISO 17636-2
ISO 10675-1 or ISO 10675-2
B
B
1
(1)
C
B
2
D
A
3
Note:
(1)
For circumferential weld testing, the minimum number of exposures may correspond to the requirements of ISO 176362 class A.
9.10
Test Records
9.10.1
General
In addition to the reference standards for the test, test records are to include at least the information specified in this section.
9.10.2
Test Object Information
Test records are to include the following test object information
(1) Test object identification
(2) Dimensions (including wall thickness)
(3) Material type and product form
(4) Geometrical configuration,
(5) Locations tested
(6) Welding process and heat treatment method
(7) Surface condition and temperature
(8) Manufacturing stage
(9) NK Rules referenced
9.10.3
Equipment Information
Test records are to include the equipment information specified in Table M9.10.
Table M9.10 Equipment information
Method
Information
All
Manufacturer and type of instrument, including identification numbers
(1)
PAUT
TOFD
RT-D
Manufacturer, type, frequency of phased array probes including number and size of elements, material
and angle(s) of wedges with identification numbers
(2)
Details of reference block(s) with identification numbers
(3)
Type of couplant used
(1)
Manufacturer, type, frequency, element size and beam angle(s) of probes with identification numbers
(2)
Details of reference block(s) with identification numbers
(3)
Type of couplant used
(1)
System of marking used
(2)
Radiation source, type and size of focal spot and identification of equipment used
(3)
Detector, screens and filters and detector basic spatial resolution
163
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
9.10.4
Test Method Information
Test records are to include the test method information specified in Table M9.11.
Table M9.11 Test method information
Method
All
PAUT
TOFD
RT-D
Information
(1)
Testing level and reference to written ANDT specifications
(2)
Test length
(3)
Reference points and coordinate system details
(4)
Method and values used for range and sensitivity settings
(5)
Signal processing details and scan increment settings
(6)
Access limitations and deviations from standards (if any)
(1)
Increment (E-scans) or angular increment (S-scans)
(2)
Element pitch and gap dimensions
(3)
Focus (calibration should be the same as scanning)
(4)
Virtual aperture size (number of elements and element width)
(5)
Element numbers used for focal laws
(6)
Documentation on permitted wedge angular range from manufacturer
(7)
Calibration documentation, TCG and ACG (angle gain compensation)
(8)
Scan plan
(1)
TOFD setup details
(2)
Offset scan details ( if required)
(1)
Detector position plan
(2)
Tube voltage used and current, or source type and activity
(3)
Time of exposure and source-to-detector distance
(4)
Type and position of image quality indicators
(5)
Achieved and required SNRN for RT-S
(6)
Achieved and required grey values or SNRN for RT-CR
(7)
For RT-S, type and parameters such as gain, frame time, frame number, pixel (size, calibration
procedure)
(8)
For RT-CR, scanner type and parameters such as pixel size, scan speed, (gain, laser intensity, laser spot
size)
(9)
Image-processing parameters used (e.g. digital filters)
164
2023-12 Rules for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter 9)
9.10.5
Test Result Information
Test records are to include the test result information specified in Table M9.12.
Table M9.12 Test result information
Method
Information
All
(1)
Acceptance criteria applied
(2)
Tabulated survey records (including location and size of relevant indications and assessment results)
(3)
Test results (including data on software used)
(4)
Test date
(5)
References to the raw data used
(6)
Date(s) of scan or exposure and test report
(7)
Operator names, signatures and certification levels
(1)
Phased array images of at least those locations where relevant indications have been detected on hard
PAUT
copy, all images or data available in soft format
(2)
TOFD
TOFD images of at least those locations where relevant TOFD indications have been detected
9.10.6
1
Reference points and coordinate system details
Other
ANDT results are to be recorded and evaluated by the supplier on a continual basis. Where deemed necessary by the surveyor,
these records are to be submitted to the surveyor.
2
The supplier is responsible for the review, interpretation, evaluation and acceptance of the ANDT results. Test records are to
include information related to test results in accordance with the acceptance criteria specified in the ANDT specifications.
3
Where a special ANDT is applied, the particular requirements and details are to be included in the test records in accordance
with the recognized standards for each ANDT.
4
The supplier is to keep the inspection records specified in 9.10 for a period of time deemed appropriate by the Society.
9.11
Unacceptable Indications and Repairs
9.11.1
General
All indications (discontinuities) exceeding the applied acceptance criteria are to be classed as defects, and are to be eliminated
and repaired according to surveyor instructions. NDT for repaired parts is to be performed in accordance with the Rules or surveyor
instructions.
165
Contents
GUIDANCE FOR THE SURVEY AN D CON STRU CTION OF ST EEL SHIPS ....................................... 2
Part M
WELDING ......................................................................................................................... 2
M1
GEN ERAL .............................................................................................................................. 2
M1.1
General ............................................................................................................................ 2
M1.2
Tests before Welding Works ............................................................................................. 2
M1.4
Inspection and Quality for Weld ....................................................................................... 2
M2
WELDIN G WORKS................................................................................................................. 4
M2.1
General ............................................................................................................................ 4
M2.2
Work Scheme ................................................................................................................... 7
M2.4
Welding Process ............................................................................................................... 8
M4
WELDIN G PROCEDURE AN D RELAT ED SP ECIFICAT IONS .............................................11
M4.1
General ...........................................................................................................................11
M4.2
Tests for Butt Welded Joints ...........................................................................................16
M4.3
Tests for Fillet Weld Joints..............................................................................................17
M5
WELDERS AND THEIR QUAL IFICAT ION TEST S ...............................................................20
M5.1
General ...........................................................................................................................20
M5.2
Qualifications ..................................................................................................................21
M5.3
Qualification tests ...........................................................................................................22
M6
WELDIN G CON SUMABL ES .................................................................................................24
M6.1
General ...........................................................................................................................24
M6.2
Electrodes for Manual Arc Welding for Mild and High Tensile Steels and Steels for Low
Temperature Service .....................................................................................................................24
M6.7
M7
Welding Consumables for Stainless Steel ........................................................................27
Non-Destructive Testing Service Suppliers .............................................................................28
M7.1
General ...........................................................................................................................28
M8
NON-DESTRUCTIVE INSPECTION FOR THE WELDED JOINTS OF HULL
CONST RUCT IONS ..........................................................................................................................29
M8.1
General ...........................................................................................................................29
M8.4
General Plan of Non-destructive Inspection .....................................................................29
M8.5
Non-destructive Testing Procedure ..................................................................................30
M8.6
Non-destructive Testing Criteria .....................................................................................30
M8.9
Repair of Faulty Welds, etc. .............................................................................................30
M9
Advanced Non-Destructive Testing.........................................................................................32
M9.5
ANDT Specification Verification ......................................................................................32
1
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M1)
GUIDANCE FOR THE SURVEY AND CONSTRUCTION OF STEEL SHIPS
Part M
M1
M1.1
M1.1.1
WELDING
GENERAL
General
Application
With respect to the provisions of 1.1.1-3, Part M of the Rules, in the case of partial weldings such as repairing, a welding
method according to the standards different from Part M of the Rules (e.g. underwater welding according to AWS D3.6) may be
applied when deemed to be appropriate by the Society after considering the degree and scope of application. In such cases, the welding
procedure and related specifications related to the intended welding are to be submitted to the Society for confirmation in advance.
M1.2
M1.2.1
Tests before Welding Works
Execution of Tests
The wording “survey methods which it considers to be appropriate” in 1.2.1-1, Part M of the Rules means survey methods
which the Society considers to be able to obtain information equivalent to that obtained through traditional ordinary surveys where the
Surveyor is in attendance, notwithstanding any of the requirements in this Part.
M1.4
Inspection and Quality for Weld
M1.4.1
Implementation of Inspection
“Where the quality and the control system of weld are deemed appropriate by the Society” specified in 1.4.1-2, Part M of the
Rules, means that the quality and the control system of manufacturer are approved by the Society according to “Rules for Approval
of Manufacturers and Service Suppliers” or deemed equivalent thereto.
M1.4.2
1
Quality and Repair
In the inspection during welding works specified in 1.4.2-1(1), Part M of the Rules, the wording “Inspection items during
welding works which are designated by the Surveyor” means the following examples.
(1) Confirmation of edge preparation (intersection of weld line, fillet welding joints where the grooves are required from designing
point, on-site cutting portion, etc.)
(2) Confirmation of the fitting accuracy after tack welding (gaps, misalignments, deformations, etc.)
(3) Prevention of the structural mismatching between important members (connecting parts between bulkhead and inner bottom
plate, etc.)
(4) Confirmation of the preheating
(5) Confirmation of the condition after back chipping
(6) Other matters deemed necessary by the Surveyor
2
In visual inspection of welded joints specified in 1.4.2-1(2), Part M of the Rules, the Surveyor may require magnetic particle
examination or liquid penetrant examination where deemed necessary.
3
In non-destructive inspection of welded joints specified in 1.4.2-1(3), Part M of the Rules, “non-destructive inspection which
is separately specified by the Society” means the followings in addition to Chapter 8, Part M of the Rules.
(1) For the welded joints of machinery, piping and tanks of liquefied gas carrier, non-destructive inspection is to be in accordance
2
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M1)
with the relevant requirements in the Rules.
(2) For the welded joints of hull construction of aluminium alloy, welded joints of equipment or welded joints of connection
between hull structure and equipment, non-destructive inspection is to be deemed appropriate by the Surveyor.
3
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M2)
M2
M2.1
M2.1.1
1
WELDING WORKS
General
Application
In 2.1.1-3, Part M of the Rules, application of welding consumables used for rolled stainless steel etc. is to comply with the
requirements specified in -2 to -5 as follows.
2
Rolled Stainless Steel
(1) The welding consumables corresponding to the kind of the steel materials are, in principle, to be selected in accordance with
Table M2.1.1-1. Other considerations for selecting welding consumables may be acceptable in cases where technical documents
clarifying the suitability of the selection are submitted and deemed to be appropriate by the Society.
(2) For welded joints of steels of which the minimum proof stress is specified to greater value in accordance with 3.5.5-1, Part K
of the Rules, the welding consumables of which the specified minimum proof stress is equivalent to or greater than the steels
are to be used.
3
Aluminium Alloys
(1) The selection of welding consumables for the welding joints of the aluminium alloys is to be as specified in Table M2.1.1-2.
However, for the welding joints of 6000 series alloys, RA/WA, RB/WB or RC/WC may be used.
(2) The selection of welding consumables for welding joints to different aluminium alloys is to comply with the followings.
(a) For the welding joints of 5000 series alloys, any welding consumables corresponding to the kind of alloys specified in
Table M2.1.1-2 may be used.
(b) For welding joints of 6000 series alloys, RA/WA, RB/WB or RC/WC in lieu of RD/WD may be used.
(c) For welding joints of 5000 series alloys and 6000 series alloys, the welding consumables corresponding to 5000 series
alloys specified in Table M2.1.1-2 may be used.
4
Stainless steel pipes, steel tubes for boilers and heat exchangers, steel pipes for pressure piping, headers and steel pipes for low
temperature service
The welding consumables corresponding to the kind of steel pipes (of tubes) or headers are, in principle, to be selected in accordance
with Table M2.1.1-1 or Table M2.1.1-3. Other considerations for selecting welding consumables may be acceptable in cases where
technical documents clarifying the suitability of the selection are submitted and deemed to be appropriate by the Society.
5
Rolled steels for boilers and pressure vessels
The welding consumables corresponding to the kind of steel are, in principle, to be selected in accordance with Table M2.1.1-4.
Other considerations for selecting welding consumables may be acceptable in cases where technical documents clarifying the suitability
of the selection are submitted and deemed to be appropriate by the Society.
4
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M2)
Table M2.1.1-1
Application of Welding Consumables
(Rolled Stainless Steel and Stainless Steel Pipes)
Kind and grade of base plates
Rolled Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel Pipe
KSUS304
K304TP
Grade of applicable welding consumables
KD308
KY308
KW308
(1)
KY308L
KY308L
KW308L
KW308L
KU308L(1)
KU308L
KY308N2
KW308N2
-
KSUS304L
K304LTP
KD308L
KD308L
KSUS304N1
-
KD308N2
(1)
KU308
(1)
KSUS304N2
-
KD308N2
KY308N2
KW308N2
-
KSUS304LN
-
KSUS309S
K309STP
KD308L(1)
KD309
KY308L(1)
KY309
KW308L(1)
KW309
KU308L(1)
KU309
KSUS310S
K310STP
KD309L(1)
KD310
KY309L(1)
KY310
KW309L(1)
KW310
KU309L(1)
KU310
-
KY310S
-
-
KSUS316
K316TP
KSUS316L
KD316
KY316
KW316
KU316
K316LTP
KD316L(1)
KD316L
KY316L(1)
KY316L
KW316L(1)
KW316L
KU316L(1)
KU316L
KSUS316N
KSUS316LN
-
KD316
KD316L(1)
KY316
KY316L(1)
KW316
KW316L(1)
KU316
KU316L(1)
KSUS317
K317TP
KSUS317L
KSUS317LN
KD317
KY317
KW317
KU317
KD317L(1)
KY317L(1)
KW317L(1)
KU317L(1)
K317LTP
-
KD317L
KD317L(1)
KY317L
KY317L(1)
KW317L
KW317L(1)
KU317L
KU317L(1)
KSUS321
K321TP
KD347
KY321
KY347
KW347
KU347
KSUS323L
-
KD2209
KY2209
KW2209
-
KSUS329J1
K329J1TP
KD329J1
-
-
-
KSUS329J3L
KSUS329J4L
K329J3LTP
K329J4LTP
KD2209
KD329J4L
KY2209
KY329J4L
KW2209
KW329J4L
-
KSUS347
K347 TP
KD347
KY347
KW347
KU347
KSUS821L1
-
KD2209
KY2209
KW2209
-
Note:
(1) The specified minimum proof stress and tensile strength of the applicable welding
consumables are equivalent to or greater than those of the base plate steels are to be used.
Table M2.1.1-2
Application of Welding Consumables (Aluminium Alloys)
Kind and grade of aluminium alloy to be welded
5000 series
6000 series
Grade of applicable welding consumables
(1)
5754P
RA/WA，RB/WB，RC/WC
5086P，5086S
RB/WB，RC/WC
5083P，5083S
RC/WC
5383P，5383S
RC/WC
5059P，5059S
RC/WC
5456P
RC/WC
6005AS
RD/WD
6061P，6061S
RD/WD
6082S
RD/WD
Note:
(1) The symbols used for the welding consumables in this Table are the last two characters
used for the same materials shown in Table M6.51.
5
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M2)
Table M2.1.1-3
Application of Welding Consumables
(Steel tubes for boiler and heat exchangers, steel pipes for pressure piping,
headers and steel pipes for low temperature service）
Kind of base pipe (or tube)
Grade of applicable welding consumables (1)
Grade of base pipe (or tube)
KSTB33, KSTB35,
1, 2, 3, 51, 52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, L1, L2, L3
KSTPG38, KSTS38, KSTPT38
Steel tubes for boilers and heat
exchangers,
steel pipes for pressure piping,
headers
Steel pipes for low temperature
service
KSTB42,
51, 52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, L2, L3, 2Y42,
KSTPG42, KSTS42, KSTPT42,
3Y42, 4Y42, 5Y42
KBH-1
KSTS49, KSTPT49,
51, 52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, L3, 2Y42, 3Y42,
KBH-2
4Y42, 5Y42
KLPA
L1, L2, L3, 54, 54Y40, 55Y40
KLPB, KLPC
L2, L3
KLP9
L91, L92
Note:
(1) The symbols for the welding consumables listed above indicate materials which are specified in Table M6.1, Table
M6.12, Table M6.21, Table M6.29 or Table M6.58 that have the same mark at the end. (For example, “3” indicates
KMW3, KAW3, KSW3 and KEW3; “L3” indicates KMWL3, KAWL3 and KSWL3; and “3Y42” indicates KMW3Y42,
KAW3Y42 and KSW3Y42.)
6
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M2)
Table M2.1.1-4
Application of Welding Consumables
(Rolled steels for boilers and pressure vessels）
Kind of base plate
Grade of applicable welding consumables (1)
Grade of base plate
51, 52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, L2, L3, 2Y42,
KP42
3Y42, 4Y42, 5Y42
Rolled steel for boilers
51, 52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, L3, 2Y42, 3Y42,
KP46, KPA46, KP49, KPA49
4Y42, 5Y42
2, 3, 52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, 2Y42, 3Y42,
KPV24(2)
4Y42, 5Y42
52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40, 2Y42, 3Y42, 4Y42,
KPV32(3)
Rolled steel for pressure vessels
5Y42
63Y47, 2Y42, 3Y42, 4Y42, 5Y42, 2Y46, 3Y46, 4Y46, 5Y46,
KPV36
3Y50, 4Y50, 5Y50
KPV42, KPV46
63Y47, 3Y50, 4Y50, 5Y50, 3Y55, 4Y55, 5Y55
KPV50
3Y55, 4Y55, 5Y55, 3Y62, 4Y62, 5Y62
Notes:
(1) The symbols for the welding consumables listed above indicate materials which are specified in Table M6.1, Table
M6.12, Table M6.21, Table M6.29 or Table M6.58 that have the same mark at the end. (For example, “3” indicates
KMW3, KAW3, KSW3 and KEW3; “L3” indicates KMWL3, KAWL3 and KSWL3; and “3Y42” indicates KMW3Y42,
KAW3Y42 and KSW3Y42.)
(2) The symbols for the welding consumables listed above as “2, 3, 52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40” are
applicable only for KMW and KSW.
(3) The symbols for the welding consumables listed above as “52, 53, 54, 52Y40, 53Y40, 54Y40, 55Y40” are applicable
only for KMW and KSW.
M2.2
M2.2.1
1
Work Scheme
Welding Application Plan
In 2.2.1(2), Part M of the Rules, for steels considered to have the brittle crack arrest properties specified in 3.12, Part K of
the Rules, the welding procedures and related specifications approved for the steels excluding “BCA6000” or “BCA8000” given in
Table K3.40 or Table K3.41, Part K of the Rules, may be applied except for the large heat input welding specified in Note (5) of
Table M4.2, Part M of the Rules.
2
With regard to corrosion resistant steel for cargo oil tanks, the wording “other items considered necessary by the Society”
stipulated in 2.2.1(3), Part M of the Rules means brands of welding consumables and brands of corrosion resistant steel listed in
“Particulars of Approval Conditions” of corrosion resistant steel.
M2.2.2
1
Welding Procedure and Related Specification
For 2.2.2-2(2), Part M of the Rules, suffixes added to the grades specified in Table K3.40 or Table K3.41, Part K of the
Rules (e.g. “-BCA6000”) need not be included except for the large heat input welding specified in Note (5) of Table M4.2, Part M of
the Rules.
2
For 2.2.2-2(2), Part M of the Rules, suffixes added to the grades specified in Table K3.42, Part K of the Rules (e.g. “-RCU”)
need not be included.
7
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M2)
M2.4
Welding Process
M2.4.1
1
Selection of Welding Consumables
With respect to the provisions of 2.4.1, Part M of the Rules, semi-automatic welding consumables may be used in automatic
welding work.
2
“It is deemed to be appropriate by the Society” specified in 2.4.1(2)(c), Part M of the Rules is, in principle, to be as provided
below:
(1) The steel materials are to be in accordance with the followings:
(a) The steel materials are to be KA32, KD32, KA36 or KD36 of TMCP not exceeding 25 mm in thickness.
(b) The carbon equivalent (𝐶𝑒𝑞) of steel materials is to be calculated in accordance with Note (3) of Table M2.4.3-1 and to be
not more than 0.36%.
(2) The welding method is to be one pass horizontal fillet welding either by manual welding or gravity welding, and to have been
approved by the Society in accordance with the requirements in M4.3.1.
(3) Approval is to have been obtained form the Society for electrodes as being the non-low hydrogen electrodes for high tensile
steel in accordance with the requirements in M6.2.1.
(4) Notwithstanding the requirement in preceding (3), low hydrogen electrodes are to be used for repair welding.
3
“Welding consumables different from those given in Table M2.1 may be selected” specified in 2.4.1-1(3), Part M of the Rules,
means cases where the standard value for the strength of the welding metal is lower than the standard value for the strength of base
metal.
4
Backing flux used for submerged arc one side automatic welding is not included in the backing specified in 2.4.1-2, Part M of
the Rules
5
The wording “measures deemed appropriate by the Society” stipulated in Note (4) of Table M2.1, Part M of the Rules means
applying corrosion protection in accordance with 3.3.5.4-1(1), Part 1, Part C of the Rules or 22.4.3(1), Part CS of the Rules to
welded parts.
M2.4.3
Preheating, etc.
The control standards for short bead, preheating and line heating in the processing and welding of rolled steels for hulls and
rolled steels for low temperature service are to be in accordance with Table M2.4.3-1.
8
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M2)
Table M2.4.3-1
Control Standards for the Processing and Welding of Rolled Steels for Hulls and Rolled Steels for Low
Temperature Service
Items for control Mild steel
standard
High tensile steels(1)
Conventional type (2)
Grade Control Grade Control standard
standard
TMCP type
Grade Carbon
Control standard
equivalent
for steel
𝐶𝑒𝑞(3)(4)(5)
Length Tack and KE
of short repair
bead (6) weld of
scar
Repairin
g
of
welded
bead
Preheati Tempera KA
ng in
ture need KB
working preheati KD
ng
KE
(9)
Preheati
ng
temperat
ure
Line
Maximu KA
heating m
KB
(Therm heating KD
al
temperat KE
fairing) ure of
steel
Surface
30 mm KA32 50 mm or over
or over KD32
KE32
(12)
KA36
KD36
KE36
KA32 0.36% or 10 mm or over
KD32 below(7)
KE32
KA36
KD36
KE36
(8)
30 mm or over
-5°C or KA32 5°C or below(10)(12)
below KD32
KE32
KA36
KA32 0.36% or 0°C or below (10)
KD32 below(7)
KE32
KA36
20 ° C KD36 50°C or over
or over KE36
KD36
KE36
(11)
20°C or over
Rolled steels for low temperature
service(13)
Carbon
Control standard
equivalent
for steel
𝐶𝑒𝑞(3)(4)(5)
More than 50 mm or over
0.36%
0.36% or 10 mm or over
below
More than 50 mm or over
0.36%
0.36% or 30 mm or over
below
More than 5°C or below
0.36%
0.36% or 0°C or below
below
More than 50°C or over
0.36%
0.36% or 20°C or over
below
KA32 Water
650°C or KA32 0.38% or
KD32 cooling just below
KD32 below
KE32 after heating
KA36
KA36
KD36
Water
1000°C
cooling just or below
after
heating
－
Air cooling
900°C or
after
below
heating
KD36 Air cooling 900°C or
KE36 after heating below
Air cooling
after
heating
Air cooling 900°C or KE32 0.38% or Water
900°C More than Air cooling 900°C or
and
KE36 below
cooling just or below 0.36%
and
below
below
subsequent (Starting
after
subsequent (Starting
water
heating
water
temperature
temperature
cooling after of water
cooling
of water
heating
after
cooling is to
cooling is to
heating
be 500°C
be 500°C
or below)
or below)
Air cooling
0.36% or
900°C or
after
below
below
heating
(Starting
temperature
of water
cooling is to
be 550°C
or below)
Notes:
(1) In KA40, KD40, KE40 and KE47, the control standards for the conventional high tensile steels are applied except for
the case specially approved by the Society. KF32, KF36 and KF40 are to be as deemed to appropriate by the Society.
(2) The conventional type is the high tensile steel of which grades of heat treatment specified in Notes (3) of Table K3.3, as
other than the TMCP type.
(3) 𝐶𝑒𝑞 is to be calculated by the following formula and is to be rounded to two decimal places.
𝑀𝑛 𝐶𝑟 + 𝑀𝑜 + 𝑉 𝑁𝑖 + 𝐶𝑢
𝐶𝑒𝑞 = 𝐶 +
+
+
(%)
6
5
15
(4) The control standards when the value of 𝐶𝑒𝑞 exceeds the value in this Table, in principle, are to be applied as
conventional type.
(5) When there are differences in 𝐶𝑒𝑞 of the steel materials, the control standard corresponding to the higher value of 𝐶𝑒𝑞
is to be applied.
(6) The length of bead is to be measured from the starting point of weld to the centre of the crater at the termination of the
weld.
9
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M2)
(7) Where cold cracking susceptibility 𝑃𝑐𝑚 is substituted for 𝐶𝑒𝑞, the control standards are to be as deemed to appropriate
by the Society. 𝑃𝑐𝑚 is to be calculated by the following formula and is to be rounded to two decimal places.
𝑆𝑖 𝑀𝑛 𝐶𝑢 𝑁𝑖 𝐶𝑟 𝑀𝑜 𝑉
𝑃𝑐𝑚 = 𝐶 +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ 5𝐵 (%)
30 20 20 60 20 15 10
(8) It is recommended that for KE32 and KE36 to be not less than 30 mm.
(9) Even in cases where the temperature exceeds the value given in this Table, preheating may be required depending on
the thickness of steel materials, degree of restrain and welding heat input.
(10) Electrodes are to be of the low hydrogen electrodes. However, in horizontal butt welding, overhead fillet welding, etc.,
extremely low hydrogen electrodes (the quantity of hydrogen measured by the glycerine replacement method is not
more than 0.03 cm3/g) is to be used, or in cases the temperature exceeds the value in this Table. Preheating is to be
carried out.
(11) It is recommended that the conventional control standards for the conventional high tensile steels are applied to KE.
(12) For KE47, in the cases where Pcm is less than or equal to 0.19, 25 mm of short bead length and air temperature of 0°C or
below may be adopted where approved by the Society.
(13) These control standards apply to KL24A，KL24B，KL27，KL33 and KL37. The standards for other grades are to be as
deemed appropriate by the Society.
(14) For steels considered to have brittle crack arrest properties specified in 3.12, Part K of the Rules, the control standards
for the steels excluding “BCA6000” or “BCA8000” given in Table K3.40 or Table K3.41, Part K of the Rules, are to
be applied.
10
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M4)
M4
M4.1
M4.1.1
WELDING PROCEDURE AND RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
General
Application
The wording “welding procedure” specified in 4.1.1-3, Part M of the Rules is the following welding procedure qualification
test such as for stud welding.
(1) Test assemblies
The four studs of maximum diameter used in the actual work are to be welded to the test assembly in suitable dimensions as
specified in Fig. M4.1.1-1 at proper intervals. The test assembly is to be welded under the same or similar condition employed
in the actual work.
(2) Bend test
Three pieces of four studs are to be bent from the root to an angle of ninety degrees with the hammer or lever as specified in
Fig. M4.1.1-2. In this case, the stud is not allowed to be broken or to be cracked.
(3) Macroscopic test
The macroscopic specimen is to be produced from the centre line section of the rest one stud, and it is to be inspected the
deposited condition and the existence of defect.
(4) Hardness test
Vickers hardness is to be measured at the positions shown in Fig. M4.1.1-3 of the specimen used by macroscopic test in
preceding (3). However, hardness values are for reference only.
Fig. M4.1.1-1 Test Assembly
Fig. M4.1.1-2 Test Procedure
Fig. M4.1.1-3 Guidance of Hardness Tests
M4.1.3
Execution of Tests
The wording “deemed appropriate by the Society” specified in 4.1.3-2, Part M of the Rules means the following (1) to (3).
(1) Where the technical documents concerning the welding procedure which deemed appropriate by the Surveyor.
(2) Where the alteration of procedure are considered by the Surveyor to be not impairing the property of the joint.
(3) Where the welding conditions of semi-automatic fillet welding, which has already been approved by the Society, are applied to
11
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M4)
automatic fillet welding (including robotic welding). In this case, the automatic operation is to be confirmed as appropriate by
the Surveyor.
M4.1.4
1
Range of Approval
Application of provisory requirement specified in 4.1.4-1, Part M of the Rules is to be applied to 4.1.4-1(4)(c), Part M of the
Rules and to be in accordance with Table 4.1.4-1. In this case, test records which the Surveyor deems appropriate are to be submitted
to the Surveyor.
Table M4.1.4-1
Range of Approval for Rolled Steel for the Large Heat Input Welding
Grade of test assembly(1)
Approval range of grade
KA
KA
KB
KA, KB
KD
KA, KB, KD
KA32
KA, KA32
KD32
KA, KB, KD, KA32, KD32
KA36
KA, KA32, KA36
KD36
KA, KB, KD, KA32, KD32, KA36, KD36
KA40
KA32, KA,36, KA40
KD40
KA32, KD32, KA36, KD36, KA40, KD40
Note:
(1) For thickness above 50 mm, this Table is not applicable.
2
With respect to the provisions of 4.1.4-1(1) and -2(1), Part M of the Rules, fillet weld joints, T-joints with full penetration and
T-joints with partial penetration welding positions included in the approval of butt welding are to be in accordance with the following.
(1) For plates, Table M4.1.4-2 and Table M5.10, Part M of the Rules
(2) For pipes, Table M4.1.4-3 and Table M5.11, Part M of the Rules
Table M4.1.4-2
Correspondence of Fillet weld joints, T-joints with Full Penetration and T-joints with Partial Penetration
Welding Positions to Butt Welding Positions for Plates
Butt welding position
Fillet weld joints, T-joints with full penetration and T(welding position during joints with partial penetration welding positions deemed
to be included in butt welding positions
tests)
Flat (PA)
Flat (PA)
Horizontal-vertical (PB)
Horizontal (PC)
Horizontal (PC)
Horizontal-vertical (PB)
Vertical upward (PF)
Vertical upward (PF)
Vertical downward (PG) Vertical downward (PG)
Overhead (PE)
Horizontal overhead (PD)
Overhead (PE)
12
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M4)
Table M4.1.4-3
Correspondence of Fillet weld joints and T-joints with Full Penetration Welding Positions to Butt Welding
Positions for Pipes
Butt welding position
Fillet weld joints and T-joints with full penetration welding
(welding position during tests)
positions deemed to be included in butt welding positions
Flat (PA)
Flat (PA)
Horizontal vertical (PB)
3
Horizontal (PC)
Horizontal vertical (PB)
Tube position for welding upwards (PH)
Tube position for welding upwards (PH)
Tube position for welding downwards (PJ)
Tube position for welding downwards (PJ)
The wording “Set-on, Set-in and Set-through” specified in 4.1.4-2(1), Part M of the Rules means the following (1) to (3).
(1) Set-on means a shape in which the end of the pipe is abutted against the surface of the flange (or main pipe)(Fig. M4.1.4-1 a)).
(2) Set-in means a shape in which a pipe is inserted into a socket within the flange (or main pipe) (Fig. M4.1.4-1 b)).
(3) Set-through means a shape in which a pipe penetrates a hole in the flange (or main pipe) (Fig. M4.1.4-1 c)).
Fig. M4.1.4-1 Kinds of pipe assemblies
Notes:
(1) 1 is the pipe (or tube), 2 is the flange (or the main pipe (or tube))
(2) D is outside diameter of the pipe (or tube)
(3) t is thickness of the pipe (or tube)
(4) tf is thickness of the flange(or the main pipe (or tube))
4
The wording “deemed appropriate by the Society” specified in 4.1.4-3, Part M of the Rules means the following (1) to (3).
(1) Heat input
Heat input of welding for actual works is to be complied with the requirements specified in the following (a) and (b).
(a) The upper limit of heat input approved is 1.25 times the heat input used in welding the test piece, but not over 55 kJ/cm.
However, for high heat input processes specified in Table 4.2 Notes(5), Part M of the Rules, the upper limit is 1.1 time
the heat input used in welding the test piece.
(b) The lower limit of heat input approved is 0.75 times the heat input used in welding the test piece.
(2) Preheating and interpass temperature
13
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M4)
Preheating and interpass temperature for actual work are to be complied with the requirements specified in the following (a)
and (b).
(a) The minimum preheating temperature is that used in the qualification test.
(b) The maximum interpass temperature is that used in the qualification test.
(3) Post-weld heat treatment
The heat treatment used in the qualification test is to be maintained during actual work. Holding time may be adjusted as a
function of thickness.
Table M4.1.4-4
Type of Welded Joint
Type of welded joint for test assembly
Butt welding
One side
Both side
Range of approval
With backing
A
A, C
Without backing
B
A, B, C, D
With gouging
C
C
Without gouging
D
A, C, D
E
E
Fillet welding
Table M4.1.4-5
Thickness of test assembly t (mm)
(1)
Thickness
Range of approval
t ≦3
0.5 mm to 2t(2)
3＜ t ≦20
3 mm to 2t(2)
t ＞20
0.8t and above
Notes:
(1) In case of joints between dissimilar thickness, thickness t is to be in accordance with the followings.
Butt joints: t is the thickness of the thinner plate
Fillet joints: t is the thickness of the thicker plate
(2) For combination welding procedure, maximum thickness is to be t (See M4.1.4-4(2)(h)).
Table M4.1.4-6
Throat Thickness of Fillet Welds
Throat thickness of test assembly ℓ（mm）
Range of approval
ℓ＜10
10≤ ℓ
0.75ℓ to 1.5ℓ
7.5 mm and above
14
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M4)
Table M4.1.4-7
Kind of Aluminium Alloys
Material
Grade of test assembly
Range of approval(2), (3)
classification
5754P
A
(A+A)
B
(A+A), (B+B), (A+B)
C
(C+C)
5086P, 5086S,
Aluminium alloys
5000
5083P, 5083S,
series
5383P, 5383S,
(1)
5059P, 5059S,
5456P
6000
series
6005AS
6061P, 6061S
6082S
Notes:
(1) All temper conditions indicated with grades are to be included (See Table K8.3).
(2) Combination of the same material’s classification includes welded joints of different grade of aluminium
alloys within the same material’s classification. Combination of the different material’s classification
includes welded joints of different grade of aluminium alloys within each material’s classification.
(3) The qualification of one alloy also qualifies the procedures for other alloys of the same material
classification which have an equal or lower specified tensile strength after welding.
Table M4.1.4-8
Range of approval for Rolled Steels for Low Temperature Service
Grade of test assembly
Approval range of grade(1)
KL24A
KL24A
KL24B
KL24A, KL24B
KL27
KL24A, KL24B, KL27
KL33
KL24A, KL24B, KL27, KL33
KL37
KL37
KL2N30
KL2N30
KL3N32
KL3N32
KL5N43
KL5N43
KL9N53
KL9N53
KL9N60
KL9N60
Note:
(1) Only when the same kind of heat treatment is used.
5
For the wording “deemed appropriate by the Society” specified in 4.1.4-5, Part M of the Rules, the approval of welding
procedure and related specifications of rolled stainless steel, aluminium alloys and rolled steels for low temperature service are to
comply with the requirements specified in the following (1) to (3), provided that the applied welding condition is the same.
(1) Rolled Stainless Steel
For rolled stainless steel, 4.1.4-1 and -3, Part M of the Rules (excluding the requirements of large heat input welding) is to be
applied. However, the kind of base metal is to be the same as test assembly. Where the provisory requirement specified in 3.5.51, Part K of the Rules is applied, the steel with the specified minimum proof stress less than that of the tested steels may be
included. In addition, the heat input, interpass temperature and post-weld heat treatment for KSUS329J1, KSUS329J3L,
KSUS329J4L, KSUS323L, KSUS821L1, K329J1TP, K329J3LTP and K329J4LTP are to be in accordance with the following
(a) to (c).
(a) Heat input
15
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M4)
Heat input of welding for actual work is to comply with the following requirements:
i)
The upper limit of heat input approved is to be 1.25 times the heat input when welding the test assembly, but is not
to exceed 35 kJ/cm.
ii)
The lower limit of heat input approved is to be 0.75 times the heat input when welding the test assembly, but is not
to exceed 5 kJ/cm.
(b) Interpass temperature
The maximum interpass temperature is to be the one used when welding the test assembly, but is not to exceed 150°C.
(c) Post-weld heat treatment
Post-weld heat treatment is to be avoided.
(2) Aluminium Alloys
The requirements specified in the following (a) thorough (h) are to be applied.
(a) Type of welded joints
Type of welded joints is to be as specified in Table M4.1.4-4. Where the welding procedures of butt welded joints are
approved, the fillet welded joints corresponding to the welding position are to be included.
(b) Thickness
Range of thickness is to be as specified in Table M4.1.4-5.
(c) Throat thickness of fillet welds
Throat thickness of fillet welds is to be as specified in Table M4.1.4-6.
(d) Kind of aluminium alloys
Kind of aluminium alloys is to be as specified in Table M4.1.4-7.
(e) Kind of welding consumables
Range of approval for welding consumables is to be as specified in the followings.
(i)
Welding consumables having the same grade as used for the procedure qualification tests.
(ii) Welding consumables having the higher specified strength than the welding consumable used for the procedure
qualification tests.
(f)
Preheat and interpass temperature
Preceding -4(2) is to be applied.
(g) Post-weld heat treatment or ageing
The heat treatment or ageing used in the qualification test is to be maintained during actual work. However, prolonged
natural ageing may be used as the artificial ageing for 6000 series alloys.
(h) Joints for combination welding procedure
In the joint welded by dissimilar processes (combination welding), the subsequent process may be excluded, provided the
weldings are applied within the approved thickness range and no alteration of the welding sequence from approved
condition is made.
(3) Rolled Steels for Low Temperature Service
- 4.1.4-1 and -3, Part M of the Rules are to be applied. However, thickness and the kind of base metal are to be in accordance
with the following (a) and (b):
(a) Thickness
The range of thickness is to be as specified in Table M4.2, Part M of the Rules. Moreover, the upper limit of the range
of thickness is, in principle, to be a maximum of 40 mm. An upper limit of more than 40 mm, however, may be used when
deemed appropriate by the Society.
(b) Kind of base metal
The kind of base metal is, in principle, to be as specified in Table M4.1.4-8.
M4.2
M4.2.2
Tests for Butt Welded Joints
Kinds of Test
As for the welding of aluminium alloys, imperfections detected by visual or non-destructive testing are to be assessed in
16
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M4)
accordance with ISO 10042:2018, Level B, except for excess weld metal or convexity, excess throat thickness and excess of penetration
for which Level C applies.
M4.2.3
Test Assemblies
In cases where it is difficult to collect a specified number of test specimens from a single test assembly due to tube diameter,
the test specimens may be collected from the minimum number of required test assemblies.
M4.2.5
Tensile Tests
In tensile test specified in 4.2.5, Part M of the Rules, procedure of approval for tensile test is to be complied with as follows:
(1) Documents for shape of test specimens and test procedure
(2) Documents for strength of weld connections (including microscopic photograph of welding parts)
(3) Tensile tests for deposited metal and heat affected zone of welding
M4.2.7
1
Impact Tests
With respect to Table4.9 Notes (1), Part M of the Rules, the wording “impact test requirements deemed appropriate by the
Society” refers to the following.
(1) Where the thickness of test assemblies is more than 50 mm and not exceeding 70 mm, values in Table M4.2.7-1.
(2) Where the thickness of test assemblies is exceeding 70 mm, values deemed appropriate by the Society.
2
The wording “where deemed appropriate by the Society” in 4.2.7-7, Part M of the Rules means the member to be welded by
the welding procedure in question is considered to have a low risk of brittle fracture, such as engine seats, stern frames and crane posts,
etc.
Table M4.2.7-1
Impact Test Requirements for Butt Welded Joint
(Rolled Steels for Hull whose thickness of test assemblies is more than 50 mm and not exceeding 70 mm)
Value of minimum mean absorbed energy (J)
Grade of steel
Testing temperature
(℃)
For manually or semi-automatically
welded joints
Downhand,
Horizontal
Overhead
KA(1)
20
(1)
KB , KD
0
KE
-20
KA32, KA36
20
KD32, KD36
0
KE32, KE36
-20
KF32, KF36
-40
KA40
20
KD40
0
KE40
-20
KF40
-40
KE47
-20
For automatically
Vertical upward,
welded joints
Vertical downward
41
41
46
46
47
64
Note:
(1) For a bond and heat affected zone, value of minimum mean absorbed energy is to be 34J.
M4.3
M4.3.1
Tests for Fillet Weld Joints
Application
The fillet welding procedure qualification test using non-low hydrogen electrodes for high tensile steels is to be in accordance
with the following requirements in addition to 4.3, in Part M of the Rules.
17
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M4)
(1) Welding process
The welding process is to be the one pass horizontal fillet welding either by gravity welding or manual welding.
(2) Test assemblies
(a) The test assemblies are to be KA32, KD32, KA36 or KD36 of TMCP steels defined in Note (1) of Table M2.4.3-1.
(b) The carbon equivalent Ceq of the test assemblies is to be calculated by the method shown in Note (3) of Table M2.4.3-1,
which is, in principle, to be not larger than 0.36%.
(c) The thickness of test assemblies is to be the maximum thickness of plates used in actual work.
(3) Electrodes
The electrodes are to have been approved by the Society as the non-low hydrogen electrodes for high tensile steels in accordance
with M6.2.1.
(4) Kinds of test
For welding procedure qualification tests, the restrained fillet crack test shown in (5) below is to be added to those specified in
4.3.2, in Part M of the Rules.
(5) Restrained fillet crack test
(a) The dimensions and shape of the test assemblies are to be as shown in Fig. M4.3.1-1.
(b) The welding procedure is to be in accordance with Table M4.3.1-1.
(c) The acceptance criteria are to be shown in accordance with Table M4.3.1-2.
M4.3.2
Kinds of Test
As for welding of aluminium alloys, imperfections detected by visual or non-destructive testing are to be assessed in accordance
with ISO 10042:2018, Level B, except for excess weld metal or convexity, excess throat thickness and excess of penetration for which
Level C applies.
M4.3.3
1
Test Assemblies and Welding
For 4.3.3-1, Part M of the Rules, shop primer of test assemblies is equivalent to coatings of actual work.
Fig M4.3.1-1 Shapes of Test Assembly (Unit: 𝑚𝑚)
Table M4.3.1-1
Welding Procedure
Testing temperature
Room temperature
Welding sequence
After running one pass on one side, welding on the
opposite side is to be carried out after chilling the test
assembly to the testing temperature.
18
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M4)
Table M4.3.1-2
Surface cracks
Acceptance Criteria
Liquid penetrant tests or magnetic particle tests are to be
carried out for the whole length of the bead in 48 hours
after completion of welding, where by it is to be verified
that there are no surface cracks. However, cracks are not
to be regarded as surface cracks.
Sectional cracks
For the three sectional faces of welds excluding craters,
root cracks and toe cracks are to be inspected with a
magnifying glass (magnifying ratio of 5 to 10 times), and
it to be verified that there are no sectional cracks.
However, those with a length of less than 0.5 mm may be
ignored.
Hardness test
Hardness distribution at positions specified in Fig.
M4.3.1-2 in addition to those specified in 6.2.13, Part M
of the Rules is to be measured. However, the measured
hardness values are to be for reference only.
19
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M5)
M5
M5.1
WELDERS AND THEIR QUALIFICATION TESTS
General
M5.1.2
Qualification Test Applications
The name of the automatic welding procedure to be used in automatic welding qualification tests is to be included on the welders
qualification test application form.
M5.1.3
Welder Qualification Certificates
The symbols used on qualification certificates are to be in accordance with the essential variables applied in the welding of test
assemblies during qualification tests (Initial). The symbols to represent qualifications consist of a combination of the symbols according
to the variables specified in 5.2.1, Part M of the Rules.
(1) The symbols used for qualifications for plates are to be indicated in the following order: welding process, product, type of
welded joint, base metal, base metal thickness, welding position and detail of welded joint.
(Example: MW-P-B-CS-t10-PA-ss nb)
(2) The symbols used for qualifications for tubes are to be indicated in the following order: welding process, product, type of
welded joint, base metal, base metal thickness, outside diameter, welding position and detail of welded joint.
(Example: TW-T-B-CS-t3-D20-PC-ss gb)
(3) The symbols used for qualifications for welders responsible for the setting up and/or adjusting of automatic welding process
are to be indicated in the following order: welding process, base metal.
(Example: SAW-CS)
(4) The symbols used for qualifications for tack welding only are to be indicated in the following order: welding process, product,
type of welded joint, base metal and welding position(s). In such cases, “ t ” is to be added before symbols indicating welding
processes.
(Example: tMW-P-B-CS-PA)
M5.1.4
Period of Validity for Qualification Certificates
In cases where two or more qualifications are acquired, the dates of validity specified for all qualifications can be changed to
the earliest date of validity at the request of the applicant.
M5.1.5
Verification of the validity of Qualification Certificates
The wording “in cases where deemed appropriately by the Society” in 5.1.5-2, Part M of the Rules refers to only those cases
where verification by a Society surveyor is required because the kind of base metal listed on the certificate is stainless steel, aluminium
alloy or nickel steel, and the interval between welding work undertaken by the applicant has exceeded six months.
M5.1.6
1
Renewal of Qualification Certificates
In cases where the renewal method in 5.1.6-1(2), Part M of the Rules is applied, documents which specify the welding
condition (including all essential variables except for base metal thickness) applied as well as the extent of testing are specified is to
be submitted.
2
A Surveyor is, in principle, to be present during ultrasonic testing.
3
With respect to the provisions of 5.1.6-1(2), Part M of the Rules，the welded joints specified in the following (1) through (3)
are to be used in qualification tests. In addition, the dimension of a single part to be evaluated is to be not less than the dimensions
specified in 5.3.3, Part M of the Rules.
(1) Welded joints welded in accordance with the requirements specified in 5.3.3, Part M of the Rules.
(2) Welded joints of test assemblies which are attached in line with the butts or seams of the finished product, etc. and which are
welded at the same time.
(3) Welded joints included in the butts and seams of finished products, etc.
4
With respect to the provisions of 5.1.6-1(3), Part M of the Rules, it is preferable that the person who evaluates welds on behalf
of a shipyard or manufacturer is themselves qualified in accordance with national or international qualification standards.
20
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M5)
M5.2
M5.2.1
Qualifications
Kind of Qualification
The wording “in cases where deemed appropriately by the Society” in 5.2.1-2, Part M of the Rules refers to the following (1)
and (2):
(1) The qualifications of welders engaged in TIG welding for the initial pass is to be ss nb or ss gb corresponding to the essential
variables for product, type of welded joint, base metal, outside diameter (tube only) and welding position.
(2) The qualifications of welders engaged in welding after TIG welding for the initial pass may be ss mb, bs mb or bs nb
corresponding to the essential variables for product, type of welded joint, base metal, base metal thickness, outside diameter
(tube only) and welding position.
M5.2.2
1
Range of Qualification
Welders who possess qualifications related to welding processes using welding consumables may carry out welding work
without welding consumables.
2
The wording “in cases where deemed appropriately by the Society” in 5.2.2-6, Part M of the Rules refers to in the following
(1) and (2), in addition to Table M5.2.2-1:
(1) Welders who are qualified for welding positions of PA, PE and PF/PG for the butt welding of plates may perform the butt
welding of tubes whose fixed outside diameters exceed 300 mm as PH/PJ in case where the essential variables relating to
welding process, type of welded joint, base metal, and detail of welded joint are the same or are included in the acquired
qualifications for the overlapping range of qualification for base metal thickness involved in each qualification.
(2) Welders who are qualified for welding positions of PB, PD and PF/PG for the fillet welding of plates may perform out the fillet
welding for tubes fixed as PH/PJ in cases where the essential variables relating to welding process, type of welded joint, base
metal, and detail of welded joint are the same or are included in the acquired qualifications, for the overlapping range of
qualification for base metal thickness involved in each qualification.
Table M5.2.2-1
Welding position used
for test assembly
Applicable Welding Positions
Position applicable to actual welding work
Tube
Fillet welding
Plate
Butt welding
Butt welding
PA
PC
PE
PF
PG
PA
PB
PC
PD
PE
PF
PG
PA
PA，PC
PA，PC
PA
-
PA
PC
PH
PJ
PA
PB
PD
PH
PJ
PA
PA，PC
PA，
PA，
-
Butt welding
Fillet welding
Tube(1)
Butt welding
PE，PF
PE，
PG
21
Fillet welding
PA，PB
PA，PB
PA，PB，PD
PA，PB
PA
PA，PB
PA，PB
PA，PB，PD
PA，PB，PD
PA，PB
Plate
Fillet welding
PA，PB
PA，PB，PC
PA，PB，PC，PD ，PE，PF
PA，PB，
PD ，PE，
PA
PA，PB
PA，PB，PC，PD ，PE
PA，PB，PC，PD ，PE，PF
PA，PB，
PD ，PE，
PG
PG
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M5)
Note:
(1) This table may be applied when the outside diameter of a tube test assembly exceeds 25 mm
M5.3
Qualification tests
M5.3.1
Kinds and Procedures of Qualification Tests
The wording “in cases where deemed appropriately by the Society” in 5.3.1-3, Part M of the Rules refers to the following (1)
through (3):
(1) With respect to the qualification tests for automatic welding procedures, the welded joints specified in the following (a) through
(c) are to be used in qualification tests. In addition, the extent of the test carried out is to be not less than the dimensions specified
in 5.3.3, Part M of the Rules:
(a) Welded joints welded in accordance with the requirements specified in 5.3.3, Part M of the Rules.
(b) Welded joints of test assemblies which are attached in line with the butts or seams of the finished product, etc., and are
welded at the same time.
(c) Welded joints included in the butts and seams of finished products, etc.
(2) In cases where the welded joints specified in (1)(c) above are used, applicant is to designate the extent of the evaluation before
welding.
(3) The setting up and/or adjusting of welding machines used in qualification tests and welding test assemblies is to be carried out
in the presence of a surveyor.
M5.3.2
Testing Materials and Welding Consumables
The wording “equivalent quality approved by the Society” specified in 5.3.2, Part M of the Rules refers to the following
requirements or equivalent standards approved by the Society:
(1) Carbon steels
(a) For plate test assemblies
JIS G 3101 Rolled steel for general structure (SS400)
JIS G 3103 Carbon steel and molybdenum alloy steel plates for boilers and pressure vessels (SB410, SB450)
JIS G 3106 Rolled steel for welded structure (SM400A to SM400C)
(b) For tube test assemblies
JIS G 3456 Carbon steel pipes for high temperature service (STPT410)
JIS G 3461 Carbon steel boiler and heat exchanger tubes (STB410)
JIS G 3454 Carbon steel tubes for pressure service (STPG410)
Tube manufactured of rolled steel specified in (a) above
(c) For welding consumables
JIS Z 3211 (Covered electrodes for mild steel, high tensile strength steel and low temperature service steel)
JIS Z 3312 (Solid wires for MAG and MIG welding of mild steel, high strength steel and low temperature service steel)
(2) Stainless steels
(a) For plate test assemblies
JIS G 4304 Hot-rolled stainless steel plate, sheet and strip
JIS G 4305 Cold-rolled stainless steel plate, sheet and strip
(b) For tube test assemblies
JIS G 3448 Light gauge stainless steel tubes for ordinary piping
JIS G 3459 Stainless steel pipes
Tube manufactured of rolled steel specified in (a) above
(c) For welding consumables
JIS Z 3221 Stainless steel covered electrodes
JIS Z 3321 Stainless steel rods, wires and strip electrodes for welding
(3) Aluminium alloys
(a) For plate test assemblies
22
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M5)
JIS H 4000 Aluminium and aluminium alloy sheets, strips and plates (A5083P-O)
(b) For tube test assemblies
JIS H 4080 Aluminium and aluminium alloys extruded tubes and cold-down tubes (A5083)
JIS H 4090 Aluminium and aluminium alloy welded pipes and tubes (A5083)
Tube manufactured of material specified in (a) above
(c) For welding consumables
JIS Z 3232 Aluminium and aluminium alloy welding rods and wires
23
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M6)
M6
M6.1
General
M6.1.3
1
WELDING CONSUMABLES
Approval
The wording “brand” in 6.1.3-1, Part M of the Rules includes the combination consisting of electrode numbers, flux, filler and
backing etc. in addition to welding consumables (filler rod, filler wire) in general.
2
The treatment of 6.1.3-8, Part M of the Rules is to be in accordance with Table M6.1.3-1 and Table M5.10.
Table M6.1.3-1
Correspondence of the Fillet Welding Positions with the Butt Welding Positions
Position of butt
welding
Flat (PA)
Horizontal (PC)
Vertical upward (PF)
Vertical downward (PG)
Overhead (PE)
M6.2
Fillet welding position deemed to be
included in butt welding position
Flat in fillet welding (PA)
Horizontal-vertical in fillet welding (PB)
Horizontal in fillet welding (PC)
Horizontal-vertical in fillet welding (PB)
Vertical upward in fillet welding (PF)
Vertical downward in fillet welding (PG)
Horizontal overhead (PD)
Overhead in fillet welding (PE)
Electrodes for Manual Arc Welding for Mild and High Tensile Steels and Steels for Low Temperature Service
M6.2.1
Application
The approval test and annual inspections of non-low hydrogen electrodes for high tensile steels referred to in 2.4.1(2)(c), Part
M of the Rules are to be in accordance with the following requirements:
(1) Non-low hydrogen electrodes are to be used exclusively for fillet welding specified in 6.2.1(1) and (2), Part M of the Rules.
(2) The quantity of the hydrogen in electrodes is, in principle, to be not greater than 0.25 cm3/g (by the glycerin replacement
method).
(3) The test assemblies used for approval tests and annual inspections are to be in accordance with the requirements in M4.3.1(2)(a)
and (b).
(4) The approval test is to be carried out by adding the following tests shown in (5) and (6) below to the tests specified in 6.2.3,
Part M of the Rules.
(5) Hydrogen test
(6) Surface crack test
Liquid penetrant tests or magnetic particle tests are to be carried out for the whole length of the bead in 48 hours after completion
of welding, whereby it is to be verified that there are no surface cracks. However, crater cracks are not to be regarded as surface
cracks.
(7) Annual inspections are to be in accordance with the requirements in 6.2.15, Part M of the Rules.
M6.2.4
General Provisions for Tests
Hot cracking test specified in 6.2.4-1, Part M of the Rules is to be done as follows:
(1) Test assemblies and welding method.
(a) Test assemblies are to be as shown in Fig. M6.2.4-1 and the tack welds in preparation for the fillet welds is to make at the
both ends of the plate.
(b) One test assembly is to be prepared for each diameter of electrode specified in Table M6.2.4-1.
(c) The fillet welding is to be carried out in the downhand position in one pass on each side and the welding current used is to
be the maximum of the range recommended by the manufacturer for the size of electrode used.
24
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M6)
(d) The second fillet weld is to be started immediately after the completion of the first fillet weld from the end of the test
specimen at which the first fillet weld was finished. Both fillet welds are to be executed at a constant speed and without
weaving.
(e) Length of fused electrode in hot cracking test is to be as shown Table M6.2.4-1 according to the diameter of electrodes.
(2) Surface inspections
After welding, the slag is to be removed from the fillet welds and after complete cooling, they are to be examined for cracks by
a magnifying glass or by using penetrant fluids.
(3) Fracture test
(a) The first fillet weld is then to be cut out by machining or gouging and the second weld broken by closing the two plates
together, subjecting the root of the weld to tension (See Fig. M6.2.4-2). The weld is then to be examined for evidence of
hot cracking.
(b) There is to be no cracking in the fillet welds (except crater crack) either superficial or internal.
Fig. M6.2.4-1 Hot Cracking Test (Unit: mm)
Table M6.2.4-1
Diameter and Fused Length of Electrode in Hot Cracking Test
Diameter of electrode(1)
Length of fused electrode
1st fillet
2nd fillet
4 mm
Approx. 200 mm
Approx. 150 mm
5 mm
Approx. 150 mm
Approx. 100 mm
6 mm
Approx. 100 mm
Approx. 75 mm
Note:
(1) If the electrode whose diameter is specified in the table is not
producted, the electrode whose diameter is near to it may be used.
25
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M6)
Fig M6.2.4-2 Hot Cracking test
M6.2.5
Welding Procedure of Test Assemblies
1
The positions of back welding described in 6.2.5-2(3), Part M of the Rules are to be in accordance with Table M6.2.5-1.
2
The hydrogen test specimen specified in 6.2.5-3, Part M of the Rules is to be in accordance with M6.2.11-1.
3
The radiographic tests specified in 6.2.5-6, Part M of the Rules are to be carried out to verify the soundness of the test assembly
by detecting defects originating from welding process, etc. (i.e. defects not directly originating from the welding consumables).
However, the number of retests based on the results of radiographic tests is to be limited to twice (three times if the initial test assembly
is included).
Table M6.2.5-1
Position of Back Welding
Position of face
Corresponding position of back
welding
welding
Flat
Overhead(1)
Horizontal
Horizontal
Vertical upward
Vertical upward
Vertical downward
Vertical downward
Overhead
Flat
Note:
(1) Using the electrodes for flat position only, the back welding
is to be in flat position.
M6.2.11
1
Hydrogen Test
The glycerin method or the mercury method or the gas chromatography method specified in 6.2.11-1, Part M of the Rules is
to be in accordance with the following.
(1) Glycerin method
As a rule, mild and high tensile steels are to be used for the test assembly. Four test specimens with a dimension of 12 mm thick,
25 mm wide and 125 mm long are to be prepared. Before welding, the test specimens are to be weighted to the nearest 0.1 g.
On the 25 mm surface of each test specimen, a single bead of welding is to be deposited 100 mm in length by 4 mm electrode,
using 150 mm electrode. The welding is to be carried out using electrodes dried up by a suitable method recommended by the
manufacture, with an arc of shortest possible length and with a current of 150A, is to be quenched in water at a temperature
of approximately 20℃ for 30 sec, after removing the slag within a period of 30 sec. Subsequently, the test specimens are
to be cleaned and be sealed into a hydrogen collector by means of the glycerin replacement method. The glycerin is to be
kept at a temperature of approximately 45℃ during the test. The test time required for all the four test specimens from
welding to the enclosure in the hydrogen collector is to be within 30 min. After immersing into glycerin for 48 hours, the
test specimens are to be cleaned with water and alcohol and weighed with an accuracy of 0.1 g after being dried to measure
the weight of the deposited metal. The volume of hydrogen gas collected is to be measured with an accuracy of 0.05 cm3
and converted into that under the conditions 20℃ and 1 atmospheric (760 mmHg.).
(2) Mercury method
Mercury method is to be in accordance with the requirements in ISO 3690:2018.
(3) Gas chromatography method
Gas chromatography method is to be in accordance with the requirement in ISO 3690:2018 or JIS Z 3118 (Method of
Measurement for Hydrogen Evolved from Steel Welds based on ISO 3690:2018).
2
Where the mean value of hydrogen by mercury method or gas chromatography method specified in 6.2.11-2, Table M6.9 Note
26
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M6)
(1), Part M of the Rules, is less than 0.05 cm 3/g the mark “H5” may be added after the grades mark by manufacturer recommends.
(Example: KMW53H5)
M6.7
M6.7.2
Welding Consumables for Stainless Steel
Grades and Marks of Welding Consumables
Application of provisory requirement specified in 6.7.2-4, Part M of the Rules is to be limited to the case where minimum
proof stress of welding consumables of which the specified minimum proof stress is 315 N/mm 2 or less is specified at a greater value.
In this case, the specified minimum proof stress is to be accordance with Table M6.7.2-1 as a standard.
Table M6.7.2-1
M6.7.9
Specified Minimum Proof Stress
Grade
Proof stress(N/mm 2)
-235M
235 min.
-275M
275 min.
-315M
315 min.
Bend Test of Butt Welds
In 6.7.9-3, Part M of the Rules, “longitudinal bend test deemed appropriate by the Society” means to comply with the
requirements of the following (1) to (3). After the test, there are to be neither cracks nor any other defects greater than 3 mm in length
in any direction on the surface of bent specimen.
(1) The test specimens are to be the longitudinal face bend or root bend specimen specified in JIS Z 3122 “Methods of Bend Test
for Butt Welded Joint”.
(2) Inside bend radius is to be twice the thickness.
(3) Degree of bending is to be 180 degrees.
27
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M7)
M7
M7.1
M7.1.1
Non-Destructive Testing Service Suppliers
General
Application
For requirements specified in this chapter which are covered by the certificate issued to suppliers by the Japan Welding
Engineering Society (JWES) in accordance with WES 8701 “Standard for certification of nondestructive inspection corporation for
welded structures”, the Society may regard such suppliers as satisfying the corresponding requirements in this chapter when confirming
compliance with this chapter.
28
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M8)
M8
NON-DESTRUCTIVE INSPECTION FOR THE WELDED JOINTS OF HULL
CONSTRUCTIONS
M8.1
General
M8.1.1
General
For the wording “deemed appropriate by the Society” specified in 8.1.1-3, Part M of the Rules,
in ships of 30 m or over in length, the inspections are to be carried out for the block joints of structural members welded in the dry
dock, on the slipway or at any other assembly space as shown in Table M8.1.1-1. For ships of less than 30 m in length, the range of
the inspection, the members to be inspected and the number of photographs are to be determined by the Surveyor based on
consultation with the manufacturer.
Table M8.1.1-1
Members Subject to Inspections and Number of Inspections
Members subject
Number of inspections for each members subject to inspection *1, *2
to inspections
Hull within 0.6L amidship
Strength deck
Plates
Side shell plating
Bottom shell plating
Butt joints
6
𝐿
10
One-third
of
the
Hull without 0.6L amidship
Seam joints
2
𝐿
10
Butt joints or Seam joints
2
𝐿
10
1
𝐿
40
1
𝐿
40
above
mentioned number is to be the
intersections of weld lines
Hatch side coaming
(including the top plate) *3
Other member*4
Plates
3
𝐿
40
One-third
of
the
above
mentioned number is to be the
Girders
Frames
intersections of weld lines
2
𝐿
40
3
𝐿
40
Notes:
＊1 Number of inspections is to round up decimal places per joints of each members subject to inspections.
＊2 Distribution of number of inspections may change in consideration of the type of ship, structural arrangement, welding
process, arrangement of joints, etc.
＊3 Butt joints of the hatch side coaming exceeding 0.15L in length.
＊4 For automatic welded joints, the number of inspection may reduce up to the half of the number, upon the approval of
Surveyor.
M8.4
M8.4.2
General Plan of Non-destructive Inspection
Location of Inspections
1
The locations of inspections are not to adjoin each other.
2
Where ultrasonic tests are accepted instead of radiographic tests according to the requirements of 8.1.2-5, the location of
inspection of ultrasonic testing are to comply with the following requirements;
(1) For strength deck, side shell plating, bottom shell plating and hatch side coaming (including the top plate), although the number
29
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M8)
of inspections are to be not more than the half number of inspections specified in Table M8.1.1-1, the locations of inspection
are to be approved by the Surveyor. However, the intersections of butt welds are to be excluded.
(2) For structural members except for strength deck, side shell plating and bottom shell plating, the locations of inspection may be
all the locations specified in Table M8.1.1-1. However, the intersections of the weld lines of plate members are to be excluded.
3
In addition to the preceding -1 and -2, for the wording “Welds for which non-destructive inspections are deemed necessary by
the Surveyor” in 8.4.2-1(7), Part M of the Rules, non-destructive testing is to be carried out for parts of welded joints of hatch corner
and welded joints of insert plate for working holes, as decided and instructed by the Surveyor.
4
If deemed necessary in consideration of the following items, the Surveyor may require, additional non-destructive inspections
for welds other than those subject to non-destructive inspection, or the alteration of the non-destructive inspection procedure.
(1) The results of visual inspection for welds of the members
(2) The welding condition for the members (welding process, thickness, welding heat input)
M8.4.3
1
Non-destructive Test Application Procedure
Regarding the application of the requirements specified in 8.4.3-8, Part M of the Rules, where welding base metals with
different plate thicknesses, the thickness of the thinner plate may be used as the plate thickness of the welded joint.
2
Where the non-destructive testing specified in 8.4.3-8, Part M of the Rules is carried out, the TOFD technique or phased array
ultrasonic testing (PAUT) may be carried out. In such cases, the shipbuilder or its subcontractor is to obtain the approval of the Society.
M8.5
M8.5.3
Non-destructive Testing Procedure
Liquid Penetrant Testing
For the wording “it is to be deemed appropriate by the Society” in 8.5.3-3, Part M of the Rules, special low/high temperature
penetrants and reference comparator blocks are to be used. The penetration time is not to be less than 10 minutes and to be in accordanc e
with manufacturer specifications. It is preferable that the development time be between 10-30 minutes.
M8.5.4
Magnetic Particle Testing
In magnetic particle testing, when using current flow equipment with prods, care is to be taken to avoid local damage to the
material. Copper prod tips are not to be used. Prod tips are to be either lead, steel, aluminium or aluminium-copper braid. To ensure
detection of discontinuities of any orientation, welds are to be magnetized in two directions approximately perpendicular to each other
with a maximum deviation of 30°. Adequate overlapping is to ensure testing of the whole zone. As far as practicable, the continuous
wet particle method is to be used.
M8.5.5
Radiographic Testing
In radiographic testing, marks indicating at least the location of inspections and the symbol that can identify the ship (e.g. ship
number), date and time when photographed and something indicating the test condition (i.e. penetrometer and contrast indicator) are
to be in the radiograph.
M8.6
M8.6.2
Non-destructive Testing Criteria
Quality Level
The wording “Where it is deemed necessary by the Society” in 8.6.2-1, Part M of the Rules means the cases in which electro gas welding is applied to container carrier hatch side coamings that are constructed of extremely thick steel plates which comply with
10.5, Part 2-1, Part C of the Rules.
M8.6.5
Visual Testing Criteria
The wording “deemed appropriate by the Society” in 8.6.5, Part M of the Rules means IACS Recommendation No.47
“Shipbuilding and Repair Quality Standard” or equivalent standard approved by the Society.
M8.9
M8.9.2
1
Repair of Faulty Welds, etc.
Repair and Treatment after the Repair
If the part is judged unacceptable (hereinafter referred to as “faulty welds”), the following measures are to be undertaken. The
30
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M8)
faulty welds are to be repaired properly.
(1) In the plate members given in Table M8.1.1-1, additional non-destructive test is to be carried out for other two parts within the
weld lines where the faulty welds are found.
(2) In the girder or frame members given in Table M8.1.1-1, additional non-destructive test is to be carried out for two welding
joints for each member, which the same welding procedure with the faulty welds is applied to the same block joints.
(3) In preceding (1) and (2), additional non-destructive test for automatic welding parts is to be extended to all length or all number
of the welded joints.
2
Where faulty welds are found by the non-destructive test specified in preceding -1, the following measures are to be carried out
for the welded joints.
(1) For the requirements specified in preceding -1(1), non-destructive test is to be extended to all length of the welded joints.
(2) For the requirements specified in preceding -1(2), non-destructive test is to be extended to all number of joints of the members.
(3) For the requirements specified in preceding -1(3), the faulty welds are to be repaired.
(4) Notwithstanding the requirements specified in preceding (1) to (3), all length or all number of welded joints may be repaired.
3
The faulty welds, which are detected as a result of non-destructive test specified in preceding -2(1) and (2), are to be repaired.
4
Notwithstanding preceding -1 to -3, repair process and additional non-destructive test in other welded joints are to be carried
out according to the Surveyor’s direction taking account of the condition of faulty welds (kind, size and distribution of defects, etc.).
5
For the requirements specified in preceding -1 through -4, the faulty welds are to be repaired properly in accordance with the
repair procedures specified in 2.2.2-3, Part M of the Rules. Subsequent measures of the repaired parts are to be in accordance with
the Surveyor’s direction.
31
2023-12 Guidance for the Survey and Construction of Steel Ships (Part M Chapter M9)
M9
M9.5
M9.5.3
Advanced Non-Destructive Testing
ANDT Specification Verification
ANDT Specification Verification Tests
“Qualifications block are to be manufactured in accordance with a recognized standard deemed appropriate by the Society”
specified in 9.5.3-2, Part M of the Rules, means the “Intermediate Level” qualification blocks specified in ASME V Article 14
MANDATORY APPENDIX II UT PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION CRITERIA or qualification blocks deemed equivalent by the
Society. Where sizing error distributions and an accurate POD are evaluated, the “High Level” qualification blocks specified in ASME
V Article 14 MANDATORY APPENDIX II UT PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION CRITERIA or qualification blocks deemed
equivalent by the Society are to be used.
32
